Traverse

Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.
/Canada/Mexico- Black plate (1,1)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
2014 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3 Trademarks and License
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Keys, Doors, and Warning Lights, Gauges, and Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-42 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-49 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-22
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-28
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-32
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-54
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-35
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico- Black plate (2,1)
6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
2014 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 OnStar Additional
Special Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-11
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-13

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Introduction iii
Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of Propriétaires Canadiens
the features found on your vehicle. A French language manual can be
For vehicles first sold in Canada, obtained from your dealer, at
substitute the name “General www.helminc.com, or from:
Motors of Canada Limited” for
The names, logos, emblems, Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and appears in this manual. ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited Keep this manual in the vehicle for savant:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, quick reference.
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and Helm, Incorporated
TRAVERSE are trademarks and/or Attention: Customer Service
service marks of General Motors 47911 Halyard Drive
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, Plymouth, MI 48170
or licensors.
Using this Manual
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your specific To quickly locate information about
vehicle either because they are the vehicle, use the Index in the
options that you did not purchase or back of the manual. It is an
due to changes subsequent to the alphabetical list of what is in the
printing of this owner manual. manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 22867655 A First Printing 2013 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
iv Introduction
Danger, Warnings, and Symbols

Cautions
{ Caution
The vehicle has components and
Text marked { Caution provides labels that use symbols instead of
{ Danger information that may indicate a text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
hazard that could result in injury
Text marked { Danger provides or death. It could also result in information relating to a specific
information on risk of fatal injury. possible damage to the vehicle. component, control, message,
Disregarding this information may gauge, or indicator.
endanger life. M : This symbol is shown when
you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
{ Warning * : This symbol is shown when
Text marked { Warning provides you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information on risk of accident or A circle with a slash through it is a information.
injury. Disregarding this safety symbol which means “Do
information may lead to injury. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart B : Engine Coolant Temperature g : Outside Power Foldaway

Here are some additional symbols O : Exterior Lamps Mirrors
that may be found on the vehicle } : Power
and what they mean. For more # : Fog Lamps
information on the symbol, refer to . : Fuel Gauge / : Remote Vehicle Start
the Index.
+ : Fuses > : Safety Belt Reminders
9 : Airbag Readiness Light 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) Changer _ : Tow/Haul Mode
% : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls j : LATCH System Child t : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
or OnStar Restraints M : Windshield Washer Fluid
$ : Brake System Warning Light *: Malfunction Indicator Lamp
" : Charging System :: Oil Pressure
I : Cruise Control

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
vi Introduction
2 NOTES

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Passenger Sensing Lane Departure

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Side Blind Zone
Instrument Panel Steering Wheel Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Rear Vision
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Initial Drive Information Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-22
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Universal Remote System . . . 1-22
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Vehicle Features Performance and Maintenance
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Traction Control/Electronic
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-19 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-23
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-24
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-19 Driving for Better Fuel
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Heated and Cooled Front Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Roadside Assistance
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Driver Information Center Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9 (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 1-20 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
In Brief 1-3
1. Air Vents on page 8-10. 7. Exterior Lamp Controls on 15. Steering Wheel Controls on
2. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and page 6-1. page 5-2 (If Equipped).
Lane-Change Signals on Fog Lamps on page 6-4 (If 16. Driver Information Center (DIC)
page 6-4 (Out of View). Equipped). Buttons. See Driver Information
Windshield Wiper/Washer on 8. Hood Release. See Hood on Center (DIC) (With DIC
page 5-4 (Out of View). page 10-4. Buttons) on page 5-24 or
Driver Information Center (DIC)
3. Instrument Cluster on page 5-11. 9. Parking Brake on page 9-27. (Without DIC Buttons) on
4. Instrument Panel Storage on 10. Data Link Connector (DLC) page 5-29.
page 4-1. (Out of View). See Malfunction 17. Climate Control Systems on
USB Port (Inside IP Storage). Indicator Lamp on page 5-17. page 8-1 (If Equipped).
See Auxiliary Devices on 11. Dome Lamp Override. See Dual Automatic Climate Control
page 7-34. Dome Lamps on page 6-5. System on page 8-4 (If
5. CD Player. See CD Player Instrument Panel Illumination Equipped).
(Radio with Touchscreen) on Control on page 6-5. 18. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into
page 7-23 or CD Player (Radio 12. Cruise Control on page 9-30. Park on page 9-19.
without Touchscreen) on
page 7-21. 13. Steering Wheel Adjustment on 19. Power Outlets on page 5-8.
page 5-2.
6. Infotainment on page 7-1.
14. Horn on page 5-3.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1-4 In Brief
20. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on Initial Drive

page 5-4.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Information
Disable Button. See Traction This section provides a brief
Control/Electronic Stability overview about some of the
Control on page 9-28. important features that may or may
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) not be on your specific vehicle.
System on page 9-32 (If For more detailed information, refer
Equipped). to each of the features which can be
Lane Departure Warning found later in this owner manual.
(LDW) on page 9-41 (If
Equipped). Remote Keyless Entry
Press K to unlock the driver door.
Tow/Haul Button (If Equipped). (RKE) System
Press K again within five seconds
See Tow/Haul Mode on The RKE transmitter is used to to unlock all remaining doors.
page 9-25. remotely lock and unlock the doors
Power Liftgate Button (If from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from Press Q to lock all doors.
Equipped). See Liftgate on the vehicle.
Lock and unlock feedback can be
page 2-8. personalized.
21. Heated and Cooled Front To open or close the liftgate, press
Seats on page 3-8 (If and hold 8 until the liftgate
Equipped).
begins to move.
22. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 6-3. Press L and release to locate the
vehicle.
23. Passenger Sensing System on
page 3-29.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
In Brief 1-5
Press L and hold for more than When the vehicle starts, the parking Door Locks
two seconds to sound the panic lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The To lock or unlock a door manually:
alarm.
doors will be locked and the climate . From the inside use the door
Press L again to cancel the panic control system may come on. lock knob on the window sill.
alarm. The engine will continue to run for . From the outside turn the key
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a toward the front or rear of the
System Operation on page 2-2. 10-minute time extension. Remote vehicle, or press the K or Q
start can be extended only once.
button on the Remote Keyless
Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Starting the Vehicle To cancel a remote start: Power Door Locks
With this feature the engine can be . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
started from outside of the vehicle. vehicle and press and hold /
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the until the parking lamps turn off.
vehicle. . Turn on the hazard warning
2. Press and release Q. flashers.
. Turn the ignition switch on and
3. Immediately after completing
then off.
Step 2, press and hold / until
the parking lamps flash. See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 2-4.
Base Model

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1-6 In Brief
Power Liftgate Windows

If equipped with a power liftgate, the
vehicle must be in P (Park) to
operate it.
. Press and hold 8 on the
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
Uplevel Model
K: Press to unlock the doors. Uplevel Shown, Base Similar
Q: Press to lock the doors.
Press the switch to lower the
See Power Door Locks on page 2-7. window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
Liftgate For more information, see Power
To open the liftgate the vehicle must Windows on page 2-18.
be in P (Park). Press the touch pad
under the liftgate handle. To close . Press O.
the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull . Press the touch pad on the
strap as an aid. outside liftgate handle.
See Liftgate on page 2-8.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
In Brief 1-7
Seat Adjustment 3. Try to move the seat back and 3. Lumbar Control
forth to be sure it is locked in To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
Manual Seats place.
. Move the seat forward or
Move the lever (2) up or down to rearward by sliding the
raise or lower the seat. control (1) forward or rearward.
Use the lever (3) to adjust the . Raise or lower the front part of
seatback. the seat cushion by moving the
See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3 front of the control (1) up
and Reclining Seatbacks on or down.
page 3-5. . Raise or lower the entire seat by
Power Seats moving the rear of the control (1)
up or down.
. Adjust the seatback by tilting the
top of the control (2) forward or
1. Seat Adjustment Handle rearward.
2. Driver Seat Height Adjustment See Reclining Seatbacks on
Lever page 3-5.
3. Seatback Lever . Increase or decrease lumbar
support by pressing the front or
To adjust a manual seat: rear of the control (3).
1. Lift the handle (1) under the seat See Lumbar Adjustment on
to unlock it. page 3-4.
2. Slide the seat to the desired See Power Seat Adjustment on
position, and then release the 1. Seat Adjustment Control
page 3-4.
handle (1). 2. Seatback Control

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1-8 In Brief
Memory Features Second Row Seats To fold the third row seatback:
1. Remove anything on or under
the seat.
If equipped, the controls on the The second row seat can be folded
driver door are used to program and to access the third row. Pull the
recall memory settings for the driver sliding seat lever forward; the seat 2. Disconnect the rear safety belt
seat and outside mirrors. cushion folds, and the seat slides mini-latch using a key in the slot
forward. on the mini-buckle, and let the
See Memory Seats on page 3-6 and belt retract into the headliner.
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC See Rear Seats on page 3-9. Stow the mini-latch in the holder
Buttons) on page 5-42. in the headliner.
Third Row Seats
The third row seatbacks can be
folded forward, and the seats can
be removed.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
In Brief 1-9
Heated and Cooled Front Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
Seats the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and one
for the lowest.
See Heated and Cooled Front Seats
on page 3-8.
Head Restraint
Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons Adjustment
3. Pull up on the release lever on Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
the back of the seat. Do not drive until the head restraints
Similar for all occupants are installed and
4. Push the seatback forward to adjusted properly.
If equipped, the buttons are on the
lay flat.
center console. To operate, the To achieve a comfortable seating
See Third Row Seats on page 3-11. engine must be running. position, change the seatback
I : If equipped, press to heat the recline angle as little as necessary
seatback only. while keeping the seat and the head
restraint height in the proper
H : If equipped, press to cool the position.
entire seat.
See Head Restraints on page 3-2
J: Press to heat the seat and and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.
seatback.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1-10 In Brief
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status

indicator will light on the instrument
System panel when the vehicle is started.
See Passenger Sensing System on
page 3-29.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
United States
Refer to the following sections for

important information on how to use
safety belts properly: Canada and Mexico
. Safety Belts on page 3-13. The passenger sensing system will
. How to Wear Safety Belts turn off the front outboard
Properly on page 3-15. passenger frontal airbag under
certain conditions. No other airbag Base Model
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-16. is affected by the passenger
To adjust the mirrors:
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for sensing system.
Children (LATCH System) on 1. Press o or p to select a mirror.
page 3-43.
2. Press the control pad to adjust
the mirror.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
In Brief 1-11
3. Return the switch to the center Folding Mirrors Interior Mirror

to deselect the mirror.
For vehicles with manual folding Adjustment
mirrors, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. Pull the mirror out to return Adjust the rearview mirror to clearly
to its original position. view the area behind the vehicle.
For vehicles with power folding Manual Rearview Mirror

mirrors: For vehicles with a manual rearview
mirror, push the tab forward for
daytime use and pull it for nighttime
use to avoid glare from the
headlamps from behind. See
Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2-18.
Uplevel Model Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror
To adjust the mirrors:
The mirror will automatically reduce
1. Press (1) or (2) to select a
the glare from the headlamps from
mirror.
behind. The dimming feature comes
2. Press the control pad to adjust on when the vehicle is started. See
the mirror. 1. Press (1) to fold the mirrors out Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
3. Press (1) or (2) again to deselect to the driving position. on page 2-18.
the mirror. 2. Press (2) to fold the mirrors in to
the folded position.
See Folding Mirrors on page 2-15.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1-12 In Brief
Steering Wheel Interior Lighting The dome lamp override button is

next to the exterior lamps control.
Adjustment Dome Lamps
E DOME OFF: Press the button
The dome lamps are in the and the dome lamps remain off
overhead console and above the when a door is opened. An indicator
rear seat passengers. light on the button comes on to
The dome lamps come on when a show that the dome lamps are off.
door is opened, unless the dome Press the button again so the dome
lamp override button is pressed in. lamps come on when a door is
opened.
To manually turn them on, turn the
instrument panel brightness control
clockwise to the farthest position.
Dome Lamp Override
To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
3. Pull or push the steering wheel
closer or away from you.
4. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in place. AMBIENT OFF (If Equipped):
Press the button to turn the ambient
Do not adjust the steering wheel lights off. Press the button again to
while driving. turn ambient lights on.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
In Brief 1-13
Reading Lamps AUTO: Turns the headlamps on Windshield Wiper/Washer

Press the button near each lamp to automatically at normal brightness,
together with the other exterior The windshield wiper/washer lever
turn them on or off. is located on the left side of the
lamps and instrument panel lights.
For more information, see: steering column.
; : Turns on the parking lamps
. Dome Lamps on page 6-5. including all lamps, except the Turn the band with the wiper symbol
headlamps. to control the windshield wipers.
. Instrument Panel Illumination
Control on page 6-5. 5 : Turns on the headlamps
together with the parking lamps and
Exterior Lighting instrument panel lights. A warning
chime sounds if the driver door is
opened when the ignition switch is
off and the headlamps are on.
See:
. Exterior Lamp Controls on 8: Use for a single wiping cycle.
page 6-1 OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/ 6: Delays wiping cycle. Turn the
Automatic Headlamp System on band up for more frequent wipes or
page 6-2 down for less frequent wipes.
The exterior lamp control is on the . Delayed Headlamps on page 6-3
instrument panel, to the left of the LO: Slow wipes.
steering wheel. HI: Fast wipes.
O : Briefly turn to this position to
turn the automatic light control off or
on again.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1-14 In Brief
Windshield Washer Climate Controls

J FRONT : Press the button at
the end of the lever to spray washer
fluid on the windshield.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper and rear wash button
is on the center stack below the
climate control system.
Z : Press to turn the rear wiper on
and off. The wiper speed cannot be
changed.
Y : Press to spray washer fluid on
the rear window. The window wiper
will also come on. 1. Fan Control 5. Air Delivery Mode Control
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on 2. REAR (Rear Climate Control) 6. Air Conditioning
page 5-4 and Rear Window Wiper/
3. Temperature Control 7. Rear Window Defogger
Washer on page 5-4.
4. Recirculation

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
In Brief 1-15
Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Mode
ERS mode allows you to choose the
top-gear limit of the transmission
and the vehicle's speed while
driving downhill or towing a trailer.
The vehicle has an electronic shift
position indicator within the
instrument cluster. When using the
ERS mode a number will display
next to the L, indicating the current
gear that has been selected.
1. Driver and Passenger Side 9. Recirculation To use this feature:
Temperature Controls 10. Air Conditioning 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).
2. Air Delivery Mode Controls See Climate Control Systems on 2. Press the plus/minus button on
3. SYNC (Synchronized page 8-1 or Dual Automatic Climate the shift lever, to increase or
Temperature) Control System on page 8-4 (If decrease the gear range
Equipped). For more information available.
4. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
about the rear climate control, see See Manual Mode on page 9-24.
5. REAR (Rear Climate Control) Rear Climate Control System on
6. Defrost page 8-8 or Rear Climate Control
System (with Rear Seat Audio) on
7. Rear Window Defogger page 8-9.
8. Fan Control

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1-16 In Brief
Vehicle Features © or ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

4 : Change the display between the
Radio(s) radio station frequency and the
time, if equipped. While the ignition
Radio without Touchscreen is off, press 4 to display the time.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
Operation (Radio without
Touchscreen) on page 7-5 or
Operation (Radio with Touchscreen)
on page 7-8.
If equipped with Rear Audio
Controller (RAC), see Rear Audio
Controller (RAC) on page 7-36.
If equipped with Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE), see the
infotainment manual.
Storing a Favorite Station
A maximum of 36 stations can be
stored as favorites using the six
softkeys located below the radio
O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between station frequency tabs and by using
and off. Turn to increase or FM, AM, or SiriusXM®, if equipped. the radio FAV button. Press FAV to
decrease the volume. go through up to six pages of
f: Select radio stations. favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
In Brief 1-17
page of favorites can contain any Radio with Touchscreen

combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM
stations.
See AM-FM Radio (Radio without
Touchscreen) on page 7-11 or
AM-FM Radio (Radio with
Touchscreen) on page 7-12.
Setting the Clock
To set the time and date:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
press O to turn the radio on.
2. Press H to display HR, MIN,
MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,
month, day, and year).
3. Press the pushbutton located
under any one of the labels to be AUX Port: 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
PUSH/O : Press to turn the system
changed. connection for external audio
on and off. Turn to adjust the
4. To increase or decrease the time volume. devices.
or date, turn f clockwise or Z: Press to eject a disc from the PUSH/SEL: Turn to manually find a
counterclockwise. CD. See CD Player (Radio with station or highlight a menu
See Clock (Radio with Touchscreen) Touchscreen) on page 7-23 or CD selection. Press to select a
on page 5-7 or Clock (Radio without Player (Radio without Touchscreen) highlighted selection.
Touchscreen) on page 5-7. on page 7-21.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1-18 In Brief
D: Press to go to the Home Page. 1. From the AM, FM, or SiriusXM Set Date:
See “Home Page” in Operation main page, press and hold any . Press the up or down arrows to
(Radio without Touchscreen) on 1−5 buttons or one of the preset increase or decrease the Month,
page 7-5 or Operation (Radio with screen buttons at the bottom of Day, and Year settings.
Touchscreen) on page 7-8. the screen. After a few seconds,
. Press and hold to quickly
a beep is heard and the new
SRCE: Press to change the audio preset information displays on increase or decrease the date
source to AM, FM, SiriusXM® (if that screen button. settings.
equipped), CD, USB, iPod®,
or AUX. 2. Repeat for each preset. . Press OK or the Back screen
button to save the adjustments.
FAV: Press to display the favorite Setting the Time and Date
list or add a favorite. See Operation See Clock (Radio with Touchscreen)
Press Settings on the Home Page, on page 5-7 or Clock (Radio without
(Radio without Touchscreen) on then press the Set Time or Set Date
page 7-5 or Operation (Radio with Touchscreen) on page 5-7.
settings screen button to display the
Touchscreen) on page 7-8. different options for setting the time Satellite Radio
© SEEK or SEEK ¨ : Seek or scan and date.
stations and tracks. See Operation Vehicles with a SiriusXM® satellite
Set Time: radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM
(Radio without Touchscreen) on
page 7-5 or Operation (Radio with . Press the up or down arrows to satellite radio subscription can
Touchscreen) on page 7-8. increase or decrease the Hours, receive SiriusXM programming.
Minutes, AM, PM, or 24 hr on
/ BACK: Press to return to the the clock. SiriusXM Satellite Radio
previous screen in a menu. Service
Storing Radio Station Presets increase or decrease the time SiriusXM is a satellite radio service
settings. based in the 48 contiguous United
Up to 30 preset stations can be
States and 10 Canadian provinces.
stored. AM, FM, and SiriusXM (if . Press OK or the Back screen SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
equipped) can be mixed. button to save the adjustments. variety of programming and

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
In Brief 1-19
commercial-free music, coast to If equipped, there are two USB Steering Wheel Controls
coast, and in digital-quality sound. ports on the rear of the center
A fee is required to receive the console that can be used for
SiriusXM service. charging only. They can charge
Refer to: devices that draw 2.1 amps or less.
See the device’s owner manual for
. www.siriusxm.com or call the specification.
1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-34.
. www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-209-0079 (Canada). Bluetooth®
See Satellite Radio (Radio without The Bluetooth® system allows users
Touchscreen) on page 7-15 or with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile
Satellite Radio (Radio with phone to make and receive
Touchscreen) on page 7-18. hands-free calls using the vehicle
audio system and controls.
Portable Audio Devices w or c /x : Press to change
The Bluetooth-enabled mobile favorite radio stations, select tracks
The vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) phone must be paired with the on a CD, or navigate tracks or
auxiliary input jack on the faceplate in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it folders on an iPod or USB device.
and a USB port in the instrument can be used in the vehicle. Not all
panel storage area. External phones will support all functions. b /g : Press and hold to silence
devices such as iPods, laptop the vehicle speakers only. Press
computers, MP3 players, CD See Bluetooth on page 7-37. again to turn the sound on. Press to
changers, USB storage devices, interact with OnStar® (if equipped)
etc. can be connected to the or Bluetooth systems.
auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
input jack or the USB port
depending on the audio system.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1-20 In Brief
c /x : Press to reject an Cruise Control SET–: Press briefly to set the

incoming call, or end a current call. speed and activate cruise control.
If cruise control is already active,
SRCE: Press to switch between use to decrease vehicle speed.
the radio, CD, and for equipped
vehicles, front auxiliary, rear [ : Press to disengage cruise
auxiliary, and iPod/USB. control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
¨ : Press to seek the next radio
station, track, or chapter while See Cruise Control on page 9-30.
sourced to the CD slot, or to select
tracks and folders on an iPod or Infotainment System
USB device. If the vehicle has a base radio it is
+ e or − e : Press to increase or to included in this manual. See the
decrease the volume. separate infotainment manual for
information on the connected radios,
See Steering Wheel Controls on T : Press to turn cruise control on audio players, phone, navigation
page 5-2. and off. The indicator light on the system, and voice or speech
button comes on when cruise recognition. There is also
control is on. information on settings and
downloadable applications (if
+RES: Press briefly to make the equipped).
vehicle resume to a previously set
speed, or press and hold to
accelerate. If cruise control is Driver Information Center
already active, use to increase (DIC) (With DIC Buttons)
vehicle speed. To access the DIC, some vehicles
have buttons located on the
instrument panel.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
In Brief 1-21
Some vehicles do not have the Lane Departure

buttons shown, however some of
the menus can be viewed by using
Warning (LDW)
the trip odometer reset stem. If equipped, LDW is intended to help
See Driver Information Center (DIC) avoid unintentional lane departures
(With DIC Buttons) on page 5-24 or at speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or
Driver Information Center (DIC) greater. LDW uses a camera sensor
V : Press to set or reset certain (Without DIC Buttons) on page 5-29. to detect the lane markings. The
functions and to turn off or LDW indicator, @, appears green if
acknowledge messages on the DIC. Forward Collision Alert a lane marking is detected. If the
U: vehicle departs the lane, the
Press to customize the feature (FCA) System indicator will change to amber and
settings on your vehicle. See
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC If equipped, FCA is intended to help flash. In addition, beeps will sound.
Buttons) on page 5-42 for more avoid or reduce the harm caused by See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
information. front-end crashes. FCA provides a on page 9-41.
green indicator when a vehicle is
T: Press to display the oil life, detected directly ahead. It provides Side Blind Zone
park assist on vehicles with this a flashing visual alert and beeps
feature, units, tire pressure readings when approaching a vehicle directly Alert (SBZA)
on vehicles with this feature, and ahead too quickly. FCA also If equipped, SBZA will detect
compass calibration and zone provides a visual alert if following vehicles in the next lane over in the
setting on vehicles with this feature. another vehicle much too closely. vehicle's side blind zone area.
3 : Press this button to display See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) When this happens, the SBZA
the odometer, trip odometers, fuel System on page 9-32. display will light up in the
range, average economy, timer, fuel corresponding outside side mirror
used, and average speed. and will flash if the turn signal is on.
See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
on page 9-36.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1-22 In Brief
Rear Vision Power Outlets Universal Remote System

Camera (RVC) The vehicle has 12-volt accessory
If equipped, RVC displays a view of power outlets, which can be used to
the area behind the vehicle, on the plug in electrical equipment, such as
center stack display, when the a cell phone or MP3 player.
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). The power outlets are located:
See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on . On the center stack below the
page 9-37. climate controls. The Universal Home Remote
. Inside the center floor console. System allows for garage door
Ultrasonic Parking Assist openers, security systems, and
. At the rear of the center floor
If equipped, this system uses home automation devices to be
console.
sensors on the rear bumper to programmed to work with these
assist with parking and avoiding
. In the rear cargo area. buttons in the vehicle.
objects while in R (Reverse). To use the outlets, remove the See Universal Remote System on
It operates at speeds less than cover. page 5-49.
8 km/h (5 mph). Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) uses audible See Power Outlets on page 5-8.
Sunroof
beeps to provide distance and
system information. The ignition must be in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's
Accessory Power (RAP) must be
rear bumper clean to ensure proper
active to operate the sunroof and
operation.
power sunshade. See Retained
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9-34. page 9-19.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
In Brief 1-23
Performance and Tire Pressure Monitor

Maintenance This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
Traction Control/
Electronic Stability
Control
The vehicle has a traction control
system that limits wheel spin, and
the StabiliTrak system that assists
with directional control of the vehicle The low tire pressure warning light
in difficult driving conditions. Both alerts to a significant loss in
Vent: Press the front or rear of the systems turn on automatically every pressure of one of the vehicle's
switch to vent or close the sunroof. time the vehicle is started. tires. If the warning light comes on,
stop as soon as possible and inflate
Express-open/Express-close: . To turn off traction control and the tires to the recommended
Press and release the rear or front StabiliTrak, press and release 4 pressure shown on the Tire and
of the switch to express-open or on the center stack, and the Loading Information label. See
express-close the sunroof. appropriate DIC message Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.
See Sunroof on page 2-20. displays. See Ride Control The warning light will remain on until
System Messages on page 5-38. the tire pressure is corrected.
. Press and release 4 again to
turn on both systems.
See Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control on page 9-28.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1-24 In Brief
The low tire pressure warning light Resetting the Oil Life System If the vehicle does not have
may come on in cool weather when 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, Driver Information Center (DIC)
the vehicle is first started, and then with the engine off. buttons: Press and hold the trip
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This odometer reset stem until OIL
may be an early indicator that the 2. If the vehicle has Driver LIFE REMAINING shows
tire pressures are getting low and Information Center (DIC) “100%.” Three chimes sound
the tires need to be inflated to the buttons: Press the vehicle and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
proper pressure. information button until OIL LIFE SOON message goes off.
REMAINING displays.
The TPMS does not replace normal 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain If the vehicle does not have
Driver Information Center (DIC) See Engine Oil Life System on
the correct tire pressures. page 10-9.
buttons: The vehicle must be in
See Tire Pressure Monitor System P (Park) to access this display.
on page 10-44. Press the trip odometer reset Driving for Better Fuel
stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING Economy
Engine Oil Life System displays.
Driving habits can affect fuel
The engine oil life system calculates 3. If the vehicle has Driver mileage. Here are some driving tips
engine oil life based on vehicle use Information Center (DIC) to get the best fuel economy
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE buttons: Press and hold the set/ possible.
OIL SOON message when it is time reset button until “100%” is
to change the engine oil and filter.
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate
displayed. Three chimes sound
The oil life system should be reset smoothly.
and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
to 100% only following an oil SOON message goes off. . Brake gradually and avoid
change. abrupt stops.
. Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
In Brief 1-25
When road and weather

OnStar®
.
conditions are appropriate, use

Roadside Assistance
cruise control. Program If equipped, this vehicle has a
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
. Always follow posted speed
that can connect to a live Advisor
limits or drive more slowly when TTY Users (U.S. Only): for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
conditions require. 1-888-889-2438 Connection, and Diagnostic
. Keep vehicle tires properly Canada: 1-800-268-6800 Services. See OnStar Overview on
inflated. page 14-1.
New Chevrolet owners are
. Combine several trips into a automatically enrolled in the
single trip. Roadside Assistance Program.
. Replace the vehicle's tires with See Roadside Assistance Program
the same TPC Spec number on page 13-5.
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
. Follow recommended scheduled
maintenance.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1-26 In Brief
2 NOTES

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Keys and Locks
Windows Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
2-15 Keys
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Keys and Locks Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 { Warning
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
Interior Mirrors the ignition key is dangerous and
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-17
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) children or others could be
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-18 seriously injured or killed. They
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Automatic Dimming Rearview
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4 could operate the power windows
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 or other controls or make the
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Windows vehicle move. The windows will
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 function with the keys in the
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 ignition, and children or others
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 could be caught in the path of a
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 closing window. Do not leave
Roof children in a vehicle with the
Doors Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 ignition key.
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-12
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-13

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
If equipped, with an active OnStar Remote Keyless Entry

subscription, an OnStar Advisor
may remotely unlock the vehicle.
(RKE) System Operation
See “OnStar,” if equipped. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter functions work up to
Remote Keyless Entry 60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
(RKE) System Other conditions can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See
See Radio Frequency Statement on
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
page 13-15.
System on page 2-2.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
The key is used for the ignition and . Check the distance. The
all door locks. transmitter may be too far from
The key has a bar-coded key tag the vehicle.
that the dealer or qualified locksmith . Check the location. Other
can use to make new keys. Store vehicles or objects may be
this information in a safe place, not blocking the signal.
in the vehicle. . Check the transmitter's battery.
If it becomes difficult to turn the key, See “Battery Replacement” later
inspect the key blade for debris. in this section.
See your dealer if a replacement . If the transmitter is still not With Remote Start and Power
key or additional key is needed. working correctly, see your Liftgate Shown, Without Similar
If locked out of the vehicle, call dealer or a qualified technician
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside for service. / (Remote Vehicle Start): For
vehicles with this feature, see
Assistance Program on page 13-5. Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-4.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the Pressing K on the RKE transmitter Programming Transmitters to
doors. disarms the content theft-deterrent the Vehicle
If enabled through the Driver system. See Vehicle Alarm System Only RKE transmitters programmed
Information Center (DIC), the on page 2-12. to this vehicle will work. If a
parking lamps flash once to indicate 8 (Power Liftgate): Press and transmitter is lost or stolen, a
locking has occurred. If enabled hold until the liftgate begins to move replacement can be purchased and
through the DIC, the horn sounds to open or close the liftgate. The programmed through your dealer.
when Q is pressed again within taillamps flash and a chime sounds When the replacement transmitter is
five seconds. See Vehicle to indicate when the liftgate is programmed to this vehicle, all
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) opening or closing. remaining transmitters must also be
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
on page 5-42. L (Vehicle Locator/Panic transmitters will no longer work
Pressing Q may arm the content Alarm): Press and release to
once the new transmitter is
locate the vehicle. The parking
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle programmed. Each vehicle can
lamps flash and the horn sounds
Alarm System on page 2-12. have up to eight transmitters
three times.
programmed to it. See your dealer
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
Press and hold L for more than to program transmitters to this
only the driver door. If K is pressed vehicle.
two seconds to activate the panic
again within five seconds, all
alarm. The parking lamps flash and Battery Replacement
remaining doors unlock. The interior
the horn sounds repeatedly for
lamps come on and stay on for Replace the battery if the REPLACE
30 seconds. The alarm turns off
20 seconds or until the ignition is BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
when the ignition is moved to ON/
turned on. message displays in the DIC.
RUN or L is pressed again. The
If enabled through the DIC, the ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for
parking lamps flash twice to indicate the panic alarm to work.
unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 5-42.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
transmitter. Do not insert when doing so. Check local

{ Caution the tool too far. Stop as regulations for any requirements on
soon as resistance is felt. remote starting of vehicles.
When replacing the battery, do
not touch any of the circuitry on
. Twist the tool until the Do not use the remote start feature
the transmitter. Static from your transmitter is separated. if the vehicle is low on fuel. The
body could damage the 2. Remove the old battery. Do not vehicle could run out of fuel.
transmitter. use a metal object. If the vehicle has the remote start
3. Insert the new battery, positive feature, the RKE transmitter range
side facing down. Replace with a may be less while the vehicle is
CR2032 or equivalent battery. running.
4. Snap the transmitter back Other conditions can affect the

together. performance of the transmitter. See
System on page 2-2.
Remote Vehicle Start
This vehicle may have a remote Starting the Engine Using
starting feature that starts the Remote Start
engine from outside of the vehicle. To start the vehicle:
/ (Remote Start): This button is 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
on the RKE transmitter if the vehicle vehicle.
1. Separate the transmitter with a has remote start.
2. Press and release Q on the
flat, thin object, such as a flat Laws in some communities may RKE transmitter.
head screwdriver. restrict the use of remote starters.
. Carefully insert the tool into For example, some laws may
the notch located along the require a person using the remote
parting line of the start to have the vehicle in view

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
3. Immediately after completing After entering the vehicle during a For example, if Q and then / are
Step 2, press and hold / until remote start, insert and turn the key pressed again after the vehicle has
the parking lamps flash. If the to the ON/RUN position to drive the been running for five minutes,
vehicle's lights cannot be seen, vehicle. 10 minutes are added, allowing the
press and hold / for at least If the vehicle is left running it engine to run for a total of
four seconds. automatically shuts off after 15 minutes.
10 minutes unless a time extension A maximum of two remote starts or
When the vehicle starts, the parking has been done.
lamps will turn on and remain on as remote start attempts are allowed
long as the engine is running. The Extending Engine Run Time between ignition cycles.
doors will be locked and the climate After the vehicle's engine has been
To extend the engine run time by
control system will operate started two times using the remote
10 minutes, repeat Steps 1–3 while
automatically if the vehicle has the start button, the ignition must be
the engine is still running. The
automatic system, or at the same turned on and then back off before
engine run time can only be
setting as when the vehicle was last the remote start procedure can be
extended if it is the first remote start
turned off. used again.
since the vehicle has been driven.
If the vehicle has an automatic Remote start can be extended Canceling a Remote Start
climate control system and heated one time.
seats, the heated seats turn on To manually shut off a remote start:
If the remote start procedure is used
during colder outside temperatures . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
again before the first 10-minute time
and shut off when the key is turned vehicle and press / until the
frame has ended, the first
to ON/RUN. See Heated and
10 minutes will immediately expire parking lamps turn off.
Cooled Front Seats on page 3-8.
and the second 10-minute time . Turn on the hazard warning
The rear window defogger and frame will start.
flashers.
heated mirrors, if the vehicle has
them, turn on during colder outside . Turn the ignition switch on and
temperatures and turn off when the then off.
key is turned to ON/RUN.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Conditions in Which the To lock or unlock a door manually:

Remote Start Will Not Work Warning (Continued) . From the inside use the door
The vehicle cannot be started using crash is increased if the lock knob on the window sill.
the remote start feature if the key is doors are not locked. So, all . From the outside turn the key
in the ignition, the hood is open, or if passengers should wear toward the front or rear of the
there is an emission control system safety belts properly and the vehicle, or press the or button on
malfunction. doors should be locked the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
whenever the vehicle is transmitter.
The engine turns off during a remote
driven.
start if the coolant temperature gets
too high or if the oil pressure . Young children who get into
gets low. unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
Door Locks be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
{ Warning heat stroke. Always lock the
Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it.
dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter
. Passengers, especially through an unlocked door
children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop
doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors
vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from
locked, the handle will not happening.
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Power Door Locks K (Unlock): Press to unlock the Automatic Door Locks
doors.
Vehicles with an automatic lock/
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. unlock feature enable you to
program the vehicle's power door
Delayed Locking locks. This feature can be
programmed through the Driver
When locking the doors with the Information Center (DIC). See
power lock switch and a door or the Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
liftgate is open, the doors will lock Buttons) on page 5-42 for more
five seconds after the last door is information.
closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use. Lockout Protection
Pressing the power lock switch This feature protects you from
Base Model locking the key in the vehicle when
twice or the lock button on the RKE
transmitter twice will override the the key is in the ignition and a front
delayed locking feature and door is open.
immediately lock all the doors. If the driver side power door lock
This feature will not operate if the switch is pressed when the driver
key is in the ignition. door is open and the key is in the
ignition, all of the doors will lock and
This feature can be programmed by then the driver door will unlock.
using the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See “DELAY DOOR LOCK”
under Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 5-42.
Uplevel Model

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
If the passenger side power door Doors

lock switch is pressed when the
front passenger door is open and
the key is in the ignition, all of the Liftgate
doors will lock and then the front
passenger door will unlock. { Warning
Safety Locks Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate or trunk/hatch open,
{ Caution or with any objects that pass
Pulling the inside door handle through the seal between the
while the rear door safety locks body and the trunk/hatch or
Open the rear doors to access the
are engaged could damage your liftgate. Engine exhaust contains
security locks on the inside edge of
vehicle. Do not pull the inside each door. carbon monoxide (CO) which
door handle while the rear door cannot be seen or smelled. It can
To set the locks, insert a key into cause unconsciousness and even
safety locks are engaged.
the slot and turn it to the horizontal death.
position. The door can only be
The vehicle has rear door security opened from the outside with the If the vehicle must be driven with
locks to prevent passengers from door unlocked. To return the door to the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:
opening the rear doors from the normal operation, turn the slot to the . Close all of the windows.
inside. vertical position.
. Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Manual Liftgate
Warning (Continued)
To unlock the liftgate, press the
{ Warning
. Adjust the climate control power door lock switch or press K You, or others, could be injured if
system to a setting that on the Remote Keyless Entry caught in the path of the power
brings in only outside air and (RKE) transmitter twice. See liftgate. Make sure there is no one
set the fan speed to the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) in the way of the liftgate as it is
highest setting. See “Climate System Operation on page 2-2. opening and closing.
Control Systems” in the
Index. To open the liftgate, press the touch
pad under the liftgate handle and lift The power liftgate can be power
. If the vehicle is equipped with up. The vehicle must be in P (Park) opened and closed in the
a power liftgate, disable the and the battery must be charged. following ways:
power liftgate function. Use the pull cup or pull strap to
lower and close the liftgate.
. Press and hold 8 on the
See Engine Exhaust on
RKE transmitter. See Remote
page 9-21. Always close the liftgate before Keyless Entry (RKE) System
driving. Operation on page 2-2.
Power Liftgate
{ Caution If equipped with a power liftgate, the
To avoid damage to the liftgate or vehicle must be in P (Park) to
liftgate glass, make sure the area operate. The taillamps flash and a
above and behind the liftgate is chime sounds when the power
liftgate moves.
clear before opening it.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
continue to completion. If the

vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) and
accelerated before the power liftgate
latch closes, the liftgate may
reverse to the open position. Cargo
could fall out of the vehicle. Always
make sure the power liftgate is
closed and latched before
driving away.
If the power liftgate is used and the
liftgate support struts have lost
pressure, the taillamps will flash and
Power Liftgate Touch Pad a chime will sound. The liftgate will
. Press O.
The liftgate can also be closed by stay open temporarily, and then
. Press the touch pad on the slowly close. See a dealer for
outside liftgate handle. pressing l next to the liftgate service before using the liftgate if
Pressing the buttons or touch pad a latch. Press l a second time this occurs.
second time while the liftgate is during the liftgate operation to
reverse the operation. Obstacle Detection Features
moving reverses the direction.
The power liftgate may be If an obstacle is encountered during
temporarily disabled under extreme the power open or close cycle, a
temperatures or under low battery warning chime will sound and the
conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate liftgate will automatically reverse
can be operated manually. direction to the full closed or open
position. After removing the obstacle
If the vehicle is shifted out of the liftgate will resume normal
P (Park) while the liftgate power operation.
function is in progress, it will

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
If more obstacles are encountered Manual Operation of Power Press the touch pad on the outside
on the same power cycle, the power Liftgate of the liftgate pull cup and lift to
function deactivates. The liftgate open. Use the pull cup to lower and
must be opened or closed manually close the liftgate. The liftgate latch
if this occurs. A message displays will power close.
on the Driver Information Always close the liftgate before
Center (DIC) to indicate that the driving.
liftgate is open. See Door Ajar
Messages on page 5-33. After If 8 on the RKE transmitter
removing the obstacles, manually or l on the liftgate is pressed
open the liftgate fully or close and
while in manual operation mode, the
latch the liftgate. The liftgate will taillamps will flash three times, but
resume normal power operation.
the liftgate will not move.
The vehicle also has pinch sensors
It is not recommended to drive with
along the side edges of the liftgate.
the liftgate open. However, if the
If the sensors press against an To change the liftgate to manual vehicle must be driven with the
object while closing, the liftgate will operation, press OFF on the power liftgate open, the liftgate should be
reverse direction and open fully. The liftgate switch. A message displays set to manual operation.
liftgate will remain open until it is on the DIC indicating manual
activated again or closed manually. operation mode. See Door Ajar
Do not force the liftgate open or Messages on page 5-33.
closed during a power cycle. With the liftgate in manual mode
and all of the doors unlocked, the
liftgate can be manually opened and
closed.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Security The security light flashes. If a locked door is opened without
When the door is closed, the using the RKE transmitter, a
This vehicle has theft-deterrent 10-second pre-alarm occurs. The
security light stops flashing and
features; however, they do not make horn chirps and the lights flash.
stays on solid for approximately
the vehicle impossible to steal. If the key is not placed in the
30 seconds. The content
theft-deterrent alarm is not ignition and turned to START or the
Vehicle Alarm System armed until the security light door is not unlocked by pressing Q
On vehicles with an anti-theft alarm goes off. during the 10-second pre-alarm, the
system, to activate the system: alarm goes off. The headlamps flash
If the delayed locking feature is and the horn sounds for about
. Press Q on the Remote Keyless active, the alarm is not activated 30 seconds, then turns off to save
until all doors are closed and the the battery power.
Entry (RKE) transmitter or the
power door lock switch when security light goes off.
The vehicle can be started with the
any door is open. . Press Q when the driver door is correct ignition key if the alarm has
closed. The security light comes been set off.
on solid for approximately
30 seconds and then goes off. To avoid setting off the alarm by
The content theft-deterrent alarm accident:
is not armed until the security . Lock the vehicle with the door
light goes off. key after the doors are closed.
The theft-deterrent system will not . Unlock the door with the RKE
activate if the doors are locked with transmitter. Unlocking a door any
the vehicle's key or the manual other way sets off the alarm if
door lock. the system has been armed.
Press K or place the key in the
ignition and turn it to START to turn
off the alarm.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Testing the Alarm Immobilizer When the PASS-Key III+ system

senses an incorrect key, the vehicle
To test the alarm: See Radio Frequency Statement on does not start. Anyone using a
1. From inside the vehicle, lower page 13-15. trial-and-error method to start the
the driver side window, and open vehicle will be discouraged because
the driver door. Immobilizer Operation of the high number of electrical key
This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ codes.
2. Press Q.
(Personalized Automotive Security If the engine does not start and the
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the System) theft-deterrent system. security light on the instrument
door, and wait for the security PASS-Key III+ is a passive panel comes on when trying to start
light to go out. theft-deterrent system. the vehicle, there may be a problem
4. Reach in through the window, The system is automatically armed with the theft-deterrent system. Turn
unlock the door with the manual when the key is removed from the the ignition off and try again.
door lock, and open the door. ignition. If the engine still does not start, and
This should set off the alarm. the key appears to be undamaged,
The system is automatically
If the alarm does not sound when it disarmed when the key is turned to try another ignition key and check
should, but the headlamps flash, ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit
check to see if the horn works. The or START from the LOCK/OFF Breakers on page 10-29 for
horn fuse may be blown. To replace position. additional information. If the engine
the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit still does not start with the other key,
Breakers on page 10-29. You do not have to manually arm or the vehicle needs service. If the
disarm the system. vehicle does start, the first key may
If the alarm does not sound or the
The security light comes on if there be faulty. See your dealer who can
headlamps do not flash, see your
is a problem with arming or service the PASS-Key III+ to have a
dealer for service.
disarming the theft-deterrent new key made. In an emergency,
system. contact Roadside Assistance. See
Roadside Assistance Program on
page 13-5.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
It is possible for the PASS-Key III+ 3. After the engine has started, turn Exterior Mirrors
decoder to learn the transponder the key to LOCK/OFF, and
value of a new or replacement key. remove the key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed Convex Mirrors
4. Insert the key to be programmed
to the vehicle. The following and turn it to the ON/RUN
procedure is for programming position within five seconds of { Warning
additional keys only. If all currently the original key being turned to
programmed keys are lost or do not A convex mirror can make things,
the LOCK/OFF position. like other vehicles, look farther
operate, you must see your dealer
or a locksmith who can service The security light turns off once away than they really are. If you
PASS-Key III+ to have keys made the key has been programmed. cut too sharply into the right lane,
and programmed to the system. 5. Repeat Steps 1–4 if additional you could hit a vehicle on the
See your dealer or a locksmith who keys are to be programmed. right. Check the inside mirror or
can service PASS-Key III+ to get a glance over your shoulder before
If the PASS-Key III+ key is lost or
new key blank that is cut exactly as changing lanes.
damaged, see your dealer or a
the ignition key that operates the locksmith to have a new key made.
system. The passenger side mirror is convex
The SERVICE THEFT
To program the new additional key: shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
DETERRENT SYSTEM message
curved so more can be seen from
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 displays on the Driver Information
the driver seat.
stamped on it. Center (DIC) when there is a
problem with the theft-deterrent
2. Insert the already programmed system. See Security Messages on
key in the ignition and start the page 5-39 for additional information.
engine. If the engine does not
start, see your dealer for service. Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors

For vehicles with manual folding
mirrors, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. Pull the mirror out to return
to its original position.
For vehicles with power folding
mirrors:
Uplevel Model
Base Model To adjust the mirrors:
To adjust the mirrors: 1. Press (1) or (2) to select a
mirror.
1. Press o or p to select a mirror. 2. Press the control pad to adjust
2. Press the control pad to adjust the mirror.
the mirror.
3. Press (1) or (2) again to deselect
3. Return the switch to the center the mirror. 1. Press (1) to fold the mirrors out
to deselect the mirror.
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) to the driving position.
If the vehicle has the SBZA system, 2. Press (2) to fold the mirrors in to
see Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) the folded position.
on page 9-36.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Resetting the Power Folding Heated Mirrors Driving with the Blind Spot
Mirrors Mirror
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
Reset the power folding mirrors if:
1 (Rear Window Defogger):
. The mirrors are accidentally Press to heat the mirrors.
obstructed while folding.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under
. They are accidentally manually Dual Automatic Climate Control
folded/unfolded. System on page 8-4.
. The mirrors vibrate at normal
driving speeds. Blind Spot Mirrors
To reset the mirrors, fold and unfold The blind spot mirror is a small
the mirrors one time using the convex mirror built into the upper
power folding mirror controls. and outer corner of both outside
A popping noise may be heard mirrors. It can show objects that
during the resetting. This sound is may be in the vehicle's blind zone.
normal during the reset operation.
Actual Mirror View

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1. When the approaching vehicle is vehicle. Check the blind spot Interior Mirrors
a long distance away, the image mirror for a vehicle in the blind
in the main mirror is small and zone. Then, glance over your
near the inboard edge of the shoulder to double check before Interior Rearview Mirrors
mirror. moving slowly into the Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear
2. As the vehicle gets closer, the adjacent lane. view of the area behind your
image in the main mirror gets vehicle.
larger and moves outboard. Park Tilt Mirrors If equipped with OnStar, the vehicle
3. As the vehicle enters the blind If the vehicle has the memory may have three control buttons at
zone, the image transitions from package, the outside mirrors have a the bottom of the mirror. See your
the main mirror to the blind spot park tilt feature. This feature tilts the dealer for more information about
mirror. outside mirrors to a preselected OnStar and how to subscribe to it.
position when the vehicle is in See “Onstar,” if equipped.
4. When the vehicle is in the blind R (Reverse). This allows the driver
zone, the image only appears in Do not spray glass cleaner directly
to view the curb for parallel parking. on the mirror. Use a soft towel
the blind spot mirror.
The passenger and/or driver mirror dampened with water.
Using the Outside Mirror with returns to its original position when
the Blind Spot Mirror the vehicle is shifted out of
1. Set the main mirror so that the R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned
side of the vehicle can just be off or to OFF/LOCK.
seen and the blind spot mirror This feature can be turned on or off
has an unobstructed view. through the Driver Information
2. When checking for traffic or Center (DIC). See Vehicle
before changing a lane, look at Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
the main driver/passenger side on page 5-42 for more information.
mirror to observe traffic in the
adjacent lane, behind your

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Manual Rearview Mirror Windows The vehicle aerodynamics are

designed to improve fuel economy
If equipped, push the tab forward for performance. This may result in a
daytime use and pull it for nighttime { Warning pulsing sound when either rear
use to avoid glare from the window is down and the front
headlamps from behind. Never leave a child, a helpless windows are up. To reduce the
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, sound, open either a front window
Automatic Dimming especially with the windows or the sunroof, if equipped.
Rearview Mirror closed in warm or hot weather.
They can be overcome by the Power Windows
If equipped, automatic dimming extreme heat and suffer
reduces the glare of the headlamps permanent injuries or even death
from behind. This feature comes on from heat stroke. { Warning
when the vehicle is started.
Children could be seriously
injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Never
leave keys in a vehicle with
children. When there are children
in the rear seat, use the window
lockout button to prevent
operation of the windows. See
Keys on page 2-1.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Express-Up/Express-Down 2. Press and continue to hold the

Windows window switch until the window
is fully open.
A window with the express-up/down
feature allows it to be raised or 3. Pull up and hold the window
lowered without holding the switch. switch to close the window.
Press or pull the window switch fully Continue to hold it briefly after
and release it to activate the the window is fully closed.
express feature. The express mode 4. Repeat for each window that has
can be canceled by pressing or the express-up feature.
pulling the switch.
Anti-Pinch Feature
Programming the Power
Uplevel Shown, Base Similar Windows The anti-pinch feature is on
windows with the express-up
The driver door has switches that If the vehicle battery has been feature. If an object is in the way of
control the passenger and rear recharged, disconnected, the window as it is express-closing,
windows. The power windows work or replaced, windows with the or in certain weather conditions like
with the ignition in ACC/ express-up feature need to be severe icing, the window will stop
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN or with reprogrammed for this feature to and open to a factory preset
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) work. To program the window: position. The window functions
active. See Retained Accessory 1. Close all doors with the ignition normally once the obstruction is
Power (RAP) on page 9-19. in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/ removed.
Press the switch to lower the RUN position, or with Retained
window. Pull up on the front edge of Accessory Power (RAP) active.
the switch to raise the window. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9-19.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Rear Window Lockout Sun Visors Roof

Sunroof
The ignition must be in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) must be
active to operate the sunroof and
power sunshade. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9-19.
Pull the sun visor down to block If equipped, there may be a rear
glare. If equipped, detach the sun sunroof over the second row seats.
visor from the center mount to pivot The rear sunroof does not open.
The rear window lockout feature to the side window or to extend
prevents the rear passenger along the rod.
windows from operating, except
from the driver position.
Press v to activate the rear
window lockout switch. The
indicator light comes on when
activated.
Press v again to deactivate the
lockout switch.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Manual Sunshade Dirt and debris may collect on the

sunroof seal or in the track. This
The sunshades must be opened
could cause an issue with sunroof
and closed manually. To open the
operation or noise. It could also plug
sunshade, press the button on the
the water drainage system.
sunshade handle to release it and
Periodically open the sunroof and
guide it back. To close the
remove any obstacles or loose
sunshade, pull the sunshade
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
forward until it latches.
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
If water is seen dripping into the
water drainage system, this is
Vent: Press and hold the front of normal.
the switch to vent the sunroof. Press
and hold the rear of the switch to
close the sunroof.
Express-open/Express-close:
Press and release the rear of the
switch to express-open the sunroof.
Press and release the front of the
switch to express-close the sunroof.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
2 NOTES

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Adding Equipment to the

Safety Belt Use During Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-34
Restraints Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-35
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Replacing Airbag System
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-21 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Head Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Replacing Safety Belt System Child Restraints
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Front Seats Infants and Young
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Airbag System Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-40
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-24 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-42
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 When Should an Airbag Lower Anchors and Tethers
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 for Children (LATCH
Heated and Cooled Front What Makes an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Replacing LATCH System
How Does an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
What Will You See after an (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts Passenger Sensing (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-53
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
How to Wear Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
Front Seats
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and Adjust the head restraint so that the To raise or lower the head restraint,
adjusted properly. top of the restraint is at the same press the button located on the side
height as the top of the occupant's of the head restraint, and pull up or
head. This position reduces the push the head restraint down, and
The vehicle's front seats have
chance of a neck injury in a crash. release the button. Pull and push on
adjustable head restraints in the
the head restraint after the button is
outboard seating positions.
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
To adjust the head restraint forward,
grasp the head restraint and pull
forward until the desired locking
position is reached.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
To adjust the head restraint Front Seats 2. Driver Seat Height Adjustment
rearward, press the button located Lever
on the side of the head restraint,
and push the head restraint Seat Adjustment 3. Seatback Lever
rearward until the desired locking To adjust a manual seat:
position is reached. Try to move the { Warning 1. Lift the handle (1) under the seat
head restraint after the button is to unlock it.
released to make sure that it is You can lose control of the
locked in place. vehicle if you try to adjust a driver 2. Slide the seat to the desired
seat while the vehicle is moving. position, and then release the
The front seat outboard head handle (1).
Adjust the driver seat only when
restraints are not designed to be
removed. the vehicle is not moving. 3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
Rear Seats place.
The vehicle's second-row seats Move the lever (2) up or down to
have head restraints in the outboard raise or lower the seat.
seating positions that cannot be
Use the lever (3) to adjust the
adjusted.
seatback. See Reclining Seatbacks
The vehicle's third-row seats have on page 3-5.
headrests in the outboard seating
positions that cannot be adjusted.
The second-row head restraints and
third-row headrests are not
designed to be removed.
1. Seat Adjustment Handle

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Power Seat Adjustment To adjust a power seat, if equipped: Lumbar Adjustment

. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the
Manual Lumbar
control (1) forward or rearward.
. Raise or lower the front part of
the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control (1) up
or down.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the rear of the control (1)
up or down.
. Adjust the seatback by tilting the
top of the control (2) forward or
1. Seat Adjustment Control rearward.
2. Seatback Control See Reclining Seatbacks on
If equipped, move the handle
3. Lumbar Control page 3-5.
forward or rearward to increase or
. Increase or decrease lumbar decrease lumbar support.
support by pressing the front or
rear of the control (3).
See Lumbar Adjustment on
page 3-4.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Power Lumbar Reclining Seatbacks
{ Warning
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you Do not have a seatback reclined if
could go into it, receiving neck or the vehicle is moving.
If equipped, press and hold the front other injuries.
or rear of control to increase or
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
The lap belt could go up over
decrease lumbar support. Release your abdomen. The belt forces
the control when the seatback would be there, not at your pelvic { Warning
reaches the desired level of lumbar bones. This could cause serious
support. If either seatback is not locked, it
internal injuries.
could move forward in a sudden
For proper protection when the stop or crash. That could cause
vehicle is in motion, have the injury to the person sitting there.
seatback upright. Then sit well Always push and pull on the
back in the seat and wear the seatbacks to be sure they are
safety belt properly. locked.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
2. Push and pull on the seatback to Memory Seats

make sure it is locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.
If equipped, the controls on the
2. Move the seatback to the
driver door are used to program and
desired position, and then
To adjust a power seatback, recall memory settings for the driver
release the lever to lock the
if equipped: seat and outside mirrors.
seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to . Tilt the top of the control Storing Memory Positions
make sure it is locked. rearward to recline. To save into memory:
To return the seatback to the upright . Tilt the top of the control forward 1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback
position: to raise. recliner, and both outside
1. Lift the lever fully without mirrors.
applying pressure to the Not all vehicles will have the
seatback, and the seatback will ability to save and recall the
return to the upright position. mirror positions.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
2. Press and hold “1” until To stop recall movement, press one If this feature is programmed on in
two beeps sound. of the power seat controls, memory the vehicle personalization menu,
3. Repeat for a second driver buttons, or the power mirror buttons. automatic seat movement occurs
position using “2.” If something has blocked the driver when the ignition key is removed.
To recall, press and release “1” or seat while recalling a memory A single beep sounds. The driver
“2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park). position, the recall may stop. seat moves back approximately
A single beep will sound. The seat Remove the obstruction; then press 8 cm (3 in). To move the seat back
and outside mirrors will move to the and hold the appropriate manual farther, press S again until the seat
position previously stored for the control for the memory item that is is all the way back.
identified driver. not recalling for two seconds. Try
recalling the memory position again If something has blocked the driver
Memory Remote Recall by pressing the appropriate memory seat while recalling the exit position,
button. If the memory position is still the recall may stop. Remove the
The memory feature can recall the obstruction; then press and hold the
driver seat and outside mirrors to not recalling, see your dealer for
service. power seat control rearward for
stored positions when entering the two seconds. Try recalling the exit
vehicle. Easy Exit Driver Seat position again. If the exit position is
To activate, unlock the driver door This feature can move the seat still not recalling, see your dealer for
with the Remote Keyless rearward to allow extra room to exit service.
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The driver the vehicle. See Vehicle Personalization (With
seat and outside mirrors will move DIC Buttons) on page 5-42.
to the memory position associated S (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Press
with the transmitter used to unlock to activate the recall. The vehicle
the vehicle. must be in P (Park).
This feature is turned on or off using

the vehicle personalization menu.
See Vehicle Personalization (With

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Heated and Cooled Front the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and one
Seats for the lowest.
The passenger heated seat may
{ Warning take longer to heat up.
If you cannot feel temperature The heated and/or cooled seats are
change or pain to the skin, the canceled after the ignition is
seat heater may cause burns. To turned off.
reduce the risk of burns, people Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons
Remote Start Heated Seats
with such a condition should use Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
care when using the seat heater, Similar When it is cold outside, the heated
especially for long periods of seats may turn on automatically
If equipped, the buttons are on the during a remote vehicle start. The
time. Do not place anything on
center console. To operate, the heated seats will be canceled when
the seat that insulates against engine must be running.
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, the ignition is turned on. Press the
cover, or similar item. This may I (Heated Seatback): If equipped, desired heated seat button to use
cause the seat heater to press to heat the seatback only. the heated seats after the vehicle is
started.
overheat. An overheated seat H (Cooled Seat): If equipped,
heater may cause a burn or may press to cool the entire seat. The heated seat button lights will
damage the seat. not turn on during a remote start.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback):
Press to heat the seat and The temperature of an unoccupied
seatback. seat may be reduced.
Press the button once for the See Remote Vehicle Start on
highest setting. With each press of page 2-4.
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Rear Seats Entering and Exiting the

Third Row
{ Warning
Using the third row seating
position while the second row is
folded, or folded and tumbled,
could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return
the seat to the passenger seating
position. Push and pull on the
seat to make sure it is locked into To access the third row:
place. 1. Remove objects on the floor in
1. Seat Adjustment Handle front of or on the second row
2. Reclining Seatback Strap seat, or in the seat tracks on the
3. Sliding Seat Lever { Caution floor.
2. Move the front center console
Folding a rear seat with the safety armrest completely forward. See
belts still fastened may cause Center Console Storage on
damage to the seat or the safety page 4-2.
belts. Always unbuckle the safety 3. Place the folding armrests in the
belts and return them to their upright position.
normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat. 4. Make sure that the safety belt is
unfastened and in the stowed
position.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
5. Pull the sliding seat lever (3) 5. Push and pull on the seatback 3. Pull forward on the reclining
forward. The seatback will tilt and seat cushion to make sure seatback strap (2).
forward, and the seat will begin they are locked in place. The head restraint will fold down
sliding forward. Continue to push 6. Check that the safety belt is not automatically.
forward on the seatback until the under the seat cushion.
entire seat moves all the way To return the seatback to the
forward and the seat cushion is Reclining the Seatbacks seating position, lift the seatback
folded. and push it rearward until it locks
To recline the seatback: into place. Push and pull on the
Returning the Seat to the 1. Leaning rearward in the seat, seatback to make sure it is locked.
Seating Position pull the reclining seatback Pull up on the head restraint to
To return the second row seat to its strap (2). return it to the upright, locked
normal seating position: position.
2. Move the seatback to the
1. Remove objects on the floor desired position, and then Adjusting the Seats
behind the second row seat or in release the strap (2) to lock the
seatback in place. To adjust the second row seats, pull
the seat tracks on the floor. outward on the seat adjustment
2. Slide the seat rearward by 3. Push and pull on the seatback to handle (1). Slide the seat forward or
pushing on the seatback until make sure it is locked. rearward to the desired position.
the seat is locked into place. Release the handle (1), and push
Folding the Seatback
and pull on the seat to make sure it
3. Continue pushing the seatback To fold the second row seatbacks: is locked.
rearward until the seatback is
locked into place. 1. Remove anything on or under
the seat.
4. Push down on the rear of the
seat cushion until it is locked in 2. Place the armrest in the upright
place. position, and unfasten the
safety belt.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Third Row Seats To fold the third row seatback:

1. Remove anything on or under
{ Warning the seat.
Using the third row seating

position while the second row is
folded, or pushed forward in the
entry position, could cause injury
in a sudden stop or crash. Be
sure to return the seat to the
passenger seating position. Push
and pull on the seat to make sure
it is locked into place. 3. Pull up on the release lever on
the back of the seat. The
headrest moves forward
Folding the Seatback automatically.
2. Disconnect the rear safety belt 4. Push the seatback forward to
{ Caution mini-latch, using a key in the slot lay flat.
on the mini-buckle, and let the
Folding a rear seat with the safety belt retract into the headliner. Returning the Seat to the
belts still fastened may cause Stow the mini-latch in the holder Seating Position
damage to the seat or the safety in the headliner.
belts. Always unbuckle the safety To return the seatback to the
seating position:
belts and return them to their
normal stowed position before 1. From the rear of the vehicle,
folding a rear seat. raise the seatback to the upright
position using the pull strap on
the back of the third row seat,

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
or lift the seatback and push it

into place from inside the Warning (Continued) { Caution
vehicle.
protection needed in a crash. The Folding a rear seat with the safety
2. The headrest must be locked person wearing the belt could be belts still fastened may cause
into place before sitting in seriously injured. After raising the damage to the seat or the safety
the seat. rear seatback, always check to be belts. Always unbuckle the safety
sure that the safety belts are belts and return them to their
{ Warning properly routed and attached, and normal stowed position before
are not twisted. folding a rear seat.
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause 4. Reconnect the center safety belt 3. Fold the seatback down. See
injury to the person sitting there. mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do “Folding the Seatback” earlier in
Always push and pull on the not let it twist. this section.
seatbacks to be sure they are 5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure 4. Remove the rear bolts on the
locked. the mini-latch is secure. floor on each side of the seat.
Removing the Third Row Seats 5. Remove the seat by tilting it
3. Push and pull on the seatback to slightly upward, and then pulling
make sure it is locked in place. To remove a third row seat: it out of the rear of the vehicle in
1. Remove the cargo management one motion.
{ Warning system, if equipped and
installed. See Cargo
6. Replace the bolts in the floor
holes for storage.
A safety belt that is improperly Management System on
routed, not properly attached, page 4-3.
or twisted will not provide the 2. Remove anything on or under
(Continued) the seat.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Installing the Third Row Seats 3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to Safety Belts
55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on the
To reinstall a third row seat: This section of the manual
seat to make sure it is locked in
1. Before installing the seat, the place. describes how to use safety belts
seatback must be folded properly. It also describes some
4. Raise the seatback to its upright
forward. See “Folding the things not to do with safety belts.
position. Push and pull on the
Seatback” earlier in this section.
seatback to make sure it is
The seats must be placed in the locked into place. { Warning
proper locations to attach
5. Push the headrest up into Do not let anyone ride where a
correctly. The wider seat must
position. Push and pull on the safety belt cannot be worn
be installed on the driver side
headrest to make sure it is properly. In a crash, if you or your
and the narrower seat on the
locked into place. passenger(s) are not wearing
passenger side. Remove the
bolts from the holes in the floor 6. Reconnect the center safety belt safety belts, injuries can be much
before installing the seats. mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do worse than if you are wearing
not let it twist. safety belts. You can be seriously
2. Place the seat on the vehicle
floor so that the front seat hooks injured or killed by hitting things
are on the vehicle bars. inside the vehicle harder or by
being ejected from the vehicle. In
addition, anyone who is not
buckled up can strike other
passengers in the vehicle.
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing

Warning (Continued) safety belts makes such good
sense.
It is extremely dangerous to ride Questions and Answers About
in a cargo area, inside or outside Safety Belts
of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
are more likely to be seriously after a crash if I am wearing a
injured or killed. Do not allow safety belt?
passengers to ride in any area of A: You could be — whether you are
the vehicle that is not equipped wearing a safety belt or not.
with seats and safety belts. Your chance of being conscious
during and after a crash, so you
Always wear a safety belt, and can unbuckle and get out, is
check that all passenger(s) are much greater if you are belted.
When riding in a vehicle, you travel
restrained properly too. as fast as the vehicle does. If the Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
This vehicle has indicators as a going until something stops you. belts?
reminder to buckle the safety belts. It could be the windshield, the
See Safety Belt Reminders on instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental
page 5-14. systems only; so they work with
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts — not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. them. Whether or not an airbag
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the
when worn properly, your strongest most protection.
bones take the forces from the

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Also, in nearly all states and in

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
all Canadian provinces, the law shoulder and across the chest.
requires wearing safety belts. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining
How to Wear Safety Belts forces. The shoulder belt locks if
there is a sudden stop or crash.
Properly
This section is only for people of { Warning
adult size.
You can be seriously injured,
There are special things to know
or even killed, by not wearing
about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller your safety belt properly.
children and infants. If a child will be . Sit up straight and always keep . Never allow the lap or
riding in the vehicle, see Older your feet on the floor in front shoulder belt to become
Children on page 3-36 or Infants of you. loose or twisted.
and Young Children on page 3-38. . Always use the correct buckle . Never wear the shoulder belt
Follow those rules for everyone's for your seating position. under both arms or behind
protection. your back.
. Wear the lap part of the belt low
It is very important for all occupants and snug on the hips, just . Never route the lap or
to buckle up. Statistics show that touching the thighs. In a crash, shoulder belt over an
unbelted people are hurt more often this applies force to the strong armrest.
in crashes than those who are pelvic bones and you would be
wearing safety belts. less likely to slide under the lap
There are important things to know belt. If you slid under it, the belt
about wearing a safety belt properly. would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
If you are using a rear seating
position with a detachable safety
belt and the safety belt is not
attached, see “Returning the Seat to
the Seating Position” under Third
Row Seats on page 3-11 for
instruction on reconnecting the
safety belt to the mini-buckle.
The following instructions explain 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull 3. Push the latch plate into the
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt the belt across you. Do not let it buckle until it clicks.
properly. get twisted. 4. Pull up on the latch plate to
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is The lap-shoulder belt may lock if make sure it is secure. If the belt
adjustable, so you can sit up you pull the belt across you very is not long enough, see Safety
straight. To see how, see “Seats” quickly. If this happens, let the Belt Extender on page 3-21.
in the Index. belt go back slightly to unlock it. Position the release button on
Then pull the belt across you the buckle so that the safety belt
more slowly. could be quickly unbuckled if
If the shoulder portion of a necessary.
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
5. If equipped with a shoulder belt Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

height adjuster, move it to the
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height that is right for you. See
height adjuster for the driver and
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
right front passenger seating
later in this section for
positions.
instructions on use and
important safety information. Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
but not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to but not
contacting the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
To unlatch the belt, push the button the safety belt in a crash. See How
on the buckle. The belt should to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
return to its stowed position. Slide page 3-15.
the latch plate up the safety belt
webbing when the safety belt is not
in use. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt,
near the guide loop on the side wall.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull Before a door is closed, be sure the
up on the shoulder belt. safety belt is out of the way. If a
It may be necessary to pull the door is slammed against a safety
stitching on the safety belt belt, damage can occur to both the
through the latch plate to fully safety belt and the vehicle.
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort

This vehicle has safety belt Guides
pretensioners for the front outboard This vehicle may have rear safety
occupants. Although the safety belt belt comfort guides. If not, they are
pretensioners cannot be seen, they available through your dealer. The
are part of the safety belt assembly. guides may provide added safety
They can help tighten the safety belt comfort for older children who
belts during the early stages of a have outgrown booster seats and
moderate to severe frontal, near for some adults. When installed and
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold properly adjusted, the comfort guide
conditions for pretensioner positions the shoulder belt away
activation are met. And, for vehicles from the neck and head.
To move it down, push down on the with side impact airbags, safety belt
release button and move the height pretensioners can help tighten the
adjuster to the desired position. You safety belts in a side crash or a
can move the height adjuster up by rollover event.
pushing up on the shoulder belt Pretensioners work only once. If the
guide. pretensioners activate in a crash,
After the adjuster is set to the they will need to be replaced, and
desired position, try to move it down probably other new parts for the
without pushing the release button vehicle's safety belt system. See
to make sure it has locked into Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
position. after a Crash on page 3-22.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Here is how to install a comfort 1. For the outboard positions, Pull the comfort guide out of its
guide to the safety belt: remove the guide from its storage location and then return
storage clip on the interior body. the headrest to its upright
For the third row center position, position.
locate the comfort guide which is
located in a storage pocket, at
the top of the seat, under the
headrest on the driver side of
the vehicle. To access the
comfort guide, you will first need
to move the headrest forward by
pulling on the handle behind the
seatback. The comfort guide will
now be accessible.
Outboard Positions
2. Place the guide over the belt

and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
Third Row Center Position

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
To remove and store the comfort

Warning (Continued) guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
and across the chest. These parts be removed from the guide. Slide
of the body are best able to take the guide into its storage location or
belt restraining forces. on its storage clip.
Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
3. Be sure that the belt is not be seriously injured if they do not
twisted and it lies flat. The wear safety belts.
elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
{ Warning
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the 4. Buckle, position, and release the
protection needed in a crash. The safety belt as described
person wearing the belt could be previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt is on the shoulder and not
belt should go over the shoulder
falling off of it. The belt should
(Continued) be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
A pregnant woman should wear a use it for securing child seats. To Safety Belt Care
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap wear it, attach it to the regular safety
portion should be worn as low as belt. See the instruction sheet that Keep belts clean and dry.
possible, below the rounding, comes with the extender.
throughout the pregnancy. { Warning
The best way to protect the fetus is Safety System Check
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
to protect the mother. When a safety Now and then, check that the safety It may severely weaken them. In
belt is worn properly, it is more likely belt reminder light, safety belts, a crash, they might not be able to
that the fetus will not be hurt in a buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
crash. For pregnant women, as for provide adequate protection.
anchorages are all working properly. Clean safety belts only with mild
anyone, the key to making safety Look for any other loose or
belts effective is wearing them soap and lukewarm water.
damaged safety belt system parts
properly. that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
Safety Belt Extender to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a
around you, you should use it. crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
But if a safety belt is not long frayed, get a new one right away.
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5-14.
long enough for you. To help avoid Keep safety belts clean and dry.
personal injury, do not let someone See Safety Belt Care on page 3-21.
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Replacing Safety Belt After a minor crash, replacement of Airbag System

safety belts may not be necessary.
System Parts after a But the safety belt assemblies that The vehicle has the following
Crash were used during any crash may airbags:
have been stressed or damaged. . A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ Warning See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or . A frontal airbag for the front
A crash can damage the safety replaced. outboard passenger.
belt system in the vehicle. New parts and repairs may be . A seat-mounted side impact
A damaged safety belt system necessary even if the safety belt airbag for the driver.
may not properly protect the system was not being used at the . A seat-mounted side impact
person using it, resulting in time of the crash. airbag for the front outboard
serious injury or even death in a passenger.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
crash. To help make sure the
checked if the vehicle has been in a . A roof-rail airbag for the driver
safety belt systems are working
crash, or if the airbag readiness light and for the second and third row
properly after a crash, have them stays on after you start the vehicle
inspected and any necessary passengers seated directly
or while you are driving. See Airbag behind the driver.
replacements made as soon as Readiness Light on page 5-15.
possible. . A roof-rail airbag for the front
outboard passenger and the
second and third row
passengers seated directly
behind the front outboard
passenger.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The vehicle may have the following are also designed to help reduce
airbag: the risk of injury from the force of an Warning (Continued)
. A front center airbag for the inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job. safety belts. Everyone in the
driver and front outboard vehicle should wear a safety belt
passenger. Here are the most important things properly, whether or not there is
All vehicle airbags have the word to know about the airbag system: an airbag for that person.
AIRBAG on the trim or on an
attached label near the deployment { Warning
opening.
For frontal airbags, the word
You can be severely injured or { Warning
killed in a crash if you are not
AIRBAG is on the center of the wearing your safety belt, even Because airbags inflate with great
steering wheel for the driver and on with airbags. Airbags are force and faster than the blink of
the instrument panel for the front designed to work with safety an eye, anyone who is up
outboard passenger. against, or very close to any
belts, not replace them. Also,
For the front center airbag, the word airbags are not designed to inflate airbag when it inflates can be
AIRBAG is on the inboard side of in every crash. In some crashes seriously injured or killed. Do not
the driver seatback. safety belts are the only restraint. sit unnecessarily close to any
For seat-mounted side impact See When Should an Airbag airbag, as you would be if sitting
airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the Inflate? on page 3-26. on the edge of the seat or leaning
side of the seatback closest to forward. Safety belts help keep
Wearing your safety belt during a you in position before and during
the door. crash helps reduce the chance of a crash. Always wear a safety
For roof-rail airbags, the word hitting things inside the vehicle or belt, even with airbags. The driver
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim. being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the (Continued)
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety (Continued)
belts. Even though today's airbags

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)

Where Are the Airbags?
should sit as far back as possible how, see Older Children on
while still maintaining control of page 3-36 or Infants and Young
the vehicle. Children on page 3-38.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the front center
armrest or console in vehicles
with a front center airbag.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags There is an airbag readiness light
and/or roof-rail airbags. on the instrument cluster, which The driver frontal airbag is in the
shows the airbag symbol. center of the steering wheel.
The system checks the airbag
{ Warning electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
Children who are up against, electrical problem. See Airbag
or very close to, any airbag when Readiness Light on page 5-15 for
it inflates can be seriously injured more information.
or killed. Always secure children
properly in the vehicle. To read
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The front outboard passenger If the vehicle has a front center Driver Side Shown, Passenger
frontal airbag is in the passenger airbag, it is in the inboard side of the Side Similar
side instrument panel. driver seatback. The driver and front outboard
passenger seat-mounted side
impact airbags are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Warning (Continued)
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
that person causing severe injury This vehicle is equipped with
or even death. The path of an airbags. See Airbag System on
inflating airbag must be kept page 3-22. Airbags are designed to
clear. Do not put anything inflate if the impact exceeds the
between an occupant and an specific airbag system's deployment
airbag, and do not attach or put threshold. Deployment thresholds
anything on the steering wheel are used to predict how severe a
hub or on or near any other crash is likely to be in time for the
airbag covering. airbags to inflate and help restrain
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Do not use seat or console the occupants. The vehicle has
Side Similar electronic sensors that help the
accessories that block the
airbag system determine the
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, inflation path of a seat-mounted
severity of the impact. Deployment
front outboard passenger, and side impact airbag or the front thresholds can vary with specific
second and third row outboard center airbag, if equipped. vehicle design.
passengers are in the ceiling above Never secure anything to the roof
the side windows. Frontal airbags are designed to
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags inflate in moderate to severe frontal
by routing a rope or tie-down or near frontal crashes to help
{ Warning through any door or window reduce the potential for severe
opening. If you do, the path of an injuries, mainly to the driver's or
If something is between an inflating roof-rail airbag will be front outboard passenger's head
occupant and an airbag, the blocked. and chest.
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into Whether the frontal airbags will or
should inflate is not based primarily
(Continued)
on how fast the vehicle is traveling.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
It depends on what is hit, the side. The front center airbag is not system predicts that the vehicle is
direction of the impact, and how designed to inflate in frontal about to roll over on its side, or in a
quickly the vehicle slows down. impacts, near frontal impacts, severe frontal impact.
Frontal airbags may inflate at or rear impacts. In any particular crash, no one can
different crash speeds depending on Seat-mounted side impact airbags say whether an airbag should have
whether the vehicle hits an object are designed to inflate in moderate inflated simply because of the
straight on or at an angle, and to severe side crashes depending vehicle damage or the repair costs.
whether the object is fixed or on the location of the impact.
moving, rigid or deformable, narrow Seat-mounted side impact airbags What Makes an Airbag
or wide. are not designed to inflate in frontal
impacts, near frontal impacts,
Inflate?
Frontal airbags are not intended to
rollovers, or rear impacts. In a deployment event, the sensing
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
A seat-mounted side impact airbag system sends an electrical signal
impacts, or many side impacts.
is designed to inflate on the side of triggering a release of gas from the
In addition, the vehicle has the vehicle that is struck. inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
advanced technology frontal airbag causing the bag to break out
airbags. Advanced technology Roof-rail airbags are designed to
of the cover. The inflator, the airbag,
frontal airbags adjust the restraint inflate in moderate to severe side
and related hardware are all part of
according to crash severity. crashes depending on the location
the airbag module.
of the impact. In addition, these
The front center airbag, if equipped, roof-rail airbags are designed to For airbag locations, see Where Are
is designed to inflate in moderate to inflate during a rollover or in a the Airbags? on page 3-24.
severe side crashes depending severe frontal impact. Roof-rail
upon the location of the impact, airbags are not designed to inflate in How Does an Airbag
when either side of the vehicle is rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags
struck. In addition, the front center will inflate when either side of the
Restrain?
airbag is designed to inflate when vehicle is struck, if the sensing In moderate to severe frontal or
the sensing system predicts that the near frontal collisions, even belted
vehicle is about to roll over on its occupants can contact the steering

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
wheel or the instrument panel. In Airbags should never be regarded the windshield or being able to steer
moderate to severe side collisions, as anything more than a supplement the vehicle, nor does it prevent
even belted occupants can contact to safety belts. people from leaving the vehicle.
the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection What Will You See after { Warning
provided by safety belts by an Airbag Inflates?
distributing the force of the impact When an airbag inflates, there
After the frontal airbags and may be dust in the air. This dust
more evenly over the
seat-mounted side impact airbags could cause breathing problems
occupant's body.
inflate, they quickly deflate, so for people with a history of
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags quickly that some people may not asthma or other breathing trouble.
are also designed to help contain even realize an airbag inflated. The To avoid this, everyone in the
the head and chest of occupants in front center airbag, if equipped, and vehicle should get out as soon as
the outboard seating positions in the the roof-rail airbags may still be at
first, second, and third rows. The it is safe to do so. If you have
least partially inflated for some time
rollover capable roof-rail airbags are breathing problems but cannot
after they inflate. Some components
designed to help reduce the risk of of the airbag module may be hot for get out of the vehicle after an
full or partial ejection in rollover several minutes. For location of the airbag inflates, then get fresh air
events, although no system can airbags, see Where Are the by opening a window or a door.
prevent all such ejections. Airbags? on page 3-24. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
But airbags would not help in many The parts of the airbag that come deployment, you should seek
types of collisions, primarily into contact with you may be warm,
because the occupant's motion is medical attention.
but not too hot to touch. There may
not toward those airbags. See When be some smoke and dust coming
Should an Airbag Inflate? on from the vents in the deflated
page 3-26 for more information. airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out of

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The vehicle has a feature that may In many crashes severe enough to
. Let only qualified technicians
automatically unlock the doors, turn inflate the airbag, windshields are work on the airbag systems.
on the interior lamps and hazard broken by vehicle deformation. Improper service can mean that
warning flashers, and shut off the Additional windshield breakage may an airbag system will not work
fuel system after the airbags inflate. also occur from the front outboard properly. See your dealer for
You can lock the doors, and turn off passenger airbag. service.
the interior lamps and hazard . Airbags are designed to inflate
warning flashers by using the only once. After an airbag
Passenger Sensing
controls for those features. inflates, you will need some new System
parts for the airbag system. The vehicle has a passenger
{ Warning If you do not get them, the sensing system for the front
airbag system will not be there outboard passenger position. The
A crash severe enough to inflate to help protect you in another
the airbags may have also passenger airbag status indicator
crash. A new system will include will light on the instrument panel
damaged important functions in airbag modules and possibly when the vehicle is started.
the vehicle, such as the fuel other parts. The service manual
system, brake and steering for the vehicle covers the need
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle to replace other parts.
appears to be drivable after a . The vehicle has a crash sensing
moderate crash, there may be and diagnostic module which
concealed damage that could records information after a
make it difficult to safely operate crash. See Vehicle Data
the vehicle. Recording and Privacy on United States
Use caution if you should attempt page 13-13 and Event Data
to restart the engine after a crash Recorders on page 13-14.
has occurred.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
occupant and determine if the front

outboard passenger frontal airbag Warning (Continued)
should be allowed to inflate or not.
forward-facing child restraint can
According to accident statistics, be seriously injured or killed if the
children are safer when properly passenger frontal airbag inflates
secured in a rear seat in the correct and the passenger seat is in a
Canada and Mexico child restraint for their weight forward position.
The words ON and OFF, or the and size.
Even if the passenger sensing
symbol for on and off, will be visible Whenever possible, children age
system has turned off the
during the system check. When the 12 and under should be secured in
system check is complete, either the passenger frontal airbag, no
a rear seating position.
word ON or OFF, or the symbol for system is fail-safe. No one can
Never put a rear-facing child seat in guarantee that an airbag will not
on or off, will be visible. See the front. This is because the risk to
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator inflate under some unusual
the rear-facing child is so great, circumstance, even though the
on page 5-15.
if the airbag inflates. airbag is off.
The passenger sensing system
turns off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag under
{ Warning Secure rear-facing child restraints
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
certain conditions. No other airbag A child in a rear-facing child is off. If you secure a
is affected by the passenger restraint can be seriously injured forward-facing child restraint in
sensing system. or killed if the passenger frontal the front outboard passenger
The passenger sensing system airbag inflates. This is because seat, always move the seat as far
works with sensors that are part of the back of the rear-facing child back as it will go. It is better to
the front outboard passenger seat. restraint would be very close to secure the child restraint in a
The sensors are designed to detect the inflating airbag. A child in a rear seat.
the presence of a properly-seated (Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The passenger sensing system is person of adult size is sitting

designed to turn off the front properly in the front outboard Warning (Continued)
outboard passenger frontal airbag if: passenger seat.
with the airbag system. To help
. The front outboard passenger When the passenger sensing avoid injury to yourself or others,
seat is unoccupied. system has allowed the airbag to be have the vehicle serviced right
. The system determines that an enabled, the on indicator will light away. See Airbag Readiness
infant is present in a child and stay lit as a reminder that the Light on page 5-15 for more
restraint. airbag is active. information, including important
. A front outboard passenger For some children, including safety information.
takes his/her weight off of the children in child restraints, and for
seat for a period of time. very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn If the On Indicator Is Lit for a
. There is a critical problem with off the front outboard passenger Child Restraint
the airbag system or the frontal airbag, depending upon the The passenger sensing system is
passenger sensing system. person’s seating posture and body designed to turn off the front
When the passenger sensing build. Everyone in the vehicle who outboard passenger frontal airbag if
system has turned off the front has outgrown child restraints should the system determines that an infant
outboard passenger frontal airbag, wear a safety belt properly — is present in a child restraint. If a
the off indicator will light and stay lit whether or not there is an airbag for child restraint has been installed
as a reminder that the airbag is off. that person. and the on indicator is lit:
See Passenger Airbag Status 1. Turn the vehicle off.
Indicator on page 5-15. { Warning 2. Remove the child restraint from
The passenger sensing system is If the airbag readiness light ever the vehicle.
designed to turn on the front comes on and stays on, it means
outboard passenger frontal airbag
that something may be wrong
anytime the system senses that a
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
3. Remove any additional items happens, adjust the head If a person of adult size is sitting in
from the seat such as blankets, restraint. See Head Restraints the front outboard passenger seat,
cushions, seat covers, seat on page 3-2. but the off indicator is lit, it could be
heaters, or seat massagers. 6. Restart the vehicle. because that person is not sitting
4. Reinstall the child restraint properly in the seat. Use the
The passenger sensing system following steps to allow the system
following the directions provided may or may not turn off the
by the child restraint to detect that person and enable the
airbag for a child in a child front outboard passenger frontal
manufacturer and refer to restraint depending upon the
Securing Child Restraints (Front airbag:
child’s size. It is better to secure
Passenger Seat) on page 3-53 the child restraint in a rear seat. 1. Turn the vehicle off.
or Securing Child Restraints 2. Remove any additional material
(Rear Seat) on page 3-51. If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an from the seat, such as blankets,
5. If, after reinstalling the child Adult-Sized Occupant cushions, seat covers, seat
restraint and restarting the heaters, or seat massagers. Also
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, remove laptops, or other
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly electronic devices.
recline the vehicle seatback and 3. Place the seatback in the fully
adjust the seat cushion, upright position.
if adjustable, to make sure that
the vehicle seatback is not 4. Have the person sit upright in
pushing the child restraint into the seat, centered on the seat
the seat cushion. cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
vehicle head restraint. If this person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
A thick layer of additional material,

. Liquid pooled on the seat that
{ Warning such as a blanket or cushion, has not soaked in may make it
or aftermarket equipment such as more likely that the passenger
If the front outboard passenger seat covers, seat heaters, and seat sensing system will turn on the
airbag is turned off for an massagers can affect how well the passenger airbag while a child
adult-sized occupant, the airbag passenger sensing system restraint or child occupant is on
will not be able to inflate and help operates. We recommend that you the seat. If the passenger airbag
protect that person in a crash, not use seat covers or other is turned on, the on indicator will
resulting in an increased risk of aftermarket equipment except when be lit.
serious injury or even death. An approved by GM for your specific If the passenger seat gets wet, dry
adult-sized occupant should not vehicle. See Adding Equipment to the seat immediately. If the airbag
ride in the front outboard the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on readiness light is lit, do not install a
passenger seat, if the passenger page 3-34 for more information child restraint or allow anyone to
airbag off indicator is lit. about modifications that can affect occupy the seat. See Airbag
how the system operates. Readiness Light on page 5-15 for
A wet seat can affect the important safety information.
Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation performance of the passenger The on indicator may be lit if an
sensing system. Here is how: object, such as a briefcase,
Safety belts help keep the handbag, grocery bag, laptop or
passenger in position on the seat
. The passenger sensing system
may turn off the passenger other electronic device, is put on an
during vehicle maneuvers and unoccupied seat. If this is not
braking, which helps the passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into
the seat. If this happens, the off desired remove the object from
sensing system maintain the the seat.
passenger airbag status. See indicator will be lit, and the
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” airbag readiness light on the
in the Index for additional instrument panel will also be lit.
information about the importance of
proper restraint use.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
belts, airbag sensing and diagnostic

{ Warning { Warning module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
Stowing of articles under the For up to 10 seconds after the ceiling or pillar garnish trim,
passenger seat or between the vehicle is turned off and the overhead console, front sensors,
passenger seat cushion and battery is disconnected, an airbag side impact sensors, airbag wiring,
seatback may interfere with the can still inflate during improper or the front center console if the
proper operation of the passenger service. You can be injured if you vehicle has a front center airbag.
sensing system. are close to an airbag when it
Your dealer and the service manual
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
have information about the location
They are probably part of the
Servicing the airbag system. Be sure to follow
of the airbag sensors, sensing and
diagnostic module, and airbag
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle proper service procedures, and wiring.
Airbags affect how the vehicle make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so. In addition, the vehicle has a
should be serviced. There are parts passenger sensing system that
of the airbag system in several includes sensors as part of the front
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have
Adding Equipment to the outboard passenger seat. The
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle passenger sensing system may not
information about servicing the operate properly if the original seat
vehicle and the airbag system. To Adding accessories that change the trim is replaced with non-GM
purchase a service manual, see vehicle's frame, bumper system, covers, upholstery, or trim, or; with
Service Publications Ordering height, front end, or side sheet GM covers, upholstery, or trim
Information on page 13-11. metal may keep the airbag system designed for a different vehicle. Any
from working properly. object, such as an aftermarket seat
The operation of the airbag system heater or a comfort-enhancing pad
can also be affected by changing or device, installed under or on top
any parts of the front seats, safety of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
passenger sensing system. This Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System
could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger The airbag system does not need Parts after a Crash
airbag(s) or prevent the passenger regularly scheduled maintenance or
sensing system from properly replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
{ Warning
turning off the passenger airbag(s).
See Passenger Sensing System on Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the airbag
page 3-29. page 5-15. systems in the vehicle.
A damaged airbag system may
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail
airbags, see Different Size Tires { Caution not work properly and may not
protect you and your
and Wheels on page 10-52 for If an airbag covering is damaged, passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
additional information. opened, or broken, the airbag in serious injury or even death. To
If your vehicle needs to be modified may not work properly. Do not help make sure the airbag
because you have a disability and open or break the airbag systems are working properly
you have questions about whether coverings. If there are any after a crash, have them
the modifications will affect the opened or broken airbag inspected and any necessary
vehicle's airbag system, or if you coverings, have the airbag replacements made as soon as
have questions about whether the covering and/or airbag module possible.
airbag system will be affected if the replaced. For the location of the
vehicle is modified for any other airbags, see Where Are the
reason, call Customer Assistance.
Airbags? on page 3-24. See your
See Customer Assistance Offices
dealer for service.
on page 13-3.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
If an airbag inflates, you will need to Child Restraints The manufacturer instructions that
replace airbag system parts. See come with the booster seat state the
your dealer for service. weight and height limitations for that
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes lap-shoulder belt until the child
on when you are driving, the airbag passes the fit test below:
system may not work properly. Have . Sit all the way back on the seat.
the vehicle serviced right away. See Do the knees bend at the seat
Airbag Readiness Light on edge? If yes, continue. If no,
page 5-15. return to the booster seat.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
Older children who have outgrown
page 3-16. If the shoulder belt
booster seats should wear the
still does not rest on the
vehicle safety belts.
shoulder, then return to the
booster seat.
. Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. Can proper safety belt fit be According to accident statistics,
maintained for the length of the children are safer when properly
trip? If yes, continue. If no, restrained in a rear seating position.
return to the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not
Q: What is the proper way to buckled up can strike other people
wear safety belts? who are buckled up, or can be
A: An older child should wear a thrown out of the vehicle. Older
lap-shoulder belt and get the children need to use safety belts
additional restraint a shoulder properly.
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or { Warning
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just Never allow more than one child
touching the top of the thighs. to wear the same safety belt. The { Warning
This applies belt force to the safety belt cannot properly spread Never allow a child to wear the
child's pelvic bones in a crash. the impact forces. In a crash, they safety belt with the shoulder belt
It should never be worn over the can be crushed together and behind their back. A child can be
abdomen, which could cause seriously injured. A safety belt seriously injured by not wearing
severe or even fatal internal must be used by only one person
injuries in a crash. the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
at a time. crash, the child would not be
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort restrained by the shoulder belt.
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on The child could move too far
page 3-16. forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Warning (Continued)
Infants and Young Every time infants and young
children ride in vehicles, they should
Children have the protection provided by
belt. The belt force would then be Everyone in a vehicle needs appropriate child restraints. Neither
applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants and the vehicle's safety belt system nor
That could cause serious or fatal all other children. Neither the its airbag system is designed
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and for them.
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the
the chest. Children who are not restrained
need, for everyone, to use safety properly can strike other people,
restraints. In fact, the law in every or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be { Warning
restrained while in a vehicle.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
{ Warning crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
Children can be seriously injured
possible to hold it during a crash.
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
For example, in a crash at only
wrapped around their neck and
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
the safety belt continues to
infant will suddenly become a
tighten. Never leave children
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
unattended in a vehicle and never
arms. An infant should be
allow children to play with the
secured in an appropriate
safety belts.
restraint.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Q: What are the different types of

Warning (Continued) add-on child restraints?
right front seat, always move the A: Add-on child restraints, which
front passenger seat as far back are purchased by the vehicle
as it will go. owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
If a child restraint is installed in restraint should take into
the second row center seat, move consideration not only the child's
the second row seat to the weight, height, and age but also
rearward position, whenever whether or not the restraint will
possible, to minimize contact with be compatible with the motor
the front center airbag, vehicle in which it will be used.
if equipped.
{ Warning For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
Children who are up against, different models available. When
or very close to, any airbag when purchasing a child restraint, be
it inflates can be seriously injured sure it is designed to be used in
or killed. Never put a rear-facing a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
child restraint in the right front
that it meets federal motor
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
vehicle safety standards.
restraint in a rear seat.
It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a
rear seat. If a forward-facing child
restraint must be secured in the
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The restraint manufacturer Child Restraint Systems

instructions that come with the { Warning
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular A young child's hip bones are still
child restraint. In addition, there so small that the vehicle's regular
are many kinds of restraints safety belt may not remain low on
available for children with the hip bones, as it should.
special needs. Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
{ Warning the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
To reduce the risk of neck and any bony structure. This alone
head injury during a crash, infants could cause serious or fatal
need complete support. In a injuries. To reduce the risk of
crash, if an infant is in a serious or fatal injuries during a Rear-Facing Infant Seat
rear-facing child restraint, the crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat provides
crash forces can be distributed always be secured in appropriate restraint with the seating surface
across the strongest part of an child restraints. against the back of the infant.
infant's body, the back and The harness system holds the infant
shoulders. Infants should always in place and, in a crash, acts to
be secured in rear-facing child keep the infant positioned in the
restraints. restraint.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ Warning
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
Forward-Facing Child Seat Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat provides A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
restraint for the child's body with the designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury,
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3-43.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Children can be endangered in a Administration (NHTSA) website to Whenever possible, children age
crash if the child restraint is not locate the nearest child safety seat 12 and under should be secured in
properly secured in the vehicle. inspection station. For CPST a rear seating position.
When securing an add-on child availability in Canada, check with The vehicle may be equipped with a
restraint, refer to the instructions Transport Canada or the Provincial front center airbag in the inboard
that come with the restraint which Ministry of Transportation office. side of the driver seat. Even with a
may be on the restraint itself or in a Securing the Child Within the front center airbag, a child restraint
booklet, or both, and to this manual. Child Restraint can be installed in any second row
The child restraint instructions are seating position.
important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement { Warning Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front. This is because the risk to
copy from the manufacturer. A child can be seriously injured or the rear-facing child is so great if the
Keep in mind that an unsecured killed in a crash if the child is not airbag deploys.
child restraint can move around in a properly secured in the child
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
restraint. Secure the child { Warning
properly following the instructions
properly secure any child restraint in that came with that child restraint. A child in a rear-facing child
the vehicle — even when no child is restraint can be seriously injured
in it. or killed if the right front
In some areas of the United States Where to Put the passenger airbag inflates. This is
and Canada, Certified Child Restraint because the back of the
Passenger Safety Technicians rear-facing child restraint would
According to accident statistics,
(CPSTs) are available to inspect children and infants are safer when be very close to the inflating
and demonstrate how to correctly properly restrained in a child airbag. A child in a forward-facing
use and install child restraints. In restraint system or infant restraint child restraint can be seriously
the U.S., refer to the National system secured in a rear seating (Continued)
Highway Traffic Safety position.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
to access adjacent safety belt

Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued) assemblies or LATCH anchors for
additional passengers or child
injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System restraints. Adjacent seating
passenger airbag inflates and the on page 3-29 for additional positions should not be used if the
passenger seat is in a forward information. child restraint prevents access to or
position. If a child restraint is installed in a interferes with the routing of the
Even if the passenger sensing second row center seat, move the safety belt.
system has turned off the right second row seat to the rearward Wherever a child restraint is
front passenger frontal airbag, no position, whenever possible, to installed, be sure to secure the child
system is fail-safe. No one can minimize contact with the front restraint properly.
guarantee that an airbag will not center airbag, if equipped. Keep in mind that an unsecured
deploy under some unusual child restraint can move around in a
circumstance, even though it is When securing a child restraint in a collision or sudden stop and injure
turned off. Secure rear-facing rear seating position, study the people in the vehicle. Be sure to
child restraints in a rear seat, instructions that came with the child properly secure any child restraint in
even if the front passenger frontal restraint to make sure it is the vehicle — even when no child is
airbag is off. compatible with this vehicle. in it.
It is also better to secure a Child restraints and booster seats
forward-facing child restraint in a vary considerably in size, and some Lower Anchors and
rear seat. If a forward-facing child may fit in certain seating positions Tethers for Children
restraint must be secured in the better than others. Always make (LATCH System)
right front seat, always move the sure the child restraint is properly
front passenger seat as far back secured. The LATCH system secures a child
as it will go. restraint during driving or in a crash.
Depending on where you place the LATCH attachments on the child
(Continued) child restraint and the size of the restraint are used to attach the child
child restraint, you may not be able

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
restraint to the anchors in the Make sure to follow the instructions Lower Anchors
vehicle. The LATCH system is that came with the child restraint,
designed to make installation of a and also the instructions in this
child restraint easier. manual.
In order to use the LATCH system in When installing a child restraint with
your vehicle, you need a child a top tether, you must also use
restraint that has LATCH either the lower anchors or the
attachments. LATCH-compatible safety belts to properly secure the
rear-facing and forward-facing child child restraint. A child restraint must
seats can be properly installed never be installed using only the top
using either the LATCH anchors or tether and anchor.
the vehicle’s safety belts. Do not The LATCH anchorage system can
use both the safety belts and the be used until the combined weight
LATCH anchorage system to secure of the child plus the child restraint is
a rear-facing or forward-facing 29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety belt Lower anchors (1) are metal bars
child seat. alone instead of the LATCH built into the vehicle. There are two
Booster seats use the vehicle’s anchorage system once the lower anchors for each LATCH
safety belts to secure the child in combined weight is more than seating position that will
the booster seat. If the manufacturer 29.5 kg (65 lbs). accommodate a child restraint with
recommends that the booster seat lower attachments (2).
The following explains how to attach
be secured with the LATCH system, a child restraint with these
this can be done as long as the attachments in the vehicle.
booster seat can be positioned
properly and there is no interference Not all vehicle seating positions or
with the proper positioning of the child restraints have lower anchors
lap-shoulder belt on the child. and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Top Tether Anchor The child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Anchor Locations
Either will have a single
attachment (2) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of the instructions for your child
Second Row — Bucket
the child restraint to the vehicle. restraint.
A top tether anchor is built into the I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
vehicle. The top tether positions with top tether anchors.
attachment (2) on the child restraint H (Lower Anchor): Seating
connects to the top tether anchor in positions with two lower anchors.
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
To assist in locating the top tether

anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is near the anchor.
Second Row — 60/40 Bench Third Row

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors. positions with top tether anchors.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
Second Row — Bucket Shown,

To assist in locating the lower Bench Similar
anchors, each second row anchor The top tether anchors are at the
position has a label, near the crease bottom rear of the seatback for each
between the seatback and the seat seating position in the second row.
cushion.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Be sure to use an anchor on the that the top tether be attached, or if

same side of the vehicle as the the instructions that come with the Warning (Continued)
seating position where the child child restraint say that the top tether
restraint will be placed. must be attached. anchors, or use the vehicle safety
belts to secure the restraint,
According to accident statistics, following the instructions that
children and infants are safer when came with the child restraint and
properly restrained in a child the instructions in this manual.
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3-42 for
additional information.
{ Warning
Do not attach more than one child
Securing a Child Restraint restraint to a single anchor.
Designed for the LATCH Attaching more than one child
System restraint to a single anchor could
Third Row cause the anchor or attachment
The third row has one top tether
{ Warning to come loose or even break
anchor at the bottom rear of the during a crash. A child or others
If a LATCH-type child restraint is could be injured. To reduce the
center seatback. This anchor should not attached to anchors, the child
be used for the center seating risk of serious or fatal injuries
restraint will not be able to protect during a crash, attach only one
position only. Never install two top the child correctly. In a crash, the
tethers using the same top tether child restraint per anchor.
child could be seriously injured or
anchor.
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
Do not secure a child restraint in a restraint properly using the
position without a top tether anchor (Continued)
if a national or local law requires

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
This system is designed to make

{ Warning Caution (Continued) installation of child restraints easier.
When using lower anchors, do not
Children can be seriously injured Do not fold the empty rear seat use the vehicle's safety belts.
or strangled if a shoulder belt is with a safety belt buckled. This Instead, use the vehicle's anchors
wrapped around their neck and could damage the safety belt or and child restraint attachments to
the safety belt continues to the seat. Unbuckle and return the secure the restraints. Some
tighten. Buckle any unused safety safety belt to its stowed position, restraints also use another vehicle
belts behind the child restraint so before folding the seat. anchor to secure a top tether.
children cannot reach them. Pull
1. Attach and tighten the lower
the shoulder belt all the way out The vehicle may be equipped with a attachments to the lower
of the retractor to set the lock, front center airbag in the inboard anchors. If the child restraint
if the vehicle has one, after the side of the driver seat. Even with a does not have lower
child restraint has been installed. front center airbag, a child restraint attachments or the desired
can be installed in any second row seating position does not have
seating position. If a child restraint is lower anchors, secure the child
installed in a second row center
{ Caution seat, move the second row seat to
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your
Do not let the LATCH the rearward position, whenever child restraint manufacturer
attachments rub against the possible, to minimize contact with instructions and the instructions
vehicle’s safety belts. This may the front center airbag. in this manual.
damage these parts. If necessary, If you need to secure more than one 1.1. Find the lower anchors for
move buckled safety belts to child restraint in the rear seat, see the desired seating
avoid rubbing the LATCH Where to Put the Restraint on position.
attachments. page 3-42.
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1.2. To access the lower 2. If the child restraint manufacturer If the position you are using
anchors in the second row, recommends that the top tether does not have a headrest
it may help to recline the be attached, attach and tighten or head restraint and you
seatback. the top tether to the top tether are using a single tether,
Third row seatbacks must anchor, if the vehicle has one. route the tether over the
be upright before placing Refer to the child restraint seatback.
the child restraint on instructions and the following
the seat. steps:
1.3. Put the child restraint on 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
the seat. 2.2. Route, attach, and tighten
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower the top tether according to
attachments on the child your child restraint
restraint to the lower instructions and the
anchors. following instructions:
If necessary, adjust the

If the position you are using
angle of the second row
does not have a headrest
seatback to achieve a tight
or head restraint and you
installation. Make sure the
are using a dual tether,
second row bench
route the tether over the
seatbacks are aligned at
seatback.
the same angle.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
If the position you are using Replacing LATCH System

has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
Parts After a Crash
using a single tether, route
the tether over the headrest { Warning
or head restraint.
A crash can damage the LATCH
3. Before placing a child in the system in the vehicle. A damaged
child restraint, make sure it is LATCH system may not properly
securely held in place. To check,
If the position you are using secure the child restraint,
grasp the child restraint at the
has a fixed headrest or resulting in serious injury or even
LATCH path and attempt to
head restraint and you are death in a crash. To help make
move it side to side and back
using a dual tether, route and forth. There should be no sure the LATCH system is
the tether around the more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of working properly after a crash,
headrest or head restraint. movement, for proper see your dealer to have the
installation. system inspected and any
necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system

and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Securing Child Restraints Children (LATCH System) on 1. Put the child restraint on
page 3-43 for top tether anchor the seat.
(Rear Seat) locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
The vehicle may be equipped with a Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of
front center airbag in the inboard position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through
side of the driver seat. Even with a if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child
front center airbag, a child restraint that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show
can be installed in any second row the instructions that come with the you how.
seating position. If you install a child child restraint say that the top strap
restraint in a second row center must be anchored.
seat, move the second row seat to
the rearward position, whenever In Canada, the law requires that
possible, to minimize contact with forward-facing child restraints have
the front center airbag. a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
When securing a child restraint in a
rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be
restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that
If the child restraint has the LATCH came with the child restraint. Secure
system, see Lower Anchors and the child in the child restraint when
Tethers for Children (LATCH and as the instructions say. 3. Push the latch plate into the
System) on page 3-43 for how and buckle until it clicks.
where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear Position the release button on
secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put the buckle so that the safety belt
safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3-42. could be quickly unbuckled if
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for necessary.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3-43 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child
set, the shoulder belt can be tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed,
tightened but not pulled out of and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than
the retractor. into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint,
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Securing Child Restraints

(Front Passenger Seat)
{ Warning Warning (Continued)
The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints
is a safer place to secure a restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag
forward-facing child restraint. See or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a
Where to Put the Restraint on passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in
page 3-42. because the back of the the right front seat, always move
rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far
In addition, the vehicle has a be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
passenger sensing system which is
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
designed to turn off the front
child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
outboard passenger frontal airbag
under certain conditions. See injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System
Passenger Sensing System on passenger airbag inflates and the on page 3-29 for additional
page 3-29 and Passenger Airbag passenger seat is in a forward information.
Status Indicator on page 5-15 for position.
more information, including Even if the passenger sensing
important safety information. If the child restraint has the LATCH
system has turned off the right system, see Lower Anchors and
Never put a rear-facing child seat in front passenger frontal airbag, no Tethers for Children (LATCH
the front. This is because the risk to system is fail-safe. No one can System) on page 3-43 for how and
the rear-facing child is so great, guarantee that an airbag will not where to install the child restraint
if the airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual using LATCH. If a child restraint is
circumstance, even though it is secured using a safety belt and it
turned off. uses a top tether, see Lower
(Continued) Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3-43 for
top tether anchor locations.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Do not secure a child seat in a 2. Put the child restraint on

position without a top tether anchor the seat.
if a national or local law requires 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
that the top tether be anchored, or if the lap and shoulder portions of
the instructions that come with the the vehicle's safety belt through
child restraint say that the top strap or around the restraint. The child
must be anchored. restraint instructions will show
In Canada, the law requires that you how.
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
this position. Follow the instructions out of the retractor to set the
that came with the child restraint. lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
1. Move the seat as far back as it not pulled out of the retractor.
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the front
outboard passenger frontal 4. Push the latch plate into the
airbag, the off indicator on the buckle until it clicks.
passenger airbag status
indicator should light and stay lit Position the release button on
when the vehicle is started. See the buckle so that the safety belt
Passenger Airbag Status could be quickly unbuckled if
Indicator on page 5-15. necessary.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
7. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in
the passenger airbag status
6. To tighten the belt, push down indicator will come on and stay on
on the child restraint, pull the when the vehicle is started.
shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been installed
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
and feed the shoulder belt back On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
into the retractor. When installing Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
a forward-facing child restraint, it System on page 3-29 for more
may be helpful to use your knee information.
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
Try to pull the belt out of the let it return to the stowed position.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked repeat
Steps 5 and 6.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
2 NOTES

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage This vehicle has an instrument

panel storage area. To open the
Compartments cover, pull the latch forward.
Storage Compartments There is an auxiliary input jack on
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1 { Warning the faceplate and a USB port in the
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1 instrument panel storage. See
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Do not store heavy or sharp Auxiliary Devices on page 7-34.
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 objects in storage compartments.
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 In a crash, these objects may Glove Box
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 cause the cover to open and
could result in injury. Lift the glove box handle to open it.
Additional Storage Features Use the key to lock and unlock the
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 glove box.
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Instrument Panel Storage
Cargo Management Cupholders
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 There are two cupholders, with
removable liners, in front of the
Roof Rack System center console. There may be
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 cupholders in the second row seat
armrest. To access, pull the armrest
down. There are additional
cupholders on each side of the third
row seat and in each door.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
4-2 Storage
Armrest Storage Center Console Storage
There is additional storage under

the armrest. Move the armrest all
If equipped, the rear seat armrest Pull up the lever on the front of the the way to the rear position, then
may have two cupholders. Pull the center console armrest to slide it slide the storage cover back to
armrest down to access the forward and backward. To open the access.
cupholders. armrest storage area, press the There is a removable tray in the
button on the front of the armrest. storage area. Pull up on the tray to
remove and access the lower
storage area and power outlet. See
Power Outlets on page 5-8.
If equipped, there may be two
charging USB ports on the rear of
the console. See Auxiliary Devices
on page 7-34.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Storage 4-3
Additional Storage Cargo Management

System
{ Warning
Features An improperly latched and closed
This vehicle has a cargo
cargo cover, or cargo cover left in
Cargo Cover management system located in
the open position, could be
the rear.
For vehicles with a cargo cover, it thrown about the vehicle during a
can be used to cover items in the crash or sudden maneuver.
rear of the vehicle. To install the Someone could be injured. Be
cover, place the loops on each sure to return the cover to the
corner of the cover on the four closed position and latch before
hooks in the rear of the vehicle. The driving. If the cover is removed,
cover should be stored securely always store it outside of the
when not in use. vehicle. When it is replaced,
always be sure that it is securely
Cargo Tie-Downs reattached.
Four cargo tie‐downs are located in
the rear compartment of the vehicle. 3. Remove the cover from the
The tie-downs can be used to vehicle and store outside of the
secure small loads. To remove the cargo management vehicle.
cover:
1. Open the cover. It remains open
when lifted.
2. Pull the cover up making sure to
unhook the hinges at the rear of
the cover.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
4-4 Storage
Convenience Net For vehicles with a convenience Roof Rack System

net (4), attach it to the vehicle using
only the cargo tie-downs (3) on
each side. The net is used to store { Warning
small loads and should not be used
heavy loads. If something is carried on top of
the vehicle that is longer or wider
The cargo cover hooks (2) are used than the roof rack — like paneling,
to attach the cargo cover (1) to the plywood, or a mattress — the
vehicle only. Do not use the hooks wind can catch it while the vehicle
to secure loads or other items to the is being driven. The item being
vehicle or the hooks could be
carried could be violently torn off,
damaged.
and this could cause a collision
and damage the vehicle. Never
Power Liftgate Shown, Manual carry something longer or wider
Liftgate Similar than the roof rack on top of the
1. Cargo Cover vehicle unless using a GM
certified accessory carrier.
2. Cargo Cover Hooks
3. Cargo Tie-Downs For vehicles with a roof rack, the
4. Convenience Net rack can be used to load items. For
roof racks that do not have
crossrails included, GM Certified
crossrails can be purchased as an
accessory. See your dealer for
additional information.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Storage 4-5
To prevent damage or loss of cargo

{ Caution when driving, check to make sure
crossrails and cargo are securely
Loading cargo on the roof rack fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
that weighs more than 91 kg rack will make the vehicle’s center
(200 lb) or hangs over the rear or of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sides of the vehicle may damage sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
the vehicle. Load cargo so that it braking, or abrupt maneuvers;
rests evenly between the otherwise it may result in loss of
crossrails and fasten cargo control. If driving for a long distance,
securely. on rough roads, or at high speeds,
occasionally stop the vehicle to
make sure the cargo remains in its
place. Do not exceed the maximum
vehicle capacity when loading the
vehicle.
See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9-10.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
4-6 Storage
2 NOTES

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Information Displays
Driver Information Center
Controls Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 5-24
Driver Information Center
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 (DIC) (Without DIC
Controls Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-14 Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-15
Passenger Airbag Status Vehicle Messages
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-16 Battery Voltage and Charging
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-33
Rear Window Wiper/ Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-33
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Engine Cooling System
Clock (Radio without Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-35
Clock (Radio with Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-21
Lane Departure Warning Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-35
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-35
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 (LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-21 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-36
Warning Lights, Gauges, and StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-21 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Indicators Engine Coolant Temperature Object Detection System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Ride Control System
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-22 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-38
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-39 Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 while driving.
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-40
Vehicle Reminder Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Controls
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Adjustment
Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-41
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-42
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-49
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Vehicles with audio steering wheel
To adjust the steering wheel: controls could differ depending on
1. Pull the lever down. the vehicle's options. Some audio
controls can be adjusted at the
2. Move the steering wheel up steering wheel.
or down.
w or c /x (Next/Previous):
3. Pull or push the steering wheel Press to select preset or favorite
closer or away from you. radio stations, select tracks on a
4. Push the lever up to lock the CD, or select tracks and navigate
steering wheel in place. folders on an iPod® or USB device.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/27/13
To select tracks on an iPod or USB SRCE (Source): Press to switch Heated Steering Wheel
device: between the radio, CD, and if
equipped, front auxiliary, rear
. Press and hold w or c /x auxiliary, and iPod/USB.
while listening to a song listed in
the main audio page, to quickly ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next
move forward or in reverse radio station while in AM, FM,
through the tracks. or SiriusXM®.
. Track information is displayed on Press ¨ to go to the next track or
the screen. Release w or c chapter while sourced to the
CD slot.
/x when the desired track is
reached. Press ¨ to select a track or a folder
b /g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press when navigating folders on an iPod
and hold to silence the vehicle or USB device.
speakers only. Press again to turn + e or − e (Volume): Press to
the sound on.
( (Heated Steering Wheel): If
increase or to decrease the volume. Equipped with a heated steering
For vehicles with Bluetooth through wheel, press to turn it on or off.
the OnStar® system; press to A light on the button displays when
interact, then say “OnStar.” See the feature is turned on.
Bluetooth on page 7-37 and
The steering wheel takes about
"OnStar" if equipped.
three minutes to start heating.
c /x (End): Press to reject an
incoming call, or end a current call. Horn
Press a on the steering wheel pad
to sound the horn.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Windshield Wiper/Washer Clear ice and snow from the wiper

blades before using them. If frozen { Warning
The windshield wiper/washer lever to the windshield, carefully loosen or
is located on the left side of the thaw them. Damaged wiper blades In freezing weather, do not use
steering column. should be replaced. See Wiper the washer until the windshield is
Blade Replacement on page 10-24. warmed. Otherwise the washer
Turn the band with the wiper symbol
to control the windshield wipers. fluid can form ice on the
Heavy snow or ice can overload the windshield, blocking your vision.
wipers. A circuit breaker stops them
until the motor cools.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
Windshield Washer is displayed on the Driver
J FRONT (Washer Fluid): Press Information Center (DIC) when the
the button at the end of the lever, to washer fluid is low. See Washer
spray washer fluid on the Fluid Messages on page 5-42.
windshield. The wipers clear the
8 (Mist): Use for a single wiping windshield and either stop or return Rear Window Wiper/
cycle. to the preset speed. The ignition key Washer
must be in ACC/ACCESSORY or
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off. The rear wiper and rear wash button
ON/RUN for this to work. See
6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Washer Fluid on page 10-19. is on the center stack below the
Delays wiping cycle. Turn the band climate control system.
up for more frequent wipes or down Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the
for less frequent wipes. rear wiper on and off. The wiper
LO: Slow wipes. speed cannot be changed.
HI: Fast wipes.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Y (Wash): Press to spray washer Compass Zone To adjust for compass variance, use
fluid on the rear window. The The zone is set to zone eight upon the following procedure:
window wiper will also come on. leaving the factory. Your dealer will Compass Variance (Zone)
Release the button when enough set the correct zone for your Procedure
fluid has been sprayed on the location.
window. The rear wiper will run a 1. Do not set the compass zone
few more cycles after it is released. Under certain circumstances, such when the vehicle is moving. Only
If the rear wiper function was as during a long distance set it when the vehicle is in
already on prior to pressing the cross-country trip or moving to a P (Park).
wash button, it stays on until the new state or province, it will be
necessary to compensate for Press the vehicle information
wiper button is pressed again. button until PRESS V TO
compass variance by resetting the
The rear window washer uses the zone through the DIC if the zone is CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
same fluid that is in the windshield not set correctly. displays.
washer reservoir. See Washer Fluid
on page 10-19. Compass variance is the difference
between the earth's magnetic north
and true geographic north. If the
Compass compass is not set to the zone
Your vehicle may have a compass where you live, the compass may
in the Driver Information Center give false readings. The compass
(DIC). See Driver Information must be set to the variance zone in
Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on which the vehicle is traveling.
page 5-24 or Driver Information
Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
on page 5-29 for more information
about the DIC.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
2. Find the vehicle's current It is suggested to calibrate away To calibrate the compass, use the
location and variance zone from tall buildings, utility wires, following procedure:
number on the map. manhole covers, or other industrial
structures, if possible. Compass Calibration Procedure
Zones 1 through 15 are
available. If CAL should ever appear in the 1. Before calibrating the compass,
DIC display, the compass should be make sure the compass zone is
3. Press the set/reset button to set to the variance zone in which
scroll through and select the calibrated.
the vehicle is located. See
appropriate variance zone. If the DIC display does not show a “Compass Variance (Zone)
4. Press the trip/fuel button until heading, for example, N for North, Procedure” earlier in this
the vehicle heading, for or the heading does not change section.
example, N for North, is after making turns, there may be a
strong magnetic field interfering with Do not operate any switches
displayed in the DIC. such as window, sunroof,
the compass. Such interference
5. If calibration is necessary, may be caused by a magnetic CB or climate controls, seats, etc.
calibrate the compass. See cell phone antenna mount, a during the calibration procedure.
“Compass Calibration magnetic emergency light, magnetic 2. Press the vehicle information
Procedure” following. note pad holder, or any other button until PRESS V TO
Compass Calibration magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, CALIBRATE COMPASS
move the magnetic item, then turn displays.
The compass can be manually on the vehicle and calibrate the
calibrated. Only calibrate the compass. 3. Press the set/reset button to
compass in a magnetically clean start the compass calibration.
and safe location, such as an open 4. The DIC will display
parking lot, where driving the CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
vehicle in circles is not a danger. CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in
tight circles at less than 8 km/h
(5 mph) to complete the
calibration. The DIC will display

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a . Press \ FWD. 3. Press G again to apply the

few seconds when the selected default, or let the
calibration is complete. The DIC
. Turn f clockwise.
screen time out.
display will then return to the 5. To decrease the time or date, do
previous menu. one of the following: Clock (Radio with
Clock (Radio without . Press © SEEK. Touchscreen)
Touchscreen) . Press s REV.
To adjust the time and date: . Turn f counterclockwise.
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ To change the time default setting
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then from 12 hour to 24 hour or to
press O to turn the radio on. change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
2. Press G to display HR, MIN,
MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, 1. Press G and then the
month, day, and year). pushbutton located under the
3. Press the pushbutton located forward arrow that displays on
under any one of the labels to be the radio screen until the time
changed. 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and
the date MM/DD (month and Press Settings on the Home Page,
4. To increase the time or date, do day) and DD/MM (day and then press the Set Time or Set Date
one of the following: month) display. settings screen button to display the
. Press the pushbutton below different options for setting the time
2. Press the pushbutton located
the selected label. and date.
under the desired option.
. Press ¨ SEEK.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Set Time: The power outlets are located:

Caution (Continued)
. Press the up or down arrows to . On the center stack below the
increase or decrease the Hours, climate controls. drain the battery. Always unplug
Minutes, AM, PM, or 24 hr on . Inside the center floor console. electrical equipment when not in
the clock. use and do not plug in equipment
. The rear of the center console.
. Press and hold to quickly that exceeds the maximum
increase or decrease the time . In the rear cargo area. 20 amp rating.
settings. Lift the cover to access the outlet
. Press OK or the Back screen and replace when not in use. Certain accessory plugs may not be
button to save the adjustments. compatible with the accessory
Set Date: { Warning power outlet and could overload
vehicle and adapter fuses. If a
. Press the up or down arrows to Power is always supplied to the problem is experienced, see your
increase or decrease the Month, outlets. Do not leave electrical dealer.
Day, and Year settings. equipment plugged in when the When adding electrical equipment,
. Press and hold to quickly vehicle is not in use because the be sure to follow the proper
increase or decrease the date vehicle could catch fire and cause installation instructions included with
settings. injury or death. the equipment. See Add-On
. Press OK or the Back screen Electrical Equipment on page 9-54.
{ Caution { Caution
Power Outlets
Leaving electrical equipment Hanging heavy equipment from
The vehicle has 12-volt outlets that the power outlet can cause
plugged in for an extended period
can be used to plug in electrical damage not covered by the
equipment, such as a cell phone or of time while the vehicle is off will
MP3 player. (Continued) (Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
An indicator light on the outlet turns The power outlet is not designed for
Caution (Continued) on to show it is in use. The light and may not work properly, if the
comes on when the ignition is in following are plugged in:
vehicle warranty. The power ON/RUN and equipment requiring
outlets are designed for
. Equipment with high initial peak
less than 150 watts is plugged into wattage such as:
accessory power plugs only, such the outlet, and no system fault is
as cell phone charge cords. compressor-driven refrigerators
detected. and electric power tools.
The indicator light does not come on . Other equipment requiring an
Power Outlet 120 Volt when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF or extremely stable power supply
Alternating Current if the equipment is not fully seated such as:
into the outlet. microcomputer-controlled
If equipped with this power outlet it
can be used to plug in electrical If equipment is connected using electric blankets, touch sensor
equipment that uses a maximum more than 150 watts or a system lamps, etc.
limit of 150 watts. fault is detected, a protection circuit See High Voltage Devices and
shuts off the power supply and the Wiring on page 10-28.
indicator light turns off. To reset the
circuit, unplug the item and plug it
back in or turn the Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) off and
then back on. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 9-19. The power restarts when
equipment using 150 watts or less is
plugged into the outlet and a system
The power outlet is on the rear of fault is not detected.
the center console.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
Indicators problem with the vehicle.
Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Instrument Cluster
English Uplevel Shown, Metric Similar

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Speedometer Fuel Gauge When the ignition is on, the fuel

gauge shows how much fuel is left
The speedometer shows the in the tank.
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per An arrow on the fuel gauge
hour (mph). indicates the side of the vehicle the
fuel door is on.
Odometer The gauge will first indicate empty
before the vehicle is out of fuel, but
The odometer shows how far the
the vehicle's fuel tank should be
vehicle has been driven, in either
filled soon.
kilometers or miles.
When the fuel tank is low on fuel,
This vehicle has a tamper-resistant
the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will
odometer. If the vehicle needs a
appear on the Driver Information
new odometer installed, the new Metric Center (DIC). For more information
one is set to the mileage of the old
see Fuel System Messages on
odometer. If this is not possible, it is
page 5-35.
set at zero and a label is put on the
driver door to show the old mileage
reading.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine
speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
English

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Here are some situations that may Engine Coolant

occur with the fuel gauge. None of
these indicate a problem with the
Temperature Gauge
fuel gauge.
. At the gas station, the gas pump
shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
. It takes a little more or less fuel
to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge might have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
English
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill This gauge shows the engine
the tank. coolant temperature. If the gauge
Metric
. pointer moves into the red area, it
The gauge moves a little while
means that the engine coolant has
turning a corner or speeding up.
overheated. If the vehicle has been
. The gauge does not go back to operated under normal driving
empty when the ignition is conditions, pull off the road, stop the
turned off. vehicle, and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on
page 10-16 for more information.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Voltmeter Gauge Readings in the low warning zone

can occur when a large number of
electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left
idling for an extended period.
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, a SERVICE When the vehicle is started, this
BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM light flashes and a chime may come
message will appear in the Driver on to remind the driver to fasten
Information Center (DIC) and/or the their safety belt. Then the light stays
charging system light comes on. on solid until the belt is buckled.
See Battery Voltage and Charging This cycle may continue several
Messages on page 5-32 for more times if the driver remains or
information. becomes unbuckled while the
vehicle is moving.
When the engine is not running, but However, readings in either warning
the ignition is on, this gauge zone may indicate a possible If the driver safety belt is buckled,
displays the battery voltage in problem in the electrical system. neither the chime nor the light
DC volts. Have the vehicle serviced as soon comes on.
as possible.
When the engine is running, this Passenger Safety Belt
gauge shows the condition of the Reminder Light
charging system. The vehicle's Safety Belt Reminders
charging system regulates voltage There is a passenger safety belt
Driver Safety Belt Reminder reminder light near the passenger
based on the state of charge of the
Light airbag status indicator. See
battery. The voltmeter may fluctuate.
This is normal. Readings between There is a driver safety belt Passenger Sensing System on
the low and high warning zones reminder light on the instrument page 3-29.
indicate the normal operating range. cluster.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Airbag Readiness Light

{ Warning
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem with the airbag If the airbag readiness light stays
system. The system check includes on after the vehicle is started or
the airbag sensor(s), passenger comes on while driving, it means
sensing system, the pretensioners, the airbag system might not be
When the vehicle is started, this the airbag modules, the wiring, and working properly. The airbags in
light flashes and a chime may come the crash sensing and diagnostic the vehicle might not inflate in a
on to remind passengers to fasten module. For more information on the
their safety belt. Then the light stays crash, or they could even inflate
airbag system, see Airbag System without a crash. To help avoid
on solid until the belt is buckled. on page 3-22.
This cycle continues several times if injury, have the vehicle serviced
the passenger remains or becomes right away.
unbuckled while the vehicle is
moving. If there is a problem with the airbag
If the passenger safety belt is system, a Driver Information Center
buckled, neither the chime nor the (DIC) message may also come on.
light comes on. See Airbag System Messages on
page 5-38.
The front passenger safety belt The airbag readiness light comes on
warning light and chime may turn on for several seconds when the
if an object is put on the seat such vehicle is started. If the light does Passenger Airbag Status
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery not come on then, have it fixed Indicator
bag, laptop, or other electronic immediately. The vehicle has a passenger
device. To turn off the warning light sensing system. See Passenger
and/or chime, remove the object Sensing System on page 3-29 for
from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
important safety information. The If the word ON or the on symbol is

instrument panel has a passenger lit on the passenger airbag status Warning (Continued)
airbag status indicator. indicator, it means that the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag is away. See Airbag Readiness
allowed to inflate. Light on page 5-15 for more
information, including important
If the word OFF or the off symbol is safety information.
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has Charging System Light
United States turned off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer for service. The charging system light comes on
Canada and Mexico
briefly when the ignition is turned
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
{ Warning on, but the engine is not running, as
a check to show the light is working.
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol If the airbag readiness light ever It should go out when the engine is
for on and off, for several seconds comes on and stays on, it means started.
as a system check. Then, after that something may be wrong If the light stays on, or comes on
several more seconds, the status with the airbag system. To help while driving, there may be a
indicator will light either ON or OFF, avoid injury to yourself or others, problem with the electrical charging
or either the on or off symbol to let have the vehicle serviced right
you know the status of the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag. (Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
system. Have it checked by your working. If it does not, have the

dealer. Driving while this light is on vehicle serviced by your dealer. See { Caution
could drain the battery. Ignition Positions on page 9-15.
If the vehicle is continually driven
When this light comes on, the Driver with this light on, the emission
Information Center (DIC) also controls might not work as well,
displays the SERVICE BATTERY the vehicle fuel economy might
CHARGING SYSTEM message. not be as good, and the engine
See Vehicle Messages on might not run as smoothly. This
page 5-32 for more information. could lead to costly repairs that
If a short distance must be driven If the malfunction indicator lamp might not be covered by the
with the light on, be sure to turn off comes on while the engine is vehicle warranty.
all accessories, such as the radio running, this indicates that the OBD
and air conditioner. II system has detected a problem
Malfunction
and diagnosis and service might be
required.
{ Caution
Indicator Lamp Malfunctions often are indicated by Modifications made to the engine,
the system before any problem is transmission, exhaust, intake,
A computer system called OBD II
apparent. Being aware of the light or fuel system of the vehicle or
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
can prevent more serious damage the replacement of the original
Generation) monitors the operation
to the vehicle. This system also tires with other than those of the
of the vehicle to ensure emissions
assists the service technician in same Tire Performance Criteria
are at acceptable levels, helping to
correctly diagnosing any (TPC) can affect the vehicle's
maintain a clean environment. The
malfunction. emission controls and can cause
malfunction indicator lamp comes
on when the vehicle is placed in this light to come on.
ON/RUN, as a check to show it is Modifications to these systems
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. If towing a trailer, reduce the A few driving trips with the cap
Caution (Continued) amount of cargo being hauled as properly installed should turn the
soon as it is possible. light off.
could lead to costly repairs not
If the light continues to flash, find a . Check that good quality fuel is
covered by the vehicle warranty.
safe place to stop and park the used. Poor fuel quality causes
This could also result in a failure
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at the engine not to run as
to pass a required Emission least 10 seconds, and restart the
Inspection/Maintenance test. See efficiently as designed and may
engine. If the light is still flashing, cause stalling after start-up,
Accessories and Modifications on follow the previous steps and see stalling when the vehicle is
page 10-2. your dealer for service as soon as changed into gear, misfiring,
possible. hesitation on acceleration,
This light comes on during a Light On Steady: An emission or stumbling on acceleration.
malfunction in one of two ways: control system malfunction has These conditions might go away
Light Flashing: A misfire condition been detected on the vehicle. once the engine is warmed up.
has been detected. A misfire Diagnosis and service might be If one or more of these conditions
increases vehicle emissions and required. occurs, change the fuel brand used.
could damage the emission control The following may correct an It may require at least one full tank
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis emission control system of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
and service might be required. malfunction: See Recommended Fuel on
To prevent more serious damage to . Check that the fuel cap is fully page 9-43.
the vehicle: installed. See Filling the Tank on If none of the above have made the
. Reduce vehicle speed. page 9-44. The diagnostic light turn off, your dealer can check
system can determine if the fuel the vehicle. The dealer has the
. Avoid hard accelerations. cap has been left off or proper test equipment and
. Avoid steep uphill grades. improperly installed. A loose or diagnostic tools to fix any
missing fuel cap allows fuel to mechanical or electrical problems
evaporate into the atmosphere. that might have developed.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Emissions Inspection and the ignition is turned to ON/RUN Brake System Warning
Maintenance Programs while the engine is off. See your
dealer for assistance in verifying
Light
Depending on where you live, your proper operation of the The vehicle brake system consists
vehicle may be required to malfunction indicator lamp. of two hydraulic circuits. If one
participate in an emission control circuit is not working, the remaining
system inspection and maintenance . The OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics) system determines circuit can still work to stop the
program. For the inspection, the vehicle. For normal braking
emission system test equipment will that critical emission control
systems have not been performance, both circuits need to
likely connect to the vehicle's Data be working
Link Connector (DLC). completely diagnosed. The
vehicle would be considered not If the warning light comes on, there
ready for inspection. This can is a brake problem. Have the brake
happen if the 12-volt battery has system inspected right away.
recently been replaced or run
down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
The DLC is under the instrument several days of routine driving.
panel to the left of the steering If this has been done and the Metric English
wheel. See your dealer if assistance vehicle still does not pass the
is needed. inspection for lack of OBD II This light should come on briefly
The vehicle may not pass system readiness, your dealer when the ignition key is turned to
inspection if: can prepare the vehicle for ON/RUN. If it does not come on
inspection. then, have it fixed so it will be ready
. The malfunction indicator lamp is to warn if there is a problem.
on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
This light may also come on due to The ABS warning light comes on
low brake fluid. See Brake Fluid on Warning (Continued) briefly when the ignition key is
page 10-21. turned to ON/RUN. This is normal.
Driving with the brake system If the light does not come on then,
When the ignition is on, the brake warning light on can lead to a
system warning light also comes on have it fixed so it will be ready to
crash. If the light is still on after warn you if there is a problem.
when the parking brake is set. The the vehicle has been pulled off
light will stay on if the parking brake the road and carefully stopped, If the light stays on, turn the ignition
does not release fully. If it stays on have the vehicle towed for to LOCK/OFF. If the light comes on
after the parking brake is fully while driving, stop as soon as
service.
released, it means there is a brake possible and turn the ignition off.
problem. Then start the engine again to reset
If the light comes on while driving, The brake message remains on until the system. If the light still stays on,
pull off the road and stop carefully. any DIC button is pressed. The or comes on again while driving, the
Make sure the parking brake is fully brake light remains on until the vehicle needs service. If the regular
released. The pedal may be harder problem is fixed. See Brake System brake system warning light is not
to push or, the pedal may go closer Messages on page 5-33. on, there are still brakes, but no
to the floor. It may take longer to antilock brakes. If the regular brake
stop. If the light is still on, have the Antilock Brake System system warning light is also on,
vehicle towed for service. See (ABS) Warning Light there are no antilock brakes and
Towing the Vehicle on page 10-70. there is a problem with the regular
brakes. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 5-19.
{ Warning
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Tow/Haul Mode Light This light comes on green when the StabiliTrak® Indicator
system is on and ready to operate.
When the system determines that
Light
the vehicle is leaving its lane
without using the turn signal, this
light will change to amber and flash.
See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
on page 9-41.
This light comes on when the Tow/
Haul mode has been activated. Vehicle Ahead Indicator The StabiliTrak light comes on
For more information, see Tow/Haul briefly as the engine is started. If it
Mode on page 9-25. does not come on, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
Lane Departure Warning This light flashes while the
(LDW) Light StabiliTrak system or the Traction
Control System (TCS) is working.
The light comes on when there is a
If available, this light displays green problem with the StabiliTrak system.
when a vehicle is detected ahead. See Traction Control/Electronic
See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) Stability Control on page 9-28.
System on page 9-32.
This light comes on briefly while

starting the vehicle. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. If the system is working
normally, the light then turns off.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Engine Coolant Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and
Then Is On Steady
Temperature Warning
Light If the light flashes for about a minute
and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure Operation on page 10-45.
Monitor System (TPMS), this light
comes on briefly when the engine is Engine Oil Pressure Light
The engine coolant temperature started. It provides information
warning light comes on briefly when
the vehicle is started.
about tire pressures and the TPMS. { Caution
When the Light Is On Steady
If it does not, have the vehicle Lack of proper engine oil
serviced by your dealer. If the This indicates that one or more of maintenance can damage the
system is working normally, the the tires are significantly engine. Driving with the engine
indicator light then goes off. underinflated. oil low can also damage the
If the light comes on and stays on A Driver Information Center (DIC) engine. The repairs would not be
while driving, the vehicle may have tire pressure message may also covered by the vehicle warranty.
a problem with the cooling system. display. See Tire Messages on Check the oil level as soon as
Stop and turn off the vehicle to page 5-39. Stop as soon as possible. Add oil if required, but if
avoid damage to the engine. possible, and inflate the tires to the the oil level is within the operating
A warning chime sounds when this pressure value shown on the Tire range and the oil pressure is still
light is on. and Loading Information label. See low, have the vehicle serviced.
Tire Pressure on page 10-42. Always follow the maintenance
See Engine Overheating on
page 10-16 for more information. schedule for changing engine oil.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The security light should come on High-Beam On Light

briefly as the engine is started. If the
system is working normally, the
indicator light turns off. If it does not
come on, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer.
This light should come on briefly as If the light stays on and the engine
the engine is started. If it does not does not start, there could be a
come on, have the vehicle serviced problem with the theft-deterrent The high-beam on light comes on
by your dealer. system. when the high-beam headlamps are
If the light comes on and stays on, it This light is also used to indicate the in use.
means that oil is not flowing through status of the anti-theft alarm system See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
the engine properly. The vehicle when the ignition is turned off. The Changer on page 6-2 for more
could be low on oil and might have light will flash rapidly if the alarm information.
some other system problem. See system is arming and one or more
your dealer. of the monitored entry points is not
closed. The light will stay on if the
Security Light alarm is arming and all entry points
are closed.
For information regarding this light
and the vehicle's security system,
see Vehicle Alarm System on
page 2-12.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Cruise Control Light Information Displays The outside air temperature and
compass, if equipped, also display
on the DIC when viewing the trip
Driver Information Center and fuel information. The outside air
(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) temperature automatically appears
in the top right corner of the DIC
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the
display. If there is a problem with
information below explains the
the system that controls the
operation of this system.
temperature display, the numbers
This light comes on when the cruise The DIC displays information about will be replaced with dashes. If this
control is set. your vehicle. It also displays occurs, have the vehicle serviced.
This light goes out when the cruise warning messages if a system The compass will be shown in the
control is canceled. See Cruise problem is detected. bottom right corner of the DIC
Control on page 9-30. All messages will appear in the DIC display. See Compass on page 5-5
display located at the top of the for more information.
instrument panel cluster. The DIC also allows some features
The DIC comes on when the ignition to be customized. See Vehicle
is on. After a short delay, the DIC Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
will display the information that was on page 5-42 for more information.
last displayed before the engine If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you
was turned off. can also use the trip odometer reset
The DIC also displays a shift lever stem to view the odometer and trip
position indicator on the bottom line odometers.
of the display. See Automatic
Transmission on page 9-22 for more
information.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
DIC Buttons T (Vehicle Information): Press will alert you to change the oil on a
The DIC has different displays this button to display the oil life, schedule consistent with your
which can be accessed by pressing park assist on vehicles with this driving conditions.
the DIC buttons located in the feature, units, tire pressure readings When the remaining oil life is low,
center of the instrument panel. on vehicles with this feature, and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
compass calibration and zone message will appear on the display.
setting on vehicles with this feature. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button under Engine Oil Messages on
to display the odometer, trip page 5-35. You should change the
odometers, fuel range, average oil as soon as you can. See Engine
economy, timer, fuel used, and Oil on page 10-7. In addition to the
average speed. engine oil life system monitoring the
The buttons are the set/reset, oil life, additional maintenance is
customization, vehicle information,
Vehicle Information Menu recommended in the Maintenance
and trip/fuel buttons. The button Items Schedule in this manual. See
functions are detailed in the T (Vehicle Information): Press Maintenance Schedule on
following pages. this button to scroll through the page 11-3 for more information.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to following menu items: Remember, you must reset the OIL
set or reset certain functions and to LIFE display yourself after each oil
OIL LIFE change. It will not reset itself. Also,
turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC. Press the vehicle information button be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
until OIL LIFE REMAINING display accidentally at any time
U (Customization): Press this displays. This display shows an other than when the oil has just
button to customize the feature estimate of the oil's remaining useful been changed. It cannot be reset
settings on your vehicle. See life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE accurately until the next oil change.
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC REMAINING on the display, that To reset the engine oil life system,
Buttons) on page 5-42 for more means 99% of the current oil life see Engine Oil Life System on
information. remains. The engine oil life system page 10-9.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT choose ON, the system will be system has been turned off. See
If the vehicle has the Side Blind turned on. If you choose OFF, the Object Detection System Messages
Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this system will be turned off. The URPA on page 5-36 and Rear Vision
display allows the system to be system automatically turns back on Camera (RVC) on page 9-37.
turned on or off. Once in this after each vehicle start. When the
URPA system is turned off and the UNITS
display, press the set/reset button to
select between ON or OFF. If you vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the Press the vehicle information button
choose ON, the system will be DIC will display the PARK ASSIST until UNITS displays. This display
turned on. If you choose OFF, the OFF message as a reminder that allows you to select between metric
system will be turned off. When the the system has been turned off. See or English units of measurement.
SBZA system is turned off, the DIC Object Detection System Messages Once in this display, press the set/
will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE on page 5-36 and Ultrasonic reset button to select between
ALERT SYSTEM OFF message as Parking Assist on page 9-34. METRIC or ENGLISH units. All of
a reminder that the system has the vehicle information will then be
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT displayed in the unit of
been turned off. See Object
Detection System Messages on If the vehicle has the Rear Cross measurement selected.
page 5-36 and Side Blind Zone Alert Traffic Alert (RCTA) system, this
display allows the system to be FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
(SBZA) on page 9-36.
turned on or off. Once in this On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
PARK ASSIST display, press the set/reset button to Monitor System (TPMS), the
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic select between ON or OFF. If you pressure for each tire can be viewed
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, choose ON, the system will be in the DIC. The tire pressure will be
press the vehicle information button turned on. If you choose OFF, the shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or
until PARK ASSIST displays. This system will be turned off. When the pounds per square inch (psi). Press
display allows the system to be RCTA system is turned off, the DIC the vehicle information button until
turned on or off. Once in this will display the REAR CROSS the DIC displays FRONT
display, press the set/reset button to TRAFFIC ALERT SYSTEM OFF TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##
select between ON or OFF. If you message as a reminder that the RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
information button again until the Blank Display time. Pressing the trip odometer
DIC displays REAR TIRES kPa This display shows no information. reset stem will also display the trip
(PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. odometers.
If a low tire pressure condition is Trip/Fuel Menu Items Each trip odometer can be reset to
detected by the system while 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button zero separately by pressing the set/
driving, a message advising you to to scroll through the following menu reset button or the trip odometer
add air to a specific tire will appear items: reset stem while the desired trip
in the display. See Tire Pressure on odometer is displayed.
page 10-42 and Tire Messages on ODOMETER
The trip odometer has a feature
page 5-39 for more information. Press the trip/fuel button until called retroactive reset. This can be
If the tire pressure display shows ODOMETER displays. This display used to set the trip odometer to the
dashes instead of a value, there shows the distance the vehicle has number of kilometers (miles) driven
may be a problem with your vehicle. been driven in either kilometers (km) since the ignition was last turned on.
If this consistently occurs, see your or miles (mi). Pressing the trip This can be used if the trip
dealer for service. odometer reset stem will also odometer is not reset at the
display the odometer. beginning of the trip.
COMPASS ZONE SETTING
To switch between English and To use the retroactive reset feature,
This display will be available if the metric measurements, see “UNITS” press and hold the set/reset button
vehicle has a compass. See earlier in this section. for at least four seconds. The trip
Compass on page 5-5 for more odometer will display the number of
information. TRIP A and TRIP B
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven
Press the trip/fuel button until since the ignition was last turned on
COMPASS RECALIBRATION
TRIP A or TRIP B displays. This and the vehicle was moving. Once
This display will be available if the display shows the current distance the vehicle begins moving, the trip
vehicle has a compass. See traveled in either kilometers (km) or odometer will accumulate mileage.
Compass on page 5-5 for more miles (mi) since the last reset for For example, if the vehicle was
information. each trip odometer. Both trip driven 8 km (5 mi) before it is started
odometers can be used at the same

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
again, and then the retroactive reset making frequent stops, this display estimate of the vehicle fuel
feature is activated, the display will may read one number, but if the economy under a given driving
show 8 km (5 mi). As the vehicle vehicle is driven on a freeway, the condition at a specific moment. For
begins moving, the display will then number may change even though example, if the vehicle is
increase to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km the same amount of fuel is in the accelerating and achieving low fuel
(5.2 mi), etc. fuel tank. This is because different efficiency this display will show
If the retroactive reset feature is driving conditions produce different fewer bars, but if the vehicle is
activated after the vehicle is started, fuel economies. Generally, freeway cruising on a flat freeway and
but before it begins moving, the driving produces better fuel getting high fuel efficiency, the
display will show the number of economy than city driving. Fuel display will show more bars. Fuel
kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven range cannot be reset. economy cannot be reset.
during the last ignition cycle. AVG (Average) ECONOMY TIMER
RANGE Press the trip/fuel button until AVG Press the trip/fuel button until
Press the trip/fuel button until ECONOMY displays. This display TIMER displays. This display can be
RANGE displays. This display shows the approximate average used as a timer.
shows the approximate number of liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) To start the timer, press the set/
remaining kilometers (km) or or miles per gallon (mpg). This reset button while TIMER is
miles (mi) the vehicle can be driven number is calculated based on the displayed. The display will show the
without refueling. The display will number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded amount of time that has passed
show LOW if the fuel level is low. since the last time this menu item since the timer was last reset, not
was reset. To reset AVG including time the ignition is off.
The fuel range estimate is based on ECONOMY, press and hold the set/
an average of the vehicle's fuel Time will continue to be counted as
reset button. long as the ignition is on, even if
economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in Fuel Economy another display is being shown on
the fuel tank. This estimate will the DIC. The timer will record up to
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL
change if driving conditions change. ECONOMY displays. The FUEL
For example, if driving in traffic and ECONOMY display shows an

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
99 hours, 59 minutes and since the last reset of this value. To If your vehicle does not have DIC
59 seconds (99:59:59) after which reset the value to zero, press and buttons, you can use the trip
the display will return to zero. hold the set/reset button. odometer reset stem to view the
To stop the timer, press the set/reset following displays: odometer, trip
Blank Display odometers, oil life, park assist menu
button briefly while TIMER is
displayed. This display shows no information. for vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) system,
To reset the timer to zero, press and Driver Information Center units, and display language.
hold the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed. (DIC) (Without DIC If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you
Buttons) can use the trip odometer reset
FUEL USED stem to view the following displays:
If your vehicle does not have DIC odometer and trip odometers.
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL buttons, the information below
USED displays. This display shows explains the operation of this Trip Odometer Reset Stem
the number of liters (L) or system. Menu Items
gallons (gal) of fuel used since the
last reset of this menu item. To reset The DIC has different displays ODOMETER
the fuel used information, press and which can be accessed by pressing
Press the trip odometer reset stem
hold the set/reset button while FUEL the trip odometer reset stem located
until ODOMETER displays. This
USED is displayed. on the instrument panel cluster.
display shows the distance the
Pressing the trip odometer reset
AVG (Average) SPEED vehicle has been driven in either
stem will also turn off,
kilometers (km) or miles (mi).
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG or acknowledge, DIC messages.
SPEED displays. This display To switch between English and
The DIC displays trip and vehicle
shows the average speed of the metric measurements, see “UNITS”
system information, and warning
vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h) later in this section.
messages if a system problem is
or miles per hour (mph). This detected.
average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speeds recorded

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
TRIP A or TRIP B miles (mi) driven since the ignition display, that means 99% of the
Press the trip odometer reset stem was last turned on and the vehicle current oil life remains. The engine
until TRIP A or TRIP B displays. This was moving. Once the vehicle oil life system will alert you to
display shows the current distance begins moving, the trip odometer change the oil on a schedule
traveled in either kilometers (km) or will accumulate mileage. For consistent with your driving
miles (mi) since the last reset for example, if the vehicle was driven conditions.
each trip odometer. Both trip 8 km (5 mi) before it is started again, When the remaining oil life is low,
odometers can be used at the and then the retroactive reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
same time. feature is activated, the display will message will appear on the display.
show 8 km (5 mi). As the vehicle See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”
Each trip odometer can be reset to begins moving, the display will then
zero separately by pressing and under Engine Oil Messages on
increase to 8.2 km (5.1 mi), 8.4 km page 5-35. You should change the
holding the trip odometer reset stem (5.2 mi), etc.
while the desired trip odometer is oil as soon as you can. See Engine
displayed. If the retroactive reset feature is Oil on page 10-7. In addition to the
activated after the vehicle is started, engine oil life system monitoring the
The trip odometer has a feature but before it begins moving, the oil life, additional maintenance is
called the retroactive reset. This can display will show the number of recommended in the Maintenance
be used to set the trip odometer to kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven Schedule in this manual. See
the number of kilometers (miles) during the last ignition cycle. Maintenance Schedule on
driven since the ignition was last page 11-3 for more information.
turned on. This can be used if the OIL LIFE
trip odometer is not reset at the Remember, you must reset the OIL
To access this display, the vehicle LIFE display yourself after each oil
beginning of the trip. must be in P (Park). Press the trip change. It will not reset itself. Also,
To use the retroactive reset feature, odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
press and hold the trip odometer REMAINING displays. This display display accidentally at any time
reset stem for at least four seconds. shows an estimate of the oil's other than when the oil has just
The trip odometer will display the remaining useful life. If you see been changed. It cannot be reset
number of kilometers (km) or 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the accurately until the next oil change.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
To reset the engine oil life system, UNITS 2. Continue to press and hold the
see Engine Oil Life System on To access this display, the vehicle trip odometer reset stem to scroll
page 10-9. must be in P (Park). Press the trip through all of the available
odometer reset stem until UNITS languages.
PARK ASSIST
displays. This display allows you to The available languages are
To access this display, the vehicle select between metric or English ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS
must be in P (Park). If your vehicle units of measurement. Once in this (French), ESPANOL (Spanish),
has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking display, press and hold the trip and NO CHANGE.
Assist (URPA) system, press the trip odometer reset stem to select
odometer reset stem until PARK 3. Once the desired language is
between METRIC or ENGLISH displayed, release the trip
ASSIST displays. This display units. All of the vehicle information
allows the system to be turned on or odometer reset stem to set your
will then be displayed in the unit of choice.
off. Once in this display, press and measurement selected.
hold the trip odometer reset stem to SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
select between ON or OFF. If you DISPLAY LANGUAGE
choose ON, the system will be If the vehicle has the Side Blind
To access this display, the vehicle Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this
turned on. If you choose OFF, the must be in P (Park). This display
system will be turned off. The URPA display allows the system to be
allows you to select the language in turned on or off. Once in this
system automatically turns back on which the DIC messages will
after each vehicle start. When the display, press the set/reset button to
appear. To select a language: select between ON or OFF. If you
URPA system is turned off and the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the 1. Press the trip odometer reset choose ON, the system will be
DIC will display the PARK ASSIST stem until DISPLAY LANGUAGE turned on. If you choose OFF, the
OFF message as a reminder that displays. system will be turned off. When the
the system has been turned off. See SBZA system is turned off, the DIC
Object Detection System Messages will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE
on page 5-36 and Ultrasonic
Parking Assist on page 9-34.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
ALERT SYSTEM OFF message as Vehicle Messages The following are the possible
a reminder that the system has messages that can be displayed
been turned off. See Object Messages are displayed on the DIC and some information about them.
Detection System Messages on to notify the driver that the status of
page 5-36 and Side Blind Zone Alert the vehicle has changed and that Battery Voltage and
(SBZA) on page 9-36. some action may be needed by the
driver to correct the condition.
Charging Messages
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT Multiple messages may appear one BATTERY LOW START
If the vehicle has the Rear Cross after another. VEHICLE
Traffic Alert (RCTA) system, this Some messages may not require
display allows the system to be This message displays when the
immediate action, but you can press system detects that the battery
turned on or off. Once in this any of the DIC buttons on the
display, press the set/reset button to voltage has dropped to a critical
instrument panel or the trip level and the engine must be started
select between ON or OFF. If you odometer reset stem on the
choose ON, the system will be to avoid a dead battery situation.
instrument panel cluster to
turned on. If you choose OFF, the acknowledge that you received the BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
system will be turned off. When the messages and to clear them from
RCTA system is turned off, the DIC This message displays when the
the display.
will display the REAR CROSS system detects that the battery
TRAFFIC ALERT SYSTEM OFF Some messages cannot be cleared voltage is dropping below expected
message as a reminder that the from the DIC display because they levels. The battery saver system
system has been turned off. See are more urgent. These messages starts reducing certain features of
Object Detection System Messages require action before they can be the vehicle that you may be able to
on page 5-36 and Rear Vision cleared. You should take any notice. At the point that the features
Camera (RVC) on page 9-37. messages that appear on the are disabled, this message is
display seriously and remember that displayed. It means that the vehicle
clearing the messages will only is trying to save the charge in the
make the messages disappear, not battery.
correct the problem.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Turn off all unnecessary system. See Brake System Warning obstructions, and close the door
accessories to allow the battery to Light on page 5-19. If this message again. Check to see if the message
recharge. appears, stop as soon as possible still appears on the DIC.
The normal battery voltage range is and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message HOOD OPEN
11.5 to 15.5 volts.
on the DIC display. If the message On some models, this message
SERVICE BATTERY is still displayed or appears again displays and a chime sounds if the
CHARGING SYSTEM when you begin driving, the brake hood is not fully closed. Stop and
system needs service as soon as turn off the vehicle, check the hood
On some vehicles, this message possible. See your dealer. for obstructions, and close the hood
displays if there is a problem with
again. Check to see if the message
the battery charging system. Under
certain conditions, the charging
Cruise Control Messages still appears on the DIC.
system light may also turn on in the CRUISE SET TO XXX LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
instrument cluster. See Charging
System Light on page 5-16. Driving This message displays whenever This message displays and a chime
with this problem could drain the the cruise control is set. See Cruise sounds if the driver side rear door is
battery. Turn off all unnecessary Control on page 9-30 for more not fully closed and the vehicle is
accessories. Have the electrical information. shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn
system checked as soon as off the vehicle, check the door for
possible. See your dealer. Door Ajar Messages obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message
DRIVER DOOR OPEN still appears on the DIC.
Brake System Messages
This message displays and a chime LIFTGATE OPEN
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM sounds if the driver door is not fully
closed and the vehicle is shifted out This message displays and a chime
This message displays along with sounds if the liftgate is open while
the brake system warning light if of P (Park). Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off
there is a problem with the brake

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
the vehicle and check the liftgate. the door for obstructions, and close ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
Restart the vehicle and check for the door again. Check to see if the ENGINE
the message on the DIC display. message still appears on the DIC.
This message displays when the
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN Engine Cooling System engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
This message displays and a chime Messages idle until it cools down. See Engine
sounds if the passenger door is not
Coolant Temperature Gauge on
fully closed and the vehicle is ENGINE HOT A/C (Air page 5-13.
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn Conditioning) OFF
off the vehicle, check the door for See Overheated Engine Protection
obstructions, and close the door This message displays when the Operating Mode on page 10-18 for
again. Check to see if the message engine coolant becomes hotter than information on driving to a safe
still appears on the DIC. the normal operating temperature. place in an emergency.
See Engine Coolant Temperature
POWER LIFTGATE OFF Gauge on page 5-13. To avoid ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
added strain on a hot engine, the air ENGINE
conditioning compressor
power liftgate has been turned off This message displays and a
automatically turns off. When the
by pressing the power liftgate button continuous chime sounds if the
coolant temperature returns to
on the center console. engine cooling system reaches
normal, the air conditioning
unsafe temperatures for operation.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN compressor turns back on. You can
Stop and turn off the vehicle as
continue to drive your vehicle.
This message displays and a chime soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
sounds if the passenger side rear If this message continues to appear, severe damage. This message
door is not fully closed and the have the system repaired by your clears when the engine has cooled
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). dealer as soon as possible to avoid to a safe operating temperature.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check damage to the engine.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Engine Oil Messages OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP This message also displays when
ENGINE the vehicle's engine power is
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON reduced. Reduced engine power
This message displays when the can affect the vehicle's ability to
This message displays when vehicle's engine oil pressure is low.
service is required for the vehicle. accelerate. If this message is on,
The oil pressure light also appears but there is no reduction in
See your dealer. See Engine Oil on on the instrument cluster. See
page 10-7 and Maintenance performance, proceed to your
Engine Oil Pressure Light on destination. The performance may
Schedule on page 11-3. page 5-22. be reduced the next time the vehicle
Acknowledging the CHANGE Stop the vehicle immediately, as is driven. The vehicle may be driven
ENGINE OIL SOON message will engine damage can result from at a reduced speed while this
not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING. driving a vehicle with low oil message is on, but acceleration and
See “Oil Life” under Driver pressure. Have the vehicle serviced speed may be reduced. Anytime
Information Center (DIC) (With DIC by your dealer as soon as possible this message stays on, the vehicle
Buttons) on page 5-24 or Driver when this message is displayed. should be taken to your dealer for
Information Center (DIC) (Without service as soon as possible.
DIC Buttons) on page 5-29 and Engine Power Messages
Engine Oil Life System on Fuel System Messages
page 10-9. ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
FUEL LEVEL LOW
ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL This message displays and a chime
sounds when the cooling system This message displays and a chime
On some vehicles, this message temperature gets too hot and the sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel
displays when the engine oil level engine further enters the engine as soon as possible. See Fuel
may be too low. Check the oil level coolant protection mode. See Gauge on page 5-12 and Fuel on
before filling to the recommended Engine Overheating on page 10-16 page 9-43 for more information.
level. If the oil is not low and this for further information.
message remains on, take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
See Engine Oil on page 10-7.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
TIGHTEN GAS CAP Lamp Messages Object Detection System

This message may display along AUTOMATIC LIGHT Messages
with the check engine light on the
instrument cluster if the vehicle's
CONTROL OFF FORWARD COLLISION ALERT
fuel cap is not tightened properly. This message displays when the UNAVAILABLE
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on automatic headlamps are turned off. This message displays when
page 5-17. Reinstall the fuel cap This message clears itself after attempting to activate the Forward
fully. See Filling the Tank on 10 seconds. Collision Alert (FCA) system when it
page 9-44. The diagnostic system is temporarily unavailable. The FCA
can determine if the fuel cap has AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL ON system does not need service.
been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap allows This message could be due to the
fuel to evaporate into the camera being blocked. Cleaning the
automatic headlamps are turned on.
atmosphere. A few driving trips with outside of the windshield behind the
This message clears itself after
the cap properly installed should rearview mirror may correct the
10 seconds.
turn this light and message off. issue.
TURN SIGNAL ON
FRT CAMERA BLOCKED
Key and Lock Messages This message displays and a chime CLEAN WINDSHIELD
sounds if a turn signal is left on for
REPLACE BATTERY IN 1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turn This message displays when the
REMOTE KEY signal lever to the off position. camera is blocked. Cleaning the
outside of the windshield behind the
This message displays if a Remote
rearview mirror may correct the
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
issue. The Lane Departure Warning
battery is low. The battery needs to
system will not operate. Forward
be replaced in the transmitter. See
Collision Alert (FCA) may not work
“Battery Replacement” under
or may not work as well.
System Operation on page 2-2.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
LANE DEPARTURE SYS been turned off. To turn the URPA SERVICE PARK ASSIST
UNAVAILABLE system back on, see Ultrasonic
This message displays if there is a
Parking Assist on page 9-34.
This message displays when problem with the Ultrasonic Rear
attempting to activate the Lane REAR CROSS TRAFFIC Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do
Departure Warning (LDW) system ALERT SYSTEM OFF not use this system to help you
when it is temporarily unavailable. park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
The LDW system does not need If the vehicle has the Rear Cross on page 9-34 for more information.
service. Traffic Alert (RCTA) system, this See your dealer for service.
message displays when the RCTA
This message could be due to the system has been turned off. See SERVICE SIDE DETECTION
camera being blocked. Cleaning the Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on SYSTEM
outside of the windshield behind the page 9-37 and Driver Information
rearview mirror may correct the If your vehicle has the Side Blind
Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
issue. Zone Alert (SBZA) system and this
message displays, both SBZA
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE displays will remain on indicating
on page 5-29.
OWNERS MANUAL there is a problem with the SBZA
SERVICE FRONT CAMERA system. If these displays remain on
This message displays if there is
after continued driving, the system
something interfering with the park If this message remains on after needs service. See your dealer. See
assist system. See Ultrasonic continued driving, the vehicle needs Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
Parking Assist on page 9-34. service. Do not use the Lane page 9-36.
Departure Warning (LDW) and
PARK ASSIST OFF Forward Collision Alert (FCA) SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT
After the vehicle has been started, features. Take the vehicle to your SYSTEM OFF
this message displays to remind the dealer.
driver that the URPA system has If your vehicle has the Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this
message displays when the SBZA

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
system has been turned off. See Ride Control System TRACTION CONTROL OFF
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on
page 9-36 and Driver Information
Messages This message displays when the
Traction Control System (TCS) is
Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on SERVICE STABILITRAK turned off. Adjust your driving
This message displays if there is a accordingly. See Traction Control/
problem with the StabiliTrak® Electronic Stability Control on
on page 5-29.
system. If this message appears, try page 9-28.
SIDE DETECTION SYS to reset the system. Stop; turn off
TRACTION CONTROL ON
TEMPORARILY OFF the engine for at least 15 seconds;
then start the engine again. If this This message displays when the
If your vehicle has the Side Blind Traction Control System (TCS) is
message still comes on, it means
Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this turned on. See Traction Control/
there is a problem. See your dealer
message displays when the SBZA Electronic Stability Control on
for service. The vehicle is safe to
system is disabled because the page 9-28. This message clears
drive, however, you do not have the
sensor cannot detect vehicles in itself after 10 seconds.
benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
your blind zone. The sensor may be
your speed and drive accordingly.
blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,
or slush. This message may also Airbag System Messages
SERVICE TRACTION
display during heavy rain or due to CONTROL SERVICE AIR BAG
road spray. It may also come on
when driving in isolated areas with This message displays when there This message displays if there is a
no guardrails, trees, or road signs is a problem with the Traction problem with the airbag system.
and light traffic. Your vehicle does Control System (TCS). When this Have your dealer inspect the
not need service. For cleaning message is displayed, the system system for problems. See Airbag
instructions, see “Washing Your will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your Readiness Light on page 5-15 and
Vehicle” in Exterior Care on driving accordingly. See your dealer Airbag System on page 3-22 for
page 10-73. See Side Blind Zone for service. See Traction Control/ more information.
Alert (SBZA) on page 9-36. Electronic Stability Control on

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Security Messages Service Vehicle Messages SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SERVICE A/C (Air This message displays when a
non-emissions related malfunction
SYSTEM Conditioning) SYSTEM occurs. Have the vehicle serviced
This message displays when there This message displays when the by your dealer as soon as possible.
is a problem with the theft-deterrent electronic sensors that control the
system. The vehicle may or may not air conditioning and heating STARTING DISABLED
restart so you may want to take the systems are no longer working. SERVICE THROTTLE
vehicle to your dealer before turning Have the climate control system This message displays when your
off the engine. See Immobilizer serviced by your dealer if you notice vehicle's throttle system is not
Operation on page 2-13 for more a drop in heating and air functioning properly. Have your
information. conditioning efficiency. vehicle serviced by your dealer.
THEFT ATTEMPTED SERVICE POWER STEERING
Tire Messages
This message displays if the content This message displays when a
theft-deterrent system has detected problem is detected with the power TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
a break-in attempt while you were steering system. When this On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
away from your vehicle. See Vehicle message is displayed, you may Monitor System (TPMS), this
Alarm System on page 2-12 for notice that the effort required to message displays when the
more information. steer the vehicle increases or feels pressure in one or more of the
heavier, but you will still be able to vehicle's tires is low.
steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer immediately. This message also displays LEFT
FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (right
front), LEFT RR (left rear),
or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate
the location of the low tire.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The low tire pressure warning light then remains on during the same Transmission Messages
will also come on. See Tire ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure
Pressure Light on page 5-22. Light on page 5-22. Several ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF
If a tire pressure message appears conditions may cause this message If your vehicle has the All-Wheel
on the DIC, stop as soon as you to appear. See Tire Pressure Drive (AWD) system, this message
can. Inflate the tires by adding air Monitor Operation on page 10-45 for displays when there is a temporary
until the tire pressure is equal to the more information. If the warning condition making the AWD system
values shown on the Tire and comes on and stays on, there may unavailable. The vehicle will run in
Loading Information label. See Tires be a problem with the TPMS. See 2WD. This could be caused by:
on page 10-35, Vehicle Load Limits your dealer.
. A compact spare tire on the
on page 9-10, and Tire Pressure on TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE vehicle
page 10-42.
This message displays when the . AWD system overheat
The DIC also shows the tire Tire Pressure Monitor System
pressure values. See Driver (TPMS) is relearning the tire
. Loss of wheel or vehicle speed
Information Center (DIC) (With DIC positions on your vehicle. The tire . Certain other vehicle electrical
Buttons) on page 5-24 or Driver positions must be relearned after conditions
Information Center (DIC) (Without rotating the tires or after replacing a
DIC Buttons) on page 5-29. This message turns off when the
tire or sensor. See Tire Rotation on compact spare tire is replaced by a
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR page 10-48, Tire Pressure Monitor full-size tire, the differential fluid
System on page 10-44, and Tire
SYSTEM cools or the above conditions are no
Pressure on page 10-42 for more longer present and the warning
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure information. message is reset. To reset the
Monitor System (TPMS), this
warning message manually, turn the
message displays if a part on the
ignition off and then back on again
TPMS is not working properly. The
after 30 seconds. If the message
tire pressure light also flashes and
stays on, see your dealer. See
All-Wheel Drive on page 9-26.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE Vehicle Reminder

This message displays if a problem ENGINE Messages
occurs with the All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) system. The vehicle will run { Caution ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
in 2WD. This could be caused by: WITH CARE
Do not drive the vehicle while the
. An electronics problem This message displays when the
transmission fluid is overheating,
.
outside air temperature is cold
Worn out or overheated clutch or the transmission can be enough to create icy road
plates damaged. This could lead to conditions. Adjust your driving
. Various electrical issues costly repairs that would not be accordingly.
covered by the warranty.
If this message appears, stop as
soon as possible and turn off the Vehicle Speed Messages
ignition for 30 seconds. Restart the This message displays and a chime
sounds if the transmission fluid in SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH
vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the (KM/H)
still displays or appears again when transmission fluid temperature high This message displays when your
you begin driving, the system needs can cause damage to the vehicle. vehicle speed is limited to 128 km/h
service. See your dealer right away. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to (80 mph) because the vehicle
allow the transmission to cool. This detects a problem in the speed
SERVICE TRANSMISSION message clears when the fluid variable assist steering system.
This message displays when there temperature reaches a safe level. Have your vehicle serviced by your
is a problem with the transmission. dealer.
See your dealer for service.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Washer Fluid Messages Vehicle To change customization

preferences, use the following
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD Personalization procedure.
FLUID
Entering the Feature
This message displays when the Vehicle Personalization Settings Menu
windshield washer fluid is low. Fill (With DIC Buttons)
the windshield washer fluid reservoir 1. Turn the ignition on and place
Your vehicle may have the vehicle in P (Park).
as soon as possible. See Engine
customization capabilities that allow
Compartment Overview on To avoid excessive drain on the
you to program certain features to
page 10-5 for the location of the battery, it is recommended that
one preferred setting. Customization
windshield washer fluid reservoir. the headlamps are turned off.
features can only be programmed to
Also, see Washer Fluid on
one setting on the vehicle and 2. Press the customization button
cannot be programmed to a to enter the feature
preferred setting for two different settings menu.
drivers.
If the menu is not available,
All of the customization options may FEATURE SETTINGS
not be available on your vehicle. AVAILABLE IN PARK will
Only the options available will be display. Before entering the
displayed on the DIC. menu, make sure the vehicle is
The default settings for the in P (Park).
customization features were set
when your vehicle left the factory,
but may have been changed from
their default state since then.
The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Feature Settings Menu Items Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK
the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen This feature allows you to select
The following are customization
appears on the DIC display. Press when the doors will automatically
features that allow you to program
the set/reset button once to access lock. See Automatic Door Locks on
settings to the vehicle:
the settings for this feature. Then page 2-7.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings: Press the customization button until
This feature will only display if a AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the
language other than English has ENGLISH (default): All messages DIC display. Press the set/reset
been set. This feature allows you to will appear in English. button once to access the settings
change the language in which the FRANCAIS: All messages will for this feature. Then press the
DIC messages appear to English. appear in French. customization button to scroll
Press the customization button until ESPANOL: All messages will through the following settings:
the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN appear in Spanish. SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):
ENGLISH screen appears on the The doors will automatically lock
NO CHANGE: No change will be
DIC display. Press the set/reset when the vehicle is shifted out of
made to this feature. The current
button once to display all DIC P (Park).
setting will remain.
messages in English.
To select a setting, press the set/ AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors
DISPLAY LANGUAGE reset button while the desired will automatically lock when the
setting is displayed on the DIC. vehicle speed is above 13 km/h
This feature allows you to select the
(8 mph) for three seconds.
language in which the DIC You can also change the language
messages will appear. by pressing the trip odometer reset NO CHANGE: No change will be
stem. See “DISPLAY LANGUAGE” made to this feature. The current
under “Driver Information Center setting will remain.
(DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)” earlier To select a setting, press the set/
in this section. reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors Press the customization button until
This feature allows you to select will unlock when the key is taken REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on
whether or not to turn off the out of the ignition. the DIC display. Press the set/reset
automatic door unlocking feature. ALL IN PARK (default): All of the button once to access the settings
It also allows you to select which doors will unlock when the vehicle is for this feature. Then press the
doors and when the doors will shifted into P (Park). customization button to scroll
automatically unlock. See Automatic through the following settings:
Door Locks on page 2-7. made to this feature. The current OFF: There will be no feedback
Press the customization button until setting will remain. when you press the lock button on
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the RKE transmitter.
To select a setting, press the set/
the DIC display. Press the set/reset reset button while the desired LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps
button once to access the settings setting is displayed on the DIC. will flash when you press the lock
for this feature. Then press the button on the RKE transmitter.
customization button to scroll REMOTE DOOR LOCK HORN ONLY: The horn will sound
through the following settings: This feature allows you to select the on the second press of the lock
OFF: None of the doors will type of feedback you will receive button on the RKE transmitter.
automatically unlock. when locking the vehicle with the HORN & LIGHTS (default): The
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) exterior lamps will flash when you
driver door will unlock when the key transmitter. You will not receive press the lock button on the RKE
is taken out of the ignition. feedback when locking the vehicle transmitter, and the horn will sound
with the RKE transmitter if the doors when the lock button is pressed
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver are open. See Remote Keyless
door will unlock when the vehicle is again within five seconds of the
Entry (RKE) System Operation on previous command.
shifted into P (Park). page 2-2.
made to this feature. The current
setting will remain.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
To select a setting, press the set/ LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lock button on the RKE transmitter
reset button while the desired lamps will flash when you press the twice. See Delayed Locking on
setting is displayed on the DIC. unlock button on the RKE page 2-7.
transmitter. Press the customization button until
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
NO CHANGE: No change will be DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on
This feature allows you to select the made to this feature. The current the DIC display. Press the set/reset
type of feedback you will receive setting will remain. button once to access the settings
when unlocking the vehicle with the for this feature. Then press the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired customization button to scroll
transmitter. You will not receive through the following settings:
feedback when unlocking the setting is displayed on the DIC.
vehicle with the RKE transmitter if OFF: There will be no delayed
DELAY DOOR LOCK locking of the vehicle's doors.
the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System This feature allows you to select ON (default): The doors will not
Operation on page 2-2. whether or not the locking of the lock until five seconds after the last
vehicle's doors and liftgate will be door or the liftgate is closed.
Press the customization button until delayed. When locking the doors
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears and liftgate with the power door lock NO CHANGE: No change will be
on the DIC display. Press the set/ switch and a door or the liftgate is made to this feature. The current
reset button once to access the open, this feature will delay locking setting will remain.
settings for this feature. Then press the doors and liftgate until
the customization button to scroll To select a setting, press the set/
five seconds after the last door is reset button while the desired
through the following settings: closed. You will hear three chimes setting is displayed on the DIC.
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps to signal that the delayed locking
will not flash when you press the feature is in use. The key must be EXIT LIGHTING
unlock button on the RKE out of the ignition for this feature to This feature allows you to select the
transmitter. work. You can temporarily override amount of time you want the
delayed locking by pressing the exterior lamps to remain on when it
power door lock switch twice or the

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
is dark enough outside. This APPROACH LIGHTING or the vehicle is no longer off. See
happens after the key is turned from This feature allows you to select Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. whether or not to have the exterior System Operation on page 2-2.
Press the customization button until lights turn on briefly during low light NO CHANGE: No change will be
EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC periods after unlocking the vehicle made to this feature. The current
display. Press the set/reset button using the Remote Keyless Entry setting will remain.
once to access the settings for this (RKE) transmitter. To select a setting, press the set/
feature. Then press the Press the customization button until reset button while the desired
customization button to scroll APPROACH LIGHTING appears on setting is displayed on the DIC.
through the following settings: the DIC display. Press the set/reset
OFF: The exterior lamps will not button once to access the settings CHIME VOLUME
turn on. for this feature. Then press the This feature allows you to select the
30 SECONDS (default): The customization button to scroll volume level of the chime.
exterior lamps will stay on for through the following settings: Press the customization button until
30 seconds. OFF: The exterior lights will not CHIME VOLUME appears on the
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will turn on when you unlock the vehicle DIC display. Press the set/reset
stay on for one minute. with the RKE transmitter. button once to access the settings
ON (default): If it is dark enough for this feature. Then press the
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will customization button to scroll
stay on for two minutes. outside, the exterior lights will turn
on briefly when you unlock the through the following settings:
NO CHANGE: No change will be vehicle with the RKE transmitter. NORMAL: The chime volume will
made to this feature. The current be set to a normal level.
setting will remain. The lights will remain on for
20 seconds or until the lock button LOUD: The chime volume will be
To select a setting, press the set/ on the RKE transmitter is pressed, set to a loud level.
reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
NO CHANGE: No change will be DRIVER MIRROR: The driver Press the customization button until
made to this feature. The current outside mirror will be tilted down EASY EXIT SEAT appears on the
setting will remain. when the vehicle is shifted into DIC display. Press the set/reset
There is no default for chime R (Reverse). button once to access the settings
volume. The volume will stay at the PASSENGER MIRROR: The for this feature. Then press the
last known setting. passenger outside mirror will be customization button to scroll
tilted down when the vehicle is through the following settings:
To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired shifted into R (Reverse). OFF (default): No automatic seat
setting is displayed on the DIC. BOTH MIRRORS: The driver and exit recall will occur.
passenger outside mirrors will be ON: The driver seat will move back
PARK TILT MIRRORS tilted down when the vehicle is when the key is removed from the
If your vehicle has this feature, it shifted into R (Reverse). ignition.
allows you to select whether or not NO CHANGE: No change will be The automatic easy exit seat
the outside mirror(s) will made to this feature. The current movement will only occur one time
automatically tilt down when the setting will remain. after the key is removed from the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). ignition. If the automatic movement
See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2-17. To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired has already occurred, and you put
Press the customization button until setting is displayed on the DIC. the key back in the ignition and
PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on remove it again, the seat and
the DIC display. Press the set/reset EASY EXIT SEAT steering column will stay in the
button once to access the settings If your vehicle has this feature, it original exit position, unless a
for this feature. Then press the allows you to select your preference memory recall took place prior to
customization button to scroll for the automatic easy exit seat removing the key again.
through the following settings: feature. See Memory Seats on NO CHANGE: No change will be
OFF (default): Neither outside page 3-6. made to this feature. The current
mirror will be tilted down when the setting will remain.
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
To select a setting, press the set/ NO CHANGE: No change will be NO CHANGE: No change will be
reset button while the desired made to this feature. The current made to this feature. The current
setting is displayed on the DIC. setting will remain. setting will remain.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL To select a setting, press the set/ To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired reset button while the desired
If your vehicle has this feature, it setting is displayed on the DIC. setting is displayed on the DIC.
allows you to select your preference
for the remote memory seat recall REMOTE START FACTORY SETTINGS
feature. See Memory Seats on If your vehicle has this feature, it This feature allows you to set all of
page 3-6. allows you to turn the remote start the customization features back to
Press the customization button until off or on. The remote start feature their factory default settings.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears allows you to start the engine from Press the customization button until
on the DIC display. Press the set/ outside of the vehicle using the FACTORY SETTINGS appears on
reset button once to access the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the DIC display. Press the set/reset
settings for this feature. Then press transmitter. See Remote Vehicle button once to access the settings
the customization button to scroll Start on page 2-4. for this feature. Then press the
through the following settings: Press the customization button until customization button to scroll
OFF (default): No remote memory REMOTE START appears on the through the following settings:
seat recall will occur. DIC display. Press the set/reset RESTORE ALL (default): The
ON: The driver seat and outside button once to access the settings customization features will be set to
mirrors will automatically move to for this feature. Then press the their factory default settings.
the stored driving position when the customization button to scroll
through the following settings: DO NOT RESTORE: The
unlock button on the Remote customization features will not be
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is OFF: The remote start feature will set to their factory default settings.
pressed. be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start
feature will be enabled.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
To select a setting, press the set/ Exiting the Feature Universal Remote
reset button while the desired Settings Menu
setting is displayed on the DIC. System
The feature settings menu will be
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS exited when any of the following See Radio Frequency Statement on
occurs: page 13-15.
This feature allows you to exit the
feature settings menu. . The vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park). Universal Remote System
Press the customization button until
Programming
FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V . The vehicle is no longer in
TO EXIT appears in the DIC display. ON/RUN.
Press the set/reset button once to . The trip/fuel or vehicle
exit the menu. information DIC buttons are
If you do not exit, pressing the pressed.
customization button again will . The end of the feature settings
return you to the beginning of the menu is reached and exited.
feature settings menu. . A 40-second time period has If equipped, these buttons are in the
elapsed with no selection made. overhead console.
This system can replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and
home automation devices. These
instructions refer to a garage door
opener, but can be used for other
devices.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Do not use the Universal Remote Make sure the hand-held transmitter 2. At the same time, press and
system with any garage door opener has a new battery for quicker and hold both the hand-held
that does not have the stop and more accurate transmission of the transmitter button and one of the
reverse feature. This includes any radio-frequency signal. three Universal Remote system
garage door opener model buttons to be used to operate
manufactured before April 1, 1982. Programming the Universal the garage door. Do not release
Remote System either button until the indicator
Read these instructions completely
before programming the Universal For questions or help programming light changes from a slow to a
Remote system. It may help to have the Universal Remote system, call rapid flash. Then release both
another person assist with the 1-800-355-3515 or see buttons.
programming process. www.homelink.com. Some garage door openers may
Keep the original hand-held Programming involves require substitution of Step 2
transmitter for use in other vehicles time-sensitive actions, and may time with the procedure under “Radio
as well as for future programming. out causing the procedure to be Signals for Canada and Some
Erase the programming when repeated. Gate Operators” later in this
vehicle ownership is terminated. section.
To program up to three devices:
See “Erasing Universal Remote 3. Press and hold the newly
System Buttons” later in this 1. Hold the end of the hand-held programmed Universal Remote
section. transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to system button for five seconds
3 in) away from the Universal while watching the indicator light
To program a garage door opener, Remote system buttons with the
park outside directly in line with and and garage door activation.
indicator light in view. The
facing the garage door opener hand-held transmitter was . If the indicator light stays on
receiver. Clear all people and supplied by the manufacturer of continuously or the garage
objects near the garage door. the garage door opener receiver. door moves when the
button is pressed, then

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
programming is complete. 6. Inside the vehicle, press and

There is no need to hold the newly programmed
complete Steps 4–6. Universal Remote system button
. If the indicator light does for two seconds, then release it.
not come on or the garage If the garage door does not
door does not move, a move or the lamp on the garage
second button press may door opener receiver does not
be required. For a second flash, press and hold the same
time, press and hold the button a second time for
Learn or Smart Button two seconds, then release it.
newly programmed button
for five seconds. If the light 4. After completing Steps 1–3, Again, if the door does not move
stays on or the garage door locate the Learn or Smart button or the garage door lamp does
moves, programming is inside the garage on the garage not flash, press and hold the
complete. door opener receiver. The name same button a third time for
and color of the button may vary two seconds, then release it.
. If the indicator light blinks
by manufacturer. The Universal Remote system
rapidly for two seconds,
then changes to a solid light 5. Press and release the Learn or should now activate the
and the garage door does Smart button. Step 6 must be garage door.
not move, continue with completed within 30 seconds of Repeat the process for
programming Steps 4–6. pressing this button. programming the two remaining
buttons.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Radio Signals for Canada and rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under Reprogramming a Single
Some Gate Operators “Programming the Universal Remote Universal Remote System
System” to complete. Button
For questions or programming help,
call 1-800-355-3515 or see To reprogram any of the system
www.homelink.com.
Universal Remote System buttons:
Canadian radio-frequency laws and
Operation
1. Press and hold any one of the
some U.S. gate operators require Using the Universal Remote buttons. Do not release the
transmitter signals to time out or quit System button.
after several seconds of
Press and hold the appropriate 2. The indicator light will begin to
transmission. This may not be long
Universal Remote system button for flash after 20 seconds. Without
enough for the Universal Remote
at least one-half second. The releasing the button, proceed
system to pick up the signal during
indicator light will come on while the with Step 1 under “Programming
programming.
signal is being transmitted. the Universal Remote System.”
If the programming did not work,
replace Step 2 under “Programming Erasing Universal Remote
the Universal Remote System” with System Buttons
the following: Erase all programmed buttons when
Press and hold the Universal vehicle ownership is terminated.
Remote system button while To erase:
pressing and releasing the
hand-held transmitter button every 1. Press and hold the two outside
two seconds until the signal has buttons until the indicator light
been successfully accepted by the begins to flash. This should take
Universal Remote system. The about 10 seconds.
Universal Remote system indicator 2. Release both buttons.
light will flash slowly at first and then

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Lighting Features
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Daytime Running Lamps Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . 6-6
(DRL)/Automatic Headlamp Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3 Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8
Turn and Lane-Change
The exterior lamp control is on the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
instrument panel to the left of the
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
steering wheel.
There are four positions:
O (Off): Briefly turn to this position
to turn the automatic light control off
or on again.
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the
headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with the
other exterior lamps and instrument
panel lights.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
6-2 Lighting
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the Daytime Running Lamps

parking lamps including all lamps, (DRL)/Automatic
except the headlamps.
Headlamp System
5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps together with the parking DRL can make it easier for others to
lamps and instrument panel lights. see the front of your vehicle during
A warning chime sounds if the driver This indicator light turns on in the the day. Fully functional DRL are
door is opened when the ignition instrument cluster when the required on all vehicles first sold in
switch is off and the headlamps high-beam headlamps are on. Canada.
are on. The DRL system makes the
Flash-to-Pass low-beam headlamps come on at a
# (Fog Lamps): If equipped, it
turns the fog lamps on or off. This feature is used to signal to the reduced brightness when the
vehicle ahead that you want following conditions are met:
See Fog Lamps on page 6-4.
to pass. . The ignition is in the ON/RUN
Headlamp High/ If the headlamps are off or in the position.
low-beam position, pull the turn . The exterior lamp control is
Low-Beam Changer signal lever toward you to in AUTO.
2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam momentarily switch to high beams.
Changer): Push the turn signal
. The engine is running.
Release the lever to turn the
lever away from you to turn the high high-beam headlamps off. When the DRL are on, the regular
beams on. headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,
Pull the lever toward you to return to and other lamps will not be on. The
low beams. instrument cluster will also not be lit.
The headlamps automatically
change from DRL to the regular
headlamps depending on the

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Lighting 6-3
darkness of the surroundings. The not operating, these lamps turn off. Hazard Warning Flashers
other lamps that come on with the Move the exterior lamp control to P
headlamps will also come on.
or ; to disable this feature.
When it is bright enough outside,
the headlamps will go off and the Delayed Headlamps
DRL will come on.
Delayed headlamps provide a
When the DRLs are active and a period of exterior lighting as you
turn signal is operated, the DRL on leave the area around the vehicle.
the side the turn signal is activated, This feature is activated when the
will turn off until the turn signal is headlamps are on due to the
turned off. automatic headlamps control feature
The regular headlamp system and when the ignition is turned off.
should be turned on when needed. The headlamps remain on until the
exterior lamp control is moved to the
Do not cover the light sensor on top
parking lamps position or until the | (Hazard Warning Flasher):
of the instrument panel because it
pre-selected delayed headlamp Press this button to make the front
works with the DRL.
lighting period has ended. and rear turn signal lamps flash on
Lights On with Wipers If the ignition is turned off with and off. This warns others that you
If the windshield wipers are the exterior lamp control in the ; are having trouble. Press again to
activated in daylight with the engine turn the flashers off.
or 5 position, the delayed
on, and the exterior lamp control is The turn signals do not work while
headlamps cycle will not occur.
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking the hazard warning flashers are on.
lamps, and other exterior lamps To disable the delayed headlamps
come on. The transition time for the feature or change the time of delay,
lamps coming on varies based on see Vehicle Personalization (With
wiper speed. When the wipers are DIC Buttons) on page 5-42.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
6-4 Lighting
Turn and Lane-Change If after signaling a turn or lane For vehicles with front fog lamps,
change the arrow flashes rapidly or the fog lamp button is on the
Signals does not come on, a signal bulb exterior lamp control to the left of
may be burned out. the steering column.
Have any burned out bulbs Use the fog lamps for better vision
replaced. If a bulb is not burned out, in foggy or misty conditions.
check the fuse. See Fuses and # (Fog Lamps): Press the fog
Circuit Breakers on page 10-29. lamp button to turn the fog lamps on
Turn Signal On Chime or off. A light comes on in the
instrument cluster when the fog
If either one of the turn signals is left lamps are in use. The ignition must
on and the vehicle has been driven be on for the fog lamps to work.
Move the turn signal lever all the more than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime
will sound. When the headlamps are changed
way up or down to signal a turn.
to high beam, the fog lamps turn off.
An arrow on the instrument cluster Fog Lamps The fog lamps come back on again
flashes in the direction of the turn or when the high-beam headlamps are
lane change. turned off.
Raise or lower the lever until the Some localities have laws that
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane require the headlamps to be on
change. Hold it there until the lane along with the fog lamps.
change is completed. If the lever is
briefly pressed and released, the
turn signal flashes three times.
The lever returns to its starting
position whenever it is released.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Lighting 6-5
Interior Lighting counterclockwise to brighten or dim

the lights. Push the knob back in
The lamps can also be turned on
and off by turning the instrument
when finished. panel brightness control clockwise
Instrument Panel to the farthest position.
Illumination Control Courtesy Lamps Dome Lamp Override
The courtesy lamps automatically
come on when a door is opened.
The lamps can also be turned on
manually by fully turning the
instrument panel brightness control
clockwise.
The reading lamps, located on the
headliner above the rearview mirror,
can be turned on or off
independently of the automatic
courtesy lamps, when the doors are
closed.
The instrument panel brightness
knob is located on the instrument
Dome Lamps The dome lamp override button is
next to the exterior lamps control.
panel to the left of the steering The dome lamps are in the
column. overhead console and above the E DOME OFF (Dome Lamp
rear seat passengers. Override): Press the button and
D (Instrument Panel the dome lamps remain off when a
Brightness): Push the knob in all The dome lamps come on when a
door is opened. An indicator light on
the way until it extends out and then door is opened, unless the dome
the button comes on to show that
turn the knob clockwise or lamp override button is pressed in.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
6-6 Lighting
the dome lamps are off. Press the Lighting Features When the ignition is on, illuminated
button again so the dome lamps entry is inactive, which means the
come on when a door is opened. courtesy lamps will not come on
Entry Lighting unless a door is opened.
For vehicles with courtesy lamps,
they come on and stay on for a set Delayed Entry Lighting
time whenever K is pressed on the Delayed entry lighting illuminates
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the interior for a period of time after
transmitter. all the doors have been closed.
If a door is opened, the lamps stay The ignition must be off for delayed
on while it is open and then turn off entry lighting to work. Immediately
automatically about 20 seconds after all the doors have been closed,
after the door is closed. If K is the delayed entry lighting feature
pressed and no door is opened, the continues to work until one of the
lamps turn off after about following occurs:
20 seconds. . The ignition is in ON/RUN.
AMBIENT OFF (If Equipped): Entry lighting includes a feature
Press the button to turn the ambient
. The doors are locked.
called theater dimming. With theater
lights off. Press the button again to dimming, the lamps do not turn off
. An illumination period of about
turn ambient lights on. at the end of the delay time. 25 seconds has elapsed.
Instead, they slowly dim and then If during the illumination period a
Reading Lamps go out. The delay time is canceled if door is opened, the timed
Press the button near each lamp to the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN illumination period is canceled and
turn them on or off. or the power door lock switch is the interior lamps remain on.
pressed. The lamps will dim
right away.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Lighting 6-7
Delayed Exit Lighting Parade Dimming voltage move up or down. This is

normal. If there is a problem, an
Delayed exit lighting illuminates the This feature automatically prohibits alert will be displayed.
interior for a period of time after the the dimming of the instrument panel
key is removed from the ignition. displays in daylight while the The battery can be discharged at
headlamps are on so that the idle if the electrical loads are very
The ignition must be off for delayed high. This is true for all vehicles.
exit lighting to work. When the key displays are still able to be seen.
This is because the generator
is removed, interior illumination (alternator) may not be spinning fast
activates and remains on until one Battery Load enough at idle to produce all of the
of the following occurs: Management power needed for very high
. The ignition is in ON/RUN. The vehicle has Electric Power electrical loads.
. The power door locks are Management (EPM) that estimates A high electrical load occurs when
activated. the battery's temperature and state several of the following are on, such
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage as: headlamps, high beams, rear
. An illumination period of for best performance and extended window defogger, climate control fan
20 seconds has elapsed. life of the battery. at high speed, heated seats, engine
If during the illumination period a When the battery's state of charge cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads
door is opened, the timed is low, the voltage is raised slightly plugged into accessory power
illumination period will be canceled to quickly bring the charge back up. outlets.
and the interior lamps will remain on When the state of charge is high, EPM works to prevent excessive
because a door is open. the voltage is lowered slightly to discharge of the battery. It does this
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle by balancing the generator's output
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage and the vehicle's electrical needs.
display on the Driver Information It can increase engine idle speed to
Center (DIC), you may see the generate more power whenever

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
6-8 Lighting
needed. It can temporarily reduce Battery Power Protection

the power demands of some
accessories. This feature helps prevent the
battery from being drained, if the
Normally, these actions occur in interior courtesy lamps or reading
steps or levels, without being lamps are accidentally left on. If any
noticeable. In rare cases at the of these lamps are left on, they
highest levels of corrective action, automatically turn off after
this action may be noticeable to the 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. The
driver. If so, a DIC message might lamps will not come back on again
be displayed, such as BATTERY until one of the following occurs:
SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
. The ignition is turned on.
VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
If one of these messages displays, it . The exterior lamps control is
is recommended that the driver turned off, then on again.
reduce the electrical loads as much
as possible. See Driver Information The headlamps will time out after
Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on 10 minutes, if they are manually
page 5-24 or Driver Information turned on while the ignition is on
Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons) or off.
on page 5-29.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player (Radio without
Introduction
System Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD Player (Radio with
7-21
Infotainment
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Read the following pages to
Introduction MP3 (Radio without become familiar with the
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 infotainment system featured in this
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 MP3 (Radio with owner manual.
Overview (Radio without Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview (Radio with
7-3 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
{ Warning
Rear Seat Infotainment
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Taking your eyes off the road
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Operation (Radio without for too long or too often while
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 using any infotainment features
Rear Audio
Operation (Radio with can cause a crash resulting in
Controller (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 injury or death. Do not give
Phone extended attention to
Radio Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
AM-FM Radio (Radio without infotainment tasks while
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Settings driving. Focus your attention
AM-FM Radio (Radio with Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 on driving and limit glances to
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 the instrument cluster or center
Satellite Radio (Radio without Trademarks and License stack screens. Use voice
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Agreements guidance whenever possible.
Satellite Radio (Radio with Trademarks and License
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
7-2 Infotainment System
The infotainment system has built-in The vehicle has Retained Theft-Deterrent Feature
features intended to help with this Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
by disabling some functions when the audio system can be played TheftLock® is designed to
driving. A grayed-out function is not even after the ignition is turned off. discourage theft of the vehicle's
available when the vehicle is See Retained Accessory Power radio by learning a portion of the
moving. (RAP) on page 9-19. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
The radio does not operate if it is
All functions are available when the The vehicle has a base radio stolen or moved to a different
vehicle is parked. Before driving: included in this manual. See the vehicle.
. Become familiar with the separate infotainment manual for
infotainment system operation information on the uplevel radios,
and buttons on the faceplate. audio players, phone, navigation
system, and voice or speech
. Set up the audio by presetting recognition. There is also
favorite stations, setting the information on settings and
tone, and adjusting the downloadable applications (if
speakers. equipped).
. Set up phone numbers in
advance so they can be called
easily by pressing a single
button or a single voice
command for vehicles equipped
with phone capability.
See Defensive Driving on page 9-3.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Overview (Radio without Touchscreen) 3. MENU
For information on using the radio, see Operation (Radio without

. Press to open the tone
Touchscreen) on page 7-5 or Operation (Radio with Touchscreen) on menu to adjust the bass,
page 7-8. midrange, treble, fade, and
balance.
4. Buttons 1 - 6
. Saves and selects favorite
stations.
5. EQ (Equalizer)
. Press to adjust the
equalizer.
6. f (Tone/Tune)
. Press to set the bass or
treble.
. Turn to manually select
radio stations.
7. CAT (Category)
. Press to display a list of
SiriusXM® categories.
1. 4 (Information) 2. FAV (Favorites Pages) 8. H (Clock)
. Press to show information
. Press to scroll through the . Press to set the clock.
on the current station or favorite pages.
track.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
9. BAND 13. s REV (Reverse) 16. Auxiliary Input Jack

. Press to scroll through the . Press and hold to go
. Use to connect external
available bands AM, FM, backward fast through a audio devices.
or SiriusXM if equipped. track. 17. Z EJECT
10. © SEEK 14. \ FWD (Forward) . Press to eject the
. Seeks the previous . Press and hold to fast loaded CD.
station. forward through a track.
11. ¨ SEEK 15. CD/AUX
. Seeks the next station. . Press to scroll through
selecting the CD or an
12. P (Power/Volume) auxiliary device.
. Press to turn the
infotainment system on
or off.
. Turn to adjust the volume.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Overview (Radio with Touchscreen) 6. D (Home Page)

The infotainment system is controlled by using the buttons, touch screen, 7. SRCE (Source)
steering wheel controls, and voice recognition. See Operation (Radio 8. FAV (Favorites Menu)
without Touchscreen) on page 7-5 or Operation (Radio with Touchscreen) on
page 7-8. 9. © SEEK (Previous/Reverse)
10. SEEK ¨ (Next/Forward)
11. / BACK
Operation (Radio without

Touchscreen)
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
A lock symbol displays next to the
clock display while the parental
control feature is being used. The
feature remains on until O is
pressed and held for more than
two seconds, or the driver turns the
3. CD Slot ignition off and exits the vehicle.
1. PUSH/O (Volume/Power)
4. AUX Port
2. Z (Eject)
5. PUSH/SEL (Select)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
4 (Information): Press to switch To activate Auto Text: To activate SCV:

the display between the radio 1. Press MENU to display the radio 1. Set the radio volume.
station frequency and the time. setup menu.
When the ignition is in the OFF 2. Press the MENU button to
2. Press the softkey under the display the radio setup menu.
position, press 4 to display the time. AUTO TXT tab on the radio
For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA, 3. Press the softkey under the
display. AUTO VOLUM (automatic
or RDS features, press 4 to display
3. Press the softkey under the ON volume) tab on the radio display.
additional text information related to
tab on the radio display. 4. Press the softkey under the
the current FM-RDS or XM station;
or CD, MP3, or WMA song. If 4 is pressed and the song title or Speed Compensated Volume
If information is available during XM, artist information is longer than what setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High)
CD, MP3, or WMA playback, the can be displayed, the extra to select the level of radio
song title information displays on information will page every volume compensation. Press the
the top line of the display and artist five seconds when Auto Text is softkey located below the BACK
information displays on the bottom activated. tab on the MENU SETUP
line. When information is not display or let the display time out
available, “NO INFO” displays. Speed Compensated Volume after approximately 10 seconds.
(SCV): The Speed Compensated Each higher setting allows for
Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, Volume (SCV) feature automatically more radio volume
CD, MP3, and WMA features): If adjusts the radio volume to compensation at faster vehicle
additional information is available compensate for road and wind noise speeds.
for the current song being played, as the vehicle speeds up or slows
Auto Text will automatically page/ down, so that the volume level is
scroll the information every consistent.
five seconds above the FAV presets
on the radio display.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Setting the Tone (Bass/ To quickly adjust bass, midrange, Adjusting the Speakers
Midrange/Treble) or treble to the middle position, (Balance/Fade)
press the softkey under the BASS,
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, MID, or TREB tab for more than BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To
or Treble): To adjust bass, two seconds. A beep sounds and adjust the balance or fade:
midrange, or treble: the level adjusts to the middle 1. Press f until the speaker control
1. Press f until the tone control position. tabs display.
tabs display. To quickly adjust all tone and
speaker controls to the middle 2. Continue pressing f to highlight
2. Continue pressing f to highlight the tab, or press the softkey
the tab, or press the softkey position, press f for more than under the tab.
under the tab. two seconds until a beep sounds.
3. To adjust the highlighted setting,
3. To adjust the highlighted setting, EQ (Equalization): Press to do one of the following until the
do one of the following until the choose bass and treble equalization levels are obtained:
levels are obtained: settings designed for different types
of music. The choices are pop, rock, . Turn f clockwise or
. Turn f clockwise or country, talk, jazz, and classical. counterclockwise.
counterclockwise. Selecting MANUAL or changing
bass or treble, returns the EQ to the
. Press \ FWD, or s REV.
. Press \ FWD, or s REV. manual bass and treble settings. To quickly adjust balance or fade to
If a station's frequency is weak or if Unique EQ settings can be saved the middle position, press the
there is static, decrease the treble. for each source. softkey under the BAL or FADE tab
for more than two seconds. A beep
If the radio has a Bose® audio sounds and the level adjusts to the
system, the EQ settings are either middle position.
MANUAL or TALK.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
To quickly adjust all speaker and Operation (Radio with SRCE (Source): Press to change
tone controls to the middle position, the audio source to AM, FM,
Touchscreen) SiriusXM® (if equipped), CD, USB,
press f for more than two seconds
until a beep sounds. Infotainment Controls iPod®, or AUX.
FAV (Favorites Menu): In AM, FM,
Radio Messages PUSH/O (Volume/Power):
or SiriusXM, press to display or
Calibration Error: The audio . Press to turn the system on change the current favorite page
system has been calibrated for the and off. number above the preset buttons.
vehicle from the factory. Keep pressing to scroll through the
. Turn to adjust the volume.
If Calibration Error displays, it favorites pages. The stored stations
means that the radio has not been Z (Eject): Press to eject a disc for each list display on the bottom of
configured properly for the vehicle from the CD player. See CD Player the screen. The number of preset
and it must be returned to your (Radio with Touchscreen) on Favorite Pages can be changed by
dealer for service. page 7-23 or CD Player (Radio pressing the Settings button on a
without Touchscreen) on page 7-21. Home Page, then pressing
Locked: This message displays
when the TheftLock® system has AUX Port: 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Favorites Pages, and then selecting
locked up the radio. Take the connection for external audio the number of Favorite Pages.
vehicle to your dealer for service. devices. © SEEK (Previous/Reverse):
If any error occurs repeatedly or if PUSH/SEL (Select): 1. AM, FM, SiriusXM (if equipped):
an error cannot be corrected, . Turn to manually find a station or Press to seek to the previous
contact your dealer. highlight a menu selection. strong station. Press and hold
for Scan. Press © again to stop
. Press to select a highlighted
selection. the scan.
D (Home Page): Press to go to 2. CD, USB: Press to seek to the

the Home Page. See “Home Page” beginning of the current or
in this section. previous track.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
3. CD, USB: Press and hold to Touchscreen Buttons Home: From any page, press to
quickly reverse through a track. cycle through the Home Pages to
Touchscreen buttons show visibly
Release the button to return to start a different application. The
on the screen when available. When
playing speed. See CD Player Home Page can have up to three
a function is unavailable, the button
(Radio with Touchscreen) on pages with eight icons per page .
may gray-out. When a function is
page 7-23 or CD Player (Radio Each of these three pages can be
selected, the button may highlight,
without Touchscreen) on customized to contain your choice
or animate.
page 7-21 and Auxiliary Devices of up to eight per screen. They may
on page 7-34. Home Page also be re-ordered on each screen
to taste.
SEEK ¨ (Next/Forward):
FAV (Favorites): Press to display
1. AM, FM, SiriusXM (if equipped): the favorite list or add a favorite.
Press to seek to the next strong
station. Press and hold for Scan. g (Voice Recognition): Press to
begin voice recognition. See
Press ¨ again to stop the scan.
Bluetooth on page 7-37.
2. CD, USB: Press to seek or skip Menu: Press to enter the Home
the next track or program. Page menu.
3. CD, USB: Press and hold to fast
forward through a track. Release More r : Press to go to the next
The infotainment system displays a
the button to return to playing Home Page to access all of the Home Page.
speed. See CD Player (Radio applications. The current selected Home Page Features
with Touchscreen) on page 7-23 source is framed with a red box
or CD Player (Radio without outline. Some features are disabled when
Touchscreen) on page 7-21 and the vehicle is moving and some
Back: Press to go back to the icons may not be active.
Auxiliary Devices on page 7-34.
previous page or menu.
/ BACK: Press to return to the
previous screen in a menu.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/27/13
Now Playing: Press to display the Tone : Press to display the Tone
. Fade: Press F for more sound
active source page. The sources Settings menu. The following may from the front speakers or R for
available are AM, FM, XM (if display: more sound from the rear
equipped), CD, USB, Bluetooth, speakers. The middle position
Tone Settings: Press to adjust the balances the sound between the
or AUX Input. tone settings. The following may front and rear speakers.
} (Navigation): Press to display display:
the OnStar® Turn-by-Turn DSP Mode: Press o or p to adjust
Navigation (if equipped). See
. EQ: Press o or p to adjust the the DSP mode (if equipped).
"OnStar" if equipped. equalizer.
. Bass: Press + or − to adjust Language
5 (Phone): Press to display the
Phone main page. See Bluetooth on the bass. To change the language of the
page 7-37. . Middle: Press + or − to adjust screens. See Vehicle
the middle. Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
Settings: Press to display the on page 5-42.
Settings menu. See Settings on . Treble: Press + or − to adjust the
page 7-44. treble. English or Metric Units
. Balance: Press L to hear more To change the screens from English
sound from the left speakers or or metric. See Driver Information
R for more sound from the right Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
speakers. The middle position page 5-24 or Driver Information
balances the sound between the Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
left and right speakers. on page 5-29.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Radio © SEEK and ¨ SEEK: Press to go tabs and by using the radio favorites
to the previous or next station and page button (FAV button). Press to
stay there. go through up to six pages of
AM-FM Radio (Radio favorites, each having six favorite
without Touchscreen) To scan stations, press and hold © stations available per page. Each
or ¨ until a beep sounds. The radio page of favorites can contain any
Radio Data System (RDS) combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM
goes to a station, plays for a few
The RDS feature is available for use seconds, then goes to the next stations.
only on FM stations that broadcast station. Press either arrow again to The balance/fade and tone settings
RDS information. This system relies stop scanning. that were previously adjusted are
upon receiving specific information stored with the favorite stations.
The radio only seeks and scans
from these stations and only works
stations with a strong signal that are To store a station as a favorite:
when the information is available.
in the selected band.
While the radio is tuned to an 1. Tune to the desired radio station.
FM-RDS station, the station name Storing a Radio Station as a
or call letters display. In rare cases, 2. Press FAV to display the page to
Favorite store the station.
a radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the Drivers are encouraged to set up 3. Press and hold one of the
radio features to work improperly. their radio station favorites while the six softkeys until a beep sounds.
If this happens, contact the radio vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to When that softkey is pressed
station. favorite stations using the presets, and released, the station that
favorites button, and steering wheel was set returns.
Finding a Station controls. See Steering Wheel
Controls on page 5-2. 4. Repeat the steps for each radio
BAND: Press to switch between station to be stored as a favorite.
AM, FM, or SiriusXM®. The FAV (Favorites): A maximum of
selection displays. 36 stations can be programmed as
f (Tune): Turn to select radio favorites using the six softkeys
stations. below the radio station frequency

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
To set up the number of favorites

. Turn to increase or decrease the To adjust the settings:
pages: volume of the active source. . Bass: Press + or − to change
1. Press MENU to display the radio The steering wheel controls can the level.
setup menu. also be used to adjust the volume.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
. Middle: Press + or − to change
2. Press the softkey below the page 5-2. the level.
FAV 1-6 tab. . Treble: Press + or − to change
Audio Source
3. Select the desired number of the level.
favorites pages by pressing the To access AM, FM, or SiriusXM® if
softkey below the displayed equipped, do one of the following:
. EQ: Press o or p to scroll
page numbers. through the preset EQ options.
. Press the AM, FM, or XM (if
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time equipped) screen button. . DSP Mode: Press o or p to
out, to return to the original main . Press the SRCE radio button to scroll through the preset DSP
radio screen showing the radio scroll through the options. modes.
station frequency tabs and to A source ribbon will appear at . Fade: Press the F or R button
begin the process of the bottom of the screen for more sound from the front or
programming favorites for the allowing you to select the one rear speakers. The middle
chosen number of favorites you want. position balances the sound
pages.
between the front and rear
Infotainment System Settings speakers.
AM-FM Radio (Radio with Tone Settings . Balance: Press the L or R button
Touchscreen) To access the tone settings, press for more sound from the left or
Playing the Radio the Tone Settings button on the right speakers. The middle
Home Page. position balances the sound
PUSH/O (Power/Volume): between the left and right
speakers.
. Press to turn the radio on or off.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Finding a Station To access the AM menu press the HD Enable/Disable: Press to turn
Menu screen button and the the HD Radio receiver on or off.
Press SRCE to select AM, FM,
following may display: This feature is not available in
or SiriusXM (if equipped).
SiriusXM if equipped.
Turn the PUSH/SEL knob to find a
radio station. To select a preset FM
station, press FAV to scroll through
the favorite pages and then press a
preset button on the radio or the
screen button.
Seeking a Station
Press © SEEK or SEEK ¨ to search
for a station. You may also use the
¨ on the steering wheel Favorites List: Press to display the
control (SWC). AM favorites list.
To access the FM Menu press the
AM Station List: Press to display a Menu screen button and the
AM
list of AM stations. following may display:
Update Station List: Press to
display the list of AM stations. Press
refresh to update the list.
Tag Song: Press to tag a song to
download to an iPod when it is
connected to be purchased at a
later time.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Favorites List: Press to display the To access the XM Menu press the
. Song: Press to set an audio alert
FM favorites list. Menu screen button and the when the current song is playing
following may display: on a SiriusXM channel.
FM Station List: Press to display a
list of FM stations.
. Tune Select Manager: Press
Disable/Enable All Alerts to
FM Category List: Press to display enable or disable all alerts.
a list of FM categories. A checkmark next to the alert
Update Station List: Press to means it is turned on. Press an
display the list of FM stations. Press alert to turn it off. Press Delete
refresh to update the list. to delete an alert.
Tag Song: Press to tag a song to . Audible Alert: This feature will
download to an iPod when it is give an audio alert when certain
connected to be purchased at a artists or songs are available on
later time. Favorites List: Press to display the a specific station. Press to turn
SiriusXM favorites list. on or off.
HD Enable/Disable: Press to turn
the HD Radio receiver on or off. XM Channel List: Press to display Storing Radio Station Presets
SiriusXM (If Equipped) a list of SiriusXM channels. Up to 30 preset stations can be
XM Category List: Press to display stored. AM, FM, and SiriusXM (if
a list of SiriusXM categories. equipped) can be mixed.
Tune Select: If equipped with 1. From the AM, FM, or SiriusXM
SiriusXM, press and the following main page, press and hold any
may display: 1−5 buttons or one of the preset
screen buttons at the bottom of
. Artist: Press to set an audio alert
the screen. After a few seconds,
when the current artist is playing
on a SiriusXM channel.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
a beep is heard and the new Recalling a Preset Station A service fee is required to receive
preset information displays on To recall a preset station from a the SiriusXM service. If SiriusXM
that screen button. favorites page, do one the following: Service needs to be reactivated, the
2. Repeat for each preset. radio will display “No Subscription
. Press the FAV screen button at Please Renew” on channel XM1.
Mixed-Band Presets the top bar to display the preset For more information, contact
pop-up. Press one of the preset SiriusXM at www.siriusxm.com or
Each favorite page can store screen buttons to go to the 1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and
five preset stations. The presets selected preset station. www.xmradio.ca or call
within a page can be from different
. In the AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
radio bands.
equipped) main page, press one Finding a Station
To scroll through the pages, press of the preset screen buttons to
FAV or the FAV screen button on the go to the selected preset station. BAND: Press to switch between
top bar. The current page number AM, FM, or SiriusXM. The selection
displays above the preset buttons. displays.
The stored stations for each favorite
Satellite Radio (Radio
page display on the preset buttons. without Touchscreen) f (Tune): Turn to select radio
stations.
To change the number of favorite SiriusXM® Satellite Radio © SEEK and ¨ SEEK: Press to go
pages displayed: Service to the previous or next station and
1. Press Settings on the SiriusXM is a satellite radio service stay there.
Home Page. based in the 48 contiguous United
States and 10 Canadian provinces. To scan stations, press and hold ©
2. Press Favorite Pages.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a wide or ¨ until a beep sounds. The radio
3. Select the number of pages to variety of programming and goes to a station, plays for a few
display. commercial-free music, coast to seconds, then goes to the next
coast, and in digital-quality sound. station. Press either arrow again to
stop scanning.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The radio only seeks and scans 5. To go to the next or previous 4. Press the softkey under the
stations with a strong signal that are SiriusXM station within the Remove tab until the category
in the selected band. selected category, do one of the name along with the word
following: Removed displays.
Finding a Category (CAT)
Station . Turn f. 5. Repeat the steps to remove
more categories.
CAT (Category): The CAT button is . Press the buttons below the
used to find SiriusXM stations when right or left arrows on the Removed categories can be
the radio is in the XM mode. To find display. restored by pressing the softkey
SiriusXM channels within a desired under the Add tab when a removed
. Press either SEEK arrow. category is displayed or by pressing
category:
6. To exit the category search the softkey under the Restore
1. Press BAND until the SiriusXM mode, press the FAV button or All tab.
frequency displays. BAND button to display the Categories cannot be removed or
2. Press CAT to display the favorites again. added while the vehicle is moving
category tabs. Undesired SiriusXM categories can faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
3. Continue pressing CAT until the be removed through the setup
Storing a Radio Station as a
desired category name displays. menu. To remove an undesired
category, perform the following: Favorite
. Radios with CD and DVD
can also navigate the 1. Press MENU to display the radio Drivers are encouraged to set up
setup menu. their radio station favorites while the
category list by pressing s vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to
REV or \ FWD. 2. Press the softkey below the XM favorite stations using the presets,
CAT tab. favorites button, and steering wheel
4. Press either of the two buttons
controls. See Steering Wheel
below the desired category tab 3. Turn f to display the category to
to immediately tune to the first Controls on page 5-2.
be removed.
SiriusXM station associated with
that category.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of To set up the number of favorites XM Updating: The encryption code
36 stations can be programmed as pages: in the receiver is being updated, and
favorites using the six softkeys 1. Press MENU to display the radio no action is required. This process
below the radio station frequency setup menu. should take no longer than
tabs and by using the radio favorites 30 seconds.
page button (FAV button). Press to 2. Press the softkey below the
FAV 1-6 tab. No XM Signal: The system is
go through up to six pages of functioning correctly, but the vehicle
favorites, each having six favorite 3. Select the desired number of is in a location that is blocking the
stations available per page. Each favorites pages by pressing the SiriusXM signal. When the vehicle is
page of favorites can contain any softkey below the displayed moved into an open area, the signal
combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM page numbers. should return.
stations.
4. Press FAV, or let the menu time Loading XM: The audio system is
The balance/fade and tone settings out, to return to the original main acquiring and processing audio and
that were previously adjusted are radio screen showing the radio text data. No action is needed. This
stored with the favorite stations. station frequency tabs and to message should disappear shortly.
To store a station as a favorite: begin the process of
programming favorites for the Channel Off Air: This channel is
1. Tune to the desired radio station. chosen number of favorites not currently in service. Tune in to
2. Press FAV to display the page to pages. another channel.
store the station. Channel Unauth: This channel is
SiriusXM Radio Messages blocked or cannot be received with
3. Press and hold one of the
six softkeys until a beep sounds. XL (Explicit Language your SiriusXM subscription package.
When that softkey is pressed Channels): These channels, or any Channel Unavail: This previously
and released, the station that others, can be blocked at a assigned channel is no longer
was set returns. customer's request, by calling assigned. Tune to another station.
1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and
4. Repeat the steps for each radio 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
station to be stored as a favorite.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
If this station was one of the 1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and Check XM Receivr: If this
presets, choose another station for www.xmradio.ca or call message does not clear within a
that preset button. 1-877-209-0079 (Canada). short period of time, the receiver
No Artist Info: No artist CAT Not Found: There are no could have a fault. Consult with your
information is available at this time channels available for the selected dealer.
on this channel. The system is category. The system is working XM Not Available: If this message
working properly. properly. does not clear within a short period
No Title Info: No song title XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver of time, the receiver could have a
information is available at this time in the vehicle could have previously fault. Consult with your dealer.
on this channel. The system is been in another vehicle. For security
working properly. purposes, XM receivers cannot be Satellite Radio (Radio
No CAT Info: No category swapped between vehicles. If this with Touchscreen)
information is available at this time message is received after having
the vehicle serviced, check with Satellite Radio
on this channel. The system is
working properly. your dealer. Vehicles with a valid SiriusXM®
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, satellite radio subscription can
No Information: No text or receive SiriusXM programming.
informational messages are this message alternates with the XM
available at this time on this Radio eight-digit radio ID label. This SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
channel. The system is working label is needed to activate the variety of programming and
properly. service. commercial-free music, coast to
Unknown: If this message is coast, and in digital-quality sound.
No Subscription Please Renew: For more information, see
SiriusXM subscription needs to be received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault. www.siriusxm.com or call
reactivated. Contact SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.) and
www.siriusxm.com or Consult with your dealer.
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
When SiriusXM is active, the station 3. Select or deselect a category. No Title Info: No song title
name, number, category name, A checkmark will indicate that information is available at this time
song title, and artist display on the the category is selected. on this station.
screen. SiriusXM may update the No CAT Info: No category
background picture at any time. SiriusXM Messages
information is available at this time
XL (Explicit Language on this station.
SiriusXM Categories Channels): These stations, or any
SiriusXM stations are organized in others, can be blocked by request, No Information: No text or
categories. by calling 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), informational messages are
and 1-877-209-0079 (Canada). available at this time on this station.
Adding or Removing SiriusXM
XM Updating: The encryption code No XM Signal: The vehicle may be
Categories in a location where the SiriusXM
in the receiver is being updated. No
Using the home page: action is required. signal is being blocked. When the
1. Press the Settings screen button vehicle is moved into an open area,
Loading XM: The audio system is the signal should return.
on the Home Page. acquiring and processing audio and
2. Select XM Categories. text data. No action is needed. CAT Not Found: There are no
stations available for the selected
3. Select or deselect a category. Channel Off Air: This station is not category.
A checkmark will indicate that currently in service.
the category is selected. XM Radio ID: If tuned to station 0,
Channel Unauth: This station is this message alternates with the
Press “Show All XM Categories” to blocked or cannot be received. SiriusXM radio eight-digit radio ID
restore all SiriusXM categories. Channel Unavailable: This label. This label is needed to
Using the XM playing screen: previously assigned station is no activate the service.
longer assigned. Unknown: If this message is
1. Press the Menu screen button.
No Artist Info: No artist received when tuned to station 0,
2. Select XM Categories. information is available at this time there could be a receiver fault.
on this station. Consult with your dealer.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
XM Not Available: If this message AM Cell Phone Usage

does not clear within a short period
The range for most AM stations is Cell phone usage, such as making
of time, the receiver could have a
greater than for FM, especially at or receiving phone calls, charging,
fault. Consult with your dealer.
night. The longer range can cause or just having the phone on may
station frequencies to interfere with cause static interference in the
Radio Reception each other. Static can also occur radio. Unplug the phone or turn it off
Frequency interference and static when things like storms and power if this happens.
can occur during normal radio lines interfere with radio reception.
reception if items such as phone When this happens, try reducing the Multi-Band Antenna
chargers, vehicle convenience treble on the radio.
The multi-band antenna is located
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio on the roof of the vehicle. This type
Service of antenna is used with the AM/FM
accessory power outlet. If there is
radio, as well as OnStar and the
interference or static, unplug the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
item from the accessory power provides digital radio reception. Tall System, if the vehicle has these
outlet. buildings or hills can interfere with features. Keep this antenna clear of
satellite radio signals, causing the snow and ice build up for clear radio
FM sound to fade in and out. In reception. If the vehicle has a
FM signals only reach about 16 to addition, traveling or standing under sunroof, the performance of the
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the heavy foliage, bridges, garages, radio system may be affected if the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit or tunnels may cause loss of the sunroof is open. Loading items onto
that automatically works to reduce SiriusXM signal for a period of time. the roof of the vehicle can interfere
interference, some static can occur, with the performance of the radio
especially around tall buildings or system and, if the vehicle has this
hills, causing the sound to fade in feature, OnStar. Make sure the
and out. multi-band antenna is not
obstructed.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Audio Players 10 seconds on the CD have played. BAND: Press to listen to the radio
Press ¨ SEEK to go to the next when a CD is playing. The CD
track. remains inside the radio for future
CD Player (Radio without listening.
Touchscreen) If either arrow is held, or pressed
multiple times, the player continues CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
Playing a CD moving backward or forward select between CD, or Auxiliary.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, through the tracks on the CD. . When a CD is in the player, the
label side up. The player pulls it in s REV (Fast Reverse): Press CD icon and a message
and the CD should begin playing. and hold to reverse playback quickly showing the disc and/or track
within a track. Sound will be heard number display.
Z EJECT: Press and release to
at a reduced volume. Release to
eject the disc that is currently
. If an auxiliary input device is not
playing. A beep sounds and resume playing the track. The connected, “No Input Device
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the elapsed time of the track displays. Found” displays.
disc is ejected, Remove Disc \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Care of CDs
displays. The disc can be removed. and hold to advance playback
If the disc is not removed, after quickly within a track. Sound will be If playing a CD-R, the sound quality
several seconds, the disc heard at a reduced volume. Release can be reduced due to CD-R or
automatically pulls back into the to resume playing the track. The CD-RW quality, the method of
player. elapsed time of the track displays. recording, the quality of the music
that has been recorded, and the
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on RDM (Random): CD tracks can be way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
the CD that is currently playing. listened to in random, rather than handled. Handle them carefully.
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Press © sequential order with the random Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their
SEEK to go to the start of the setting. To use random, press the original cases or other protective
current track, if more than softkey under the RDM label until cases and away from direct sunlight
Random Current Disc displays. and dust. The CD player scans the
Press the softkey again to turn off bottom surface of the disc. If the
random play.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
surface of a CD is damaged, such on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R

as cracked, broken, or scratched, { Caution or CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radio
the CD does not play properly or not with Touchscreen) on page 7-30 or
at all. Do not touch the bottom side If a label is added to a CD, more MP3 (Radio without Touchscreen)
of a CD while handling it; this could than one CD is inserted into the on page 7-25.
damage the surface. Pick up CDs slot at a time, or an attempt is
by grasping the outer edges or the made to play scratched or CD Messages
edge of the hole and the outer edge. damaged CDs, the CD player Check Disc: Radios with a single
could be damaged. While using CD player display Check Disc and/
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take
the CD player, use only CDs in or eject the CD if an error occurs.
a soft, lint-free cloth or dampen a
good condition without any label,
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral Optical Error: The disc was
detergent solution mixed with water, load one CD at a time, and keep
inserted upside down.
and clean it. Make sure the wiping the CD player and the loading slot
free of foreign materials, liquids, Disk Read Error: A disc was
process starts from the center to
and debris. inserted with an invalid or unknown
the edge.
format.
Care of the CD Player Player Error: There are disc LOAD
If an error displays, see “CD
Do not add any label to a CD; it Messages” later in this section. or disc EJECT problems.
could get caught in the CD player. . It is very hot. When the
If a CD is recorded on a personal Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
temperature returns to normal,
computer and a description label is CD-RW Disc the CD should play.
needed, try labeling the top of the The radio has the capability of
recorded CD with a marking pen. . The road is very rough. When
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or the road becomes smoother, the
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD-RW disc. For more information CD should play.
CDs is not advised.
. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. The air is very humid. If so, wait The system is capable of playing: To avoid damage to the CD player:
about an hour and try again. . Most audio CDs . Do not use scratched or
. There was a problem while . CD-R damaged discs.
burning the CD.
. CD-RW
. Do not apply labels to discs. The
. The label is caught in the CD labels could get caught in the
player. . MP3 or unprotected WMA player.
If the CD is not playing correctly for formats . Insert only one disc at a time.
any other reason, try a known When playing any compatible
good CD. recordable disc, the sound quality
. Keep the loading slot free of
can be reduced due to disc quality, foreign materials, liquids, and
If any error occurs repeatedly or if debris.
an error cannot be corrected, the method of recording, the quality
contact your dealer. If the radio of the music that has been . Use a marking pen to label the
displays an error message, write it recorded, or the way the disc has top of the disc.
down and provide it to your dealer been handled.
Loading and Ejecting Discs
when reporting the problem. There can be increased skipping,
difficulty in recording tracks, To load a disc:
CD Player (Radio with difficulty in finding tracks, and/or 1. Turn the vehicle on.
Touchscreen) difficulty in loading and ejecting.
2. Insert a disc into the slot, label
If these problems occur, check the
The player can be used for CD, side up. The player pulls it in the
disc for damage or try a known
MP3 audio, and Video. rest of the way. If the disc is
good disc.
damaged or improperly loaded,
With the vehicle on, insert a disc there is an error and the disc
into the slot, label side up. The ejects.
player pulls it in and begins playing.
The disc automatically plays once
loaded.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. The disc is very hot. Try the disc
Press Z to eject a disc from the less than eight seconds, it seeks
to the previous track. If longer again when the temperature
CD player. If the disc is not removed
than eight seconds, the current returns to normal.
within a short period of time, it is
automatically pulled back into the track starts from the beginning. . The road is very rough. Try the
player. . Press and hold to fast reverse disc again when the road is
through a track. Release the smoother.
Playing an Audio CD button to return to playing . The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
1. Press the Disc screen button on speed. Elapsed time displays. or upside down.
the Home Page or select
the disc. SEEK ¨: . The air is very humid. Try the
disc again later.
2. From the Discscreen, press the
. Press to seek to the next track.
Menu screen button to display
. There was a problem while
. Press and hold to fast forward
the menu options. burning the disc.
through a track. Release the
3. Press to select the desired button to return to playing . The label is caught in the player.
option. speed. Elapsed time displays. If the CD is not playing correctly, for
On the Disc main page a track PUSH/SEL (Select): Turn to the any other reason, try a known
number displays at the beginning of right or left to select the next or good CD.
each track. Song, Artist, elapsed previous track. If any error continues, contact your
time, and Album information Error Messages dealer.
displays when available.
If Disc Error displays and/or the disc
Use the following controls to play comes out, it could be for one of the
the disc: following reasons:
© SEEK: . The disc has an invalid or
. Press to seek to the beginning of unknown format.
the current or previous track.
If the track has been playing for

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file
MP3 (Radio without plays both file formats in the order in
extension.
which they were recorded to
Touchscreen) the disc. . AAC files stored on an iPod.
Format CD-R or CD-RW Supported File . FAT16
Radios that have the capability of and Folder Structure . FAT32
playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma The radio supports:
files that were recorded onto a Root Directory
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can
. Up to 50 folders.
The root directory of the disc is
be recorded with the following fixed . Up to eight folders in depth. treated as a folder. If the root
bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, directory has compressed audio
. Up to 15 playlists.
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, files, the directory displays on the
112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, . Up to 512 files and folders. radio as the CD label.
192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
320 kbps or a variable bit rate. If a disc contains both
extension. uncompressed CD audio and MP3/
Radios that have a USB port can . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda WMA files, a folder under the root
play .mp3 and .wma files stored on a file extension. directory called CD accesses all of
USB storage device as well as AAC the CD audio tracks on the disc.
files that are stored on an iPod. USB Supported File and Folder
Structure Empty Folder
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode
Discs The radio supports: Folders that do not contain files are
skipped, and the player advances to
The radio can play discs that . Up to 700 folders.
the next folder that contains files.
contain both uncompressed CD . Up to eight folders in depth.
audio and MP3/WMA files. If both Order of Play
formats are on the disc, the radio
. Up to 65,535 files.
Compressed audio files are
. Folder and file names up to accessed in the following order:
64 bytes. . Playlists (Px).

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. Files stored in the root directory. File System and Naming Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3
. Files stored in folders in the root The song name that displays is the f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA
directory. song name contained in the ID3 tag. files.
Tracks are played in the following If the song name is not present in
the ID3 tag, the radio displays the
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
order: the track, if more than 10 seconds
file name without the extension
. Play begins from the first track in have played. Press and hold or
(such as .mp3) as the track name.
the first playlist and continues press multiple times to continue
sequentially through all tracks in Track names longer than 32 moving backward through tracks.
each playlist. When the last characters or four pages are
shortened. Parts of words on the
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
track of the last playlist has track. Press and hold or press
played, play continues from the last page of text and the extension
multiple times to continue moving
first track of the first playlist. of the filename do not display.
forward through tracks.
. Play begins from the first track in Preprogrammed Playlists s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
the first folder and continues Preprogrammed playlists that were to reverse playback quickly. Sound
sequentially through all tracks in created using WinAmp®, is heard at a reduced volume and
each folder. When the last track MusicMatch®, or RealPlayer® the elapsed time of the file displays.
of the last folder has played,
play continues from the first
software can be accessed; however, Release s REV to resume playing.
they cannot be edited using the
track of the first folder. radio. These playlists are treated as \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
When play enters a new folder, the special folders containing and hold to advance playback
display does not automatically show compressed audio song files. quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
the new folder name unless the volume and the elapsed time of the
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
folder mode has been chosen as file displays. Release \ FWD to
file extension and are stored on a
the default display. The new track USB device may be supported by resume playing. The elapsed time of
name displays. the radio with a USB port. the file displays.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
S c (Previous Folder): Press When the scan is finished, the disc The album name displays on the
begins playing files in order by second line between the arrows and
the softkey below S c to go to the
artist. The current artist playing is songs from the current album
first track in the previous folder.
shown on the second line of the begins to play. Once all songs from
c T (Next Folder): Press the display. Once all songs by that artist that album have played, the player
softkey below c T to go to the first are played, the player moves to the moves to the next album in
track in the next folder. next artist in alphabetical order and alphabetical order on the CD and
begins playing files by that artist. begins playing MP3 files from that
RDM (Random): Files on the disc album.
can be listened to in random, rather To listen to files by another artist,
than sequential order. To use press the softkey below either arrow To exit music navigator mode, press
random, press the softkey under the tab. The disc goes to the next or the softkey below the Back tab to
RDM tab until Random Current Disc previous artist in alphabetical order. return to normal MP3 playback.
displays to play songs in random Continue pressing either softkey
below the arrow tab until the artist Connecting a USB Storage
order. Press the same softkey again
displays. Device or iPod®
to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Press the To change from playback by artist to
playback by album:
softkey below h to play files in
order by artist or album. 1. Press the softkey below the Sort
By tab.
The player scans the disc to sort the
files by artist and album ID3 tag 2. Press one of the softkeys below
information. It can take several the Album tab from the sort
minutes to scan the disc depending screen.
on the number of files on the disc. 3. Press the softkey below the
The radio may begin playing while it Back tab to return to the main
is scanning in the background. music navigator screen.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
To connect a USB storage device, automatically powers off and will not ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
connect the device to the USB port charge or draw power from the track. Press and hold or press
located in the instrument panel vehicle's battery. multiple times to continue moving
storage area. See Instrument Panel If you have an older iPod model that forward through tracks.
Storage on page 4-1 for more
information.
is not supported, it can still be used s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
by connecting it to the Auxiliary to reverse playback quickly. Sound
The USB port can be used to Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm is heard at a reduced volume.
control an iPod or a USB storage (1/8 in) stereo cable. See Clock
Release s REV to resume playing.
device. (Radio with Touchscreen) on
The elapsed time of the file
To connect an iPod, connect one page 5-7 or Clock (Radio without
displays.
end of the USB cable that came Touchscreen) on page 5-7 for more
with the iPod to the iPod’s dock information. \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback
connector and connect the other Using the Radio to Control a quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
end to the USB port located in the USB Storage Device or iPod
instrument panel storage area. If the volume. Release \ FWD to
vehicle is on and the USB The radio can control a USB resume playing. The elapsed time of
connection works, “OK to storage device or an iPod using the the file displays.
disconnect” and a GM logo may radio buttons and knobs and display
song information on the radio’s
4 (Information): Press to display
appear on the iPod, and iPod additional information about the
appears on the radio's display. The display.
selected track.
iPod music appears on the radio’s f (Tune): Turn to select files.
display and begins playing.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of
The iPod charges while it is the track, if more than 10 seconds
connected to the vehicle if the have played. Press and hold or
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY press multiple times to continue
or ON/RUN position. When the moving backward through tracks.
vehicle is turned off, the iPod

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. Third softkey, 5% through the list
Using Softkeys to Control a c (Folder View): Press the each time the softkey is pressed.
USB Storage Device or iPod softkey below c to view the
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
The five softkeys below the radio contents of the current folder on the
display are used to control the USB drive. To browse and select list each time the softkey is
functions listed below. files: pressed.
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
To use the softkeys: 1. Press the softkey below c.
1. Press the first or fifth softkey h (Music Navigator): Press the
2. Turn f to scroll through the list softkey below h to view and
below the radio display to
of folders. select a file on an iPod, using the
display the functions listed
below, or press the softkey 3. Press f to select the folder. iPod's menu system. Files are
below the function if it is If there is more than one folder, sorted by:
currently displayed. repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the . Playlists
2. Press the softkey below the tab folder is reached. . Artists
with the function on it to use that 4. Turn f to scroll through the files
function.
. Albums
in the selected folder.
j (Pause): Press the softkey below . Genres
j to pause the track. The tab 5. Press f to select the file to be . Songs
appears raised when pause is being played.
. Composers
used. Press the softkey below j To skip through large lists, the five
again to resume playback. softkeys can be used to navigate in To select files:
the following order: 1. Press the softkey below h.
Back: Press the softkey below the
Back tab to go back to the main . First softkey, first item in the list.
display screen on an iPod, or the 2. Turn f to scroll through the list
. Second softkey, 1% through the of menus.
root directory on a USB storage list each time the softkey is
device. pressed. 3. Press f to select the menu.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
4. Turn f to scroll through the " (Repeat All): Press the softkey C (Shuffle Album): Shuffles all
folders or files in the below " to repeat all tracks. The songs in the current album on
selected menu. tab appears lowered when Repeat an iPod.
5. Press f to select the file to be All is being used. This is the default = (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all
mode when a USB storage device songs in the current folder on a USB
played.
or iPod is first connected. storage device.
To skip through large lists, the five
softkeys can be used to navigate in
' (Repeat Track): Press the
softkey below ' to repeat one MP3 (Radio with
the following order:
track. The tab appears raised when Touchscreen)
. First softkey, first item in the list. Repeat Track is being used.
. Second softkey, 1% through the
Playing an MP3 CD
Shuffle Functionality
list each time the softkey is To play an MP3 CD, follow the same
pressed. To use Shuffle: instructions as “Playing an
Audio CD.”
. Third softkey, 5% through the list Press the softkey below >, 2,
each time the softkey is pressed. C , or = to select between The following guidelines must be
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ met when creating an MP3 disc,
list each time the softkey is Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album, otherwise the CD might not play:
pressed. or Shuffle Folder. . Sampling rate: 16 kHz,
> (Shuffle Off): This is the 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
default mode when a USB storage 44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
Repeat Functionality device or iPod is first connected. . Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,
To use Repeat: 2 (Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,
Songs): Shuffles all songs on the 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,
Press the softkey below " or ' and 320 kbps.
USB storage device or iPod.
to select between Repeat All and
Repeat Track.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. Maximum number of folders: by the artist. There might be a delay
eight folders with 255 files per before the list displays. Select a
folder. song from the list to begin playback.
. Maximum of 1,000 files on Genres: Press to view the genres.
a disc. Select a genre to view a list of all
. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW songs of that genre. Select a song
with a maximum capacity of from the list to begin playback.
700 MB. Albums: Press to view the albums
. The Artist/Album/Song Titles/ Press any of the following buttons on the disc. Select the album to
Genre information requires a CD on the CD Audio Menu: view a list of all songs on the album.
to be fully scanned before the There might be a delay before the
music navigator works with Folders: Press to view the folders list displays. Select a song from the
these menus. stored on the disc. Select a folder to list to begin playback.
view the list of all songs in that
MP3 Audio folder. There might be a delay Composers: Press to view the
before the list displays. Select a Composers stored on the disc.
song from the list to begin playback. There might be a delay before the
list displays. The Composers menu
Playlists: Press to view the displays. Select a composer to
playlists stored on the disc. Select a display a list of albums from the
playlist to view the list of all songs in composer.
that playlist. There might be a delay
before the list displays. Select a Tracks (Song Titles): Press to
song from the list to begin playback. display a list of all songs on the
disc. Songs are displayed as stored
Artists: Press to view the list of on the disc. There might be a delay
Press the Menu screen button while artists stored on the disc. Select an before the list displays. To begin
that source is active to access the artist name to view a list of all songs playback, select a song from the list.
CD Audio Menu.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Root Directory present in the ID3 tag, the radio

The root directory is treated as a displays the file name as the
folder. All files contained directly track name.
under the root directory are Preprogrammed Playlists
accessed prior to any root directory
folders. The radio recognizes
preprogrammed playlists; however,
Empty Folders there is no editing capability. These
If a root directory or folder is empty playlists are treated as special
or contains only folders, the player folders containing compressed Press one of the options from the
advances to the next folder in the audio song files. Root Folder to display other folders
file structure that contains a Music Navigator of that option type. Keep pressing to
compressed audio file. The empty display each screen until all levels
folder(s) are not displayed or Folders have been reached. The last level
numbered. usually contains the desired song
to play.
No Folder
Playlists
When the CD only contains
compressed audio files without any
folders or playlists, all files are
under the root folder.
File System and Naming
The song titles, artists, albums, and
genres are taken from the file's ID3 The folder structure can support up
tag and are only displayed if present to five levels of depth. The folders
in the tag. If a song title is not and then songs will display in
alphabetical order.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Press the Playlist screen button Press the Artist screen button Select an album from the Albums
displayed on the Root Folder menu. displayed on the Root Folder menu. menu to display a list of songs.
The Playlist menu displays. The Artist menu displays. Select a song for playback.
Genres
Press the Genre screen button
displayed on the Root Folder menu.
The Genre menu displays.
Follow the same instructions as
given for Artist. Each menu
selection will eventually lead to the
song for playback.
Select one of the options listed on Select an artist from the Artist menu Tracks
the Playlist menu. A list displaying to display a list of albums.
the song titles, then Artists
associated with the titles appear. Albums
Artists
Press the Song Titles screen button

displayed on the Root Folder menu.
The Song Titles menu displays.
Select the desired song for
playback.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Composers Select the Album to display a list of Drivers are encouraged to set up
songs. Select the desired song for any auxiliary device while the
playback. vehicle is in P (Park). See
Defensive Driving on page 9-3 for
Auxiliary Devices more information on driver
distraction.
The vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
auxiliary input jack on the faceplate To use an auxiliary input device,
and a USB port in the instrument connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
panel storage area. the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
If equipped, there are two USB Press SRCE to select the device.
Press the Composers screen button ports on the rear of the center
displayed on the Root Folder menu. Using the USB Port
console that can be used for
The Composers menu displays. charging only. They can charge The USB port is in the instrument
Select a composer to display a list devices that draw 2.1 amps or less. panel storage area. See Instrument
of Albums from the composer. See the device’s owner manual for Panel Storage on page 4-1.
the specification. The USB port can control a USB
Using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in) storage device or an iPod using the
Auxiliary Input Jack radio buttons and knobs. See MP3
(Radio with Touchscreen) on
This is not an audio output; do not page 7-30 or MP3 (Radio without
plug a headphone set into the front Touchscreen) on page 7-25 for
auxiliary input jack. Connect an information about how to connect
auxiliary input device such as an and control a USB storage device or
iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, an iPod.
CD player, or cassette tape player
to the auxiliary input jack for use as
another source for audio listening.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
USB Supported Devices Rear Seat Audio can be heard through wired
. USB Flash Drives headphones (not included) plugged
Infotainment into the jacks on the RSA. If the
. Portable USB Hard Drives vehicle has this feature, audio can
. Fifth generation or later iPod Rear Seat Audio (RSA) also be heard on Channel 2 of the
wireless headphones.
. ®
iPod classic (6th generation) System
The audio system mutes the rear
. iPod nano® (3G, 4G, 5G, If equipped with RSA, rear seat speakers when the RSA audio is
and 6G) passengers can listen to and control active through the headphones.
any of the music sources: radio,
. iPod touch® (1G, 2G, 3G, To listen to an iPod or portable
CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary
and 4G) audio device through the RSA,
sources. The rear seat passengers
. iPhone® (2G, 3G, 3GS, 4, and 5) can only control the music sources attach the iPod or portable audio
the front seat passengers are not device to the front auxiliary input (if
. iPad® (1G, 2G) available), located on the front audio
listening to (except on some radios
Not all iPods and USB drives are where dual control is allowed). For system. Turn the iPod on, then
compatible with the USB port. example, rear seat passengers can choose the front auxiliary input with
Make sure the iPod has the latest control a CD and listen to it through the RSA SRCE button.
firmware from Apple® for proper the headphones, while the driver
operation. iPod firmware can be listens to the radio through the front
updated using the latest iTunes® speakers. The rear seat passengers
application. See www.apple.com/ have control of the volume for each
itunes. set of headphones.
For help identifying your iPod, go to The RSA functions operate even
www.apple.com/support. when the main radio is off. The front
audio system displays X when the
RSA is on, and disappears from the
display when it is off.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
P (Power): Press to turn the RSA While listening to a disc, press ¨ to When a disc is playing in the CD or
on or off. go to the next track or chapter on DVD changer, press PROG to
select the next disc, if multiple discs
Volume: Turn to increase or to the disc. Press © to go back to the
are loaded. This function is inactive,
decrease the volume of the wired start of the current track or chapter with some radios, if the front seat
headphones. The left knob controls (if more than 10 seconds have passengers are listening to the disc.
the left headphones and the right played). This function is inactive,
knob controls the right headphones. with some radios, if the front seat When a DVD video menu is being
passengers are listening to the disc. displayed, press PROG to perform
SRCE (Source): Press to select the ENTER menu function.
between the radio, CD, and if the When a DVD video menu is being
vehicle has these features, DVD, displayed, press © or ¨ to perform a Rear Audio
front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. cursor up or down on the menu.
Controller (RAC)
© ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the Hold © or ¨ to perform a cursor left
previous or to the next station and or right on the menu.
stay there. This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat PROG (Program): Press to go to
passengers are listening to the the next preset radio station or
channel set on the main radio. This
radio.
function is inactive, with some
Press and hold © or ¨ until the radios, if the front seat passengers
display flashes to tune to an are listening to the radio.
If equipped, certain radio functions
individual station. The display stops When a CD or DVD audio disc is can be controlled with RAC.
flashing after the buttons have not playing, press PROG to go to the
been pushed for more than beginning of the CD or DVD audio. x w (Next/Previous): Press the
two seconds. This function is down or up arrows to go to the next
This function is inactive, with some
inactive, with some radios, if the radios, if the front seat passengers or to the previous radio station
front seat passengers are listening are listening to the disc. stored as a favorite.
to the radio.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
When a CD/DVD is playing, press

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
the down or up arrows to go to the
Phone The system may not work with
next or previous track or chapter. all cell phones. See “Pairing” in
Bluetooth this section.
© SEEK ¨ : Press the SEEK
arrows to go to the previous or to For vehicles equipped with . If the cell phone has voice
the next radio station while in AM, Bluetooth capability, the system can dialing capability, learn to use
FM, or SiriusXM® (if equipped). interact with many cell phones, that feature to access the
Press the SEEK arrows to go to the allowing: address book or contact list. See
previous or to the next track or . Placement and receipt of calls in “Voice Pass-Thru” in this
chapter while sourced to a CD or a hands-free mode. section.
DVD slot. . See “Storing and Deleting Phone
. Sharing of the cell phone’s
SRCE (Source): Press this button address book or contact list with Numbers” in this section.
to switch between the radio (AM, the vehicle.
FM), SiriusXM (if equipped), CD,
To minimize driver distraction,
{ Warning
and if the vehicle has these
features, DVD, front auxiliary, and before driving, and with the vehicle When using a cell phone, it can
rear auxiliary. parked: be distracting to look too long or
. Become familiar with the too often at the screen of the
> (Mute): Press this button to
features of the cell phone. phone or the infotainment
silence the system. Press this
button again, or any other radio Organize the phone book and (navigation) system. Taking your
button, to turn the sound on. contact lists clearly and delete eyes off the road too long or too
duplicate or rarely used entries. often could cause a crash
+ / − x (Volume): Press the plus or If possible, program speed dial resulting in injury or death. Focus
minus buttons to increase or to or other shortcuts. your attention on driving.
decrease the volume. . Review the controls and
operation of the infotainment
system.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/27/13
A Bluetooth system can use a When to Speak: A short tone b / g (Push To Talk): Press to
Bluetooth-capable cell phone with a sounds after the system responds answer incoming calls, confirm
Hands-Free Profile to make and indicating when it is waiting for a system information, and start
receive phone calls. The system voice command. Wait until the tone speech recognition.
can be used while the key is in the and then speak.
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY c / x (End): Press to end a call,
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a reject a call, or cancel an operation.
position. The range of the Bluetooth calm and natural voice.
system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Pairing
Not all phones support all functions, Audio System
and not all phones work with the A Bluetooth enabled cell phone
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth must be paired to the Bluetooth
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See
system, sound comes through the system and then connected to the
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
vehicle's front audio system vehicle before it can be used. See
information on compatible phones.
speakers and overrides the audio the cell phone manufacturer's user
Voice Recognition system. Use the audio system guide for Bluetooth functions before
volume knob, during a call, to pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
The Bluetooth system uses voice change the volume level. The
recognition to interpret voice phone is not connected, calls will be
adjusted volume level remains in made using OnStar Hands-Free
commands to dial phone numbers memory for later calls. To prevent
and name tags. Calling, if equipped. See "OnStar" if
missed calls, a minimum volume equipped.
For additional information, say level is used if the volume is turned
“Help” while you are in a voice down too low. Pairing Information
recognition menu. . A Bluetooth phone with MP3
Bluetooth Controls
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to capability cannot be paired to
a minimum. The system may not Use the buttons located on the the vehicle as a phone and an
recognize voice commands if there steering wheel to operate the MP3 player at the same time.
is too much background noise. in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See . Up to five cell phones can be
Steering Wheel Controls on
paired to the Bluetooth system.
page 5-2.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. The pairing process is disabled 3. Say “Pair.” The system responds Listing All Paired and Connected
when the vehicle is moving. with instructions and a four-digit Phones
. Pairing only needs to be Personal Identification Number The system can list all cell phones
completed once, unless the (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
pairing information on the cell 4. Start the pairing process on the also connected to the vehicle, the
phone changes or the cell phone cell phone that you want to pair. system responds with “is connected”
is deleted from the system. For help with this process, see after that phone name.
. Only one paired cell phone can the cell phone manufacturer's
be connected to the Bluetooth user guide. 1. Press b / g.
system at a time. 5. Locate the device named “Your 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
. If multiple paired cell phones are Vehicle” in the list on the cell 3. Say “List.”
within range of the system, the phone. Follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the Deleting a Paired Phone
system connects to the first
available paired cell phone in the PIN provided in Step 3. After the If the phone name you want to
order that they were first paired PIN is successfully entered, the delete is unknown, see “Listing All
to the system. To connect to a system prompts you to provide a Paired and Connected Phones.”
different paired phone, see name for the paired cell phone.
“Connecting to a Different This name will be used to 1. Press b / g.
Phone” later in this section. indicate which phones are 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
paired and connected to the
Pairing a Phone vehicle. The system responds 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
with “<phone name> has been which phone to delete.
1. Press b / g.
successfully paired” after the 4. Say the name of the phone you
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command pairing process is complete. want to delete.
can be skipped.
6. Repeat Steps 1–5 to pair
additional phones.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Connecting to a Different Phone Storing and Deleting Phone Using the “Store” Command
To connect to a different cell phone, Numbers 1. Press b / g.
the Bluetooth system looks for the The system can store up to 30
next available cell phone in the 2. Say “Store.”
phone numbers as name tags in the
order in which all the available cell Hands-Free Directory that is shared 3. Say the phone number or group
phones were paired. Depending on between the Bluetooth and OnStar of numbers you want to store all
which cell phone you want to systems, if equipped. at once with no pauses, then
connect to, you may have to use follow the directions given by the
this command several times. The following commands are used
system to save a name tag for
to delete and store phone numbers.
this number.
1. Press b / g. Store: This command will store a
2. Say “Bluetooth.” phone number, or a group of Using the “Digit Store” Command
numbers as a name tag. If an unwanted number is
3. Say “Change phone.”
Digit Store: This command allows recognized by the system, say
. If another cell phone is “Clear” at any time to clear the last
a phone number to be stored as a
found, the response will be number.
name tag by entering the digits one
“<Phone name> is now
at a time. To hear all of the numbers
connected.”
Delete: This command is used to recognized by the system, say
. If another cell phone is not
delete individual name tags. “Verify” at any time.
found, the original phone
remains connected. Delete All Name Tags: This 1. Press b / g.
command deletes all stored name 2. Say “Digit Store.”
tags in the Hands-Free Calling
Directory and the OnStar 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory, that you want to store. After
if equipped. each digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the last

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
digit has been entered, say Using the “List” Command 3. Say the entire number without
“Store,” and then follow the pausing, or say the name tag.
directions given by the system to 1. Press b / g.
Once connected, the person called
save a name tag for this number. 2. Say “Directory.” will be heard through the audio
Using the “Delete” Command 3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.” speakers.
1. Press b / g. 4. Say “List.” Calling 911 Emergency
2. Say “Delete.” Making a Call 1. Press b / g.
3. Say the name tag you want to Calls can be made using the 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
delete. following commands.
3. Say “911.”
Using the “Delete All Name Tags” Dial or Call: The dial or call
4. Say "Dial" or "Call.”
Command command can be used
interchangeably to dial a phone Using the “Digit Dial” Command
This command deletes all stored number or a stored name tag.
name tags in the Hands-Free The digit dial command allows a
Calling Directory and the OnStar Digit Dial: This command allows a phone number to be dialed by
Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory, phone number to be dialed by entering the digits one at a time.
if equipped. entering the digits one at a time. After each digit is entered, the
Re-dial: This command is used to system repeats back the digit it
To delete all name tags: heard followed by a tone.
dial the last number used on the cell
1. Press b / g. phone. If an unwanted number is
2. Say “Delete all name tags.” recognized by the system, say
Using the “Dial” or “Call”
“Clear” at any time to clear the last
Listing Stored Numbers Command
number.
The list command will list all stored 1. Press b / g. To hear all of the numbers
numbers and name tags. 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
1. Press b / g. . Press c / x to ignore a call. 3. Use the dial or call command to

dial the number of the third party
2. Say “Digit Dial.” Call Waiting to be called.
3. Say each digit, one at a time, Call waiting must be supported on 4. Once the call is connected,
that you want to dial. After each the cell phone and enabled by the
press b / g to link all callers
digit is entered, the system wireless service carrier.
repeats back the digit it heard together.
followed by a tone. After the last
. Press b / g to answer an
Ending a Call
digit has been entered, incoming call when another call
say “Dial.” is active. The original call is Press c / x to end a call.
placed on hold.
Once connected, the person called Muting a Call
will be heard through the audio . Press b / g again to return to
speakers. the original call. During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
Using the “Re-dial” Command . To ignore the incoming call, no person on the other end of the call
action is required. cannot hear them.
1. Press b / g.
. Press c / x to disconnect the . To mute a call, press b / g , and
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.”
current call and switch to the call then say “Mute call.”
Once connected, the person called on hold.
will be heard through the audio . To cancel mute, press b / g ,
speakers. Three-Way Calling and then say “Un-mute call.”
Three-way calling must be Transferring a Call
Receiving a Call supported on the cell phone and
When an incoming call is received, enabled by the wireless service Audio can be transferred between
the audio system mutes and a ring carrier. the Bluetooth system and the cell
tone is heard in the vehicle. phone.
1. While on a call, press b / g.
. Press b / g to answer the call. 2. Say “Three-way call.”

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The cell phone must be paired and Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
connected with the Bluetooth (DTMF) Tones
Voice pass-thru allows access to the
system before a call can be
voice recognition commands on the The Bluetooth system can send
transferred. The connection process
cell phone. See your cell phone numbers and the numbers stored as
can take up to two minutes after the
manufacturer's user guide to see if name tags during a call. You can
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
the cell phone supports this feature. use this feature when calling a
Transferring Audio from the To access contacts stored in the cell menu-driven phone system.
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone phone: Account numbers can also be
During a call with the audio in the stored for use.
vehicle: 1. Press b / g. Sending a Number or Name Tag
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command During a Call
1. Press b / g. can be skipped.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” 1. Press b / g. The system
3. Say “Voice.” The system responds “Ready,” followed by
Transferring Audio to the responds “OK, accessing a tone.
Bluetooth System from a Cell <phone name>.”
Phone 2. Say “Dial.”
The cell phone's normal prompt
During a call with the audio on the messages will go through their cycle 3. Say the number or name tag
according to the phone's operating to send.
cell phone, press b / g. The audio
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio instructions.
does not transfer to the vehicle, use
the audio transfer feature on the cell
phone. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for more
information.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Clearing the System Settings

Unless information is deleted out of Press Settings on the Home Page
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it to adjust features and preferences,
will be retained indefinitely. This such as Time, Date, Bluetooth
includes all saved name tags in the Device List, Voice Recognition,
phone book and phone pairing Favorite Pages, Display Settings,
information. For information on how Navigation Settings, etc.
to delete this information, see the
previous section “Deleting a Paired 1. Press the Settings screen button
Phone” and the previous sections on the Home Page.
on deleting name tags. 2. Touch-tap the scroll bar until the
Other Information desired option displays. Select
the desired settings to change. From the Settings menu, press the
The Bluetooth® word mark and Set Time or Set Date settings
logos are owned by the Bluetooth® A few of the setting options change screen button to display the different
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks the way the navigation system options for setting the time
by General Motors is under license. displays or reacts while in use. and date.
Other trademarks and trade names Bluetooth Device List: Press to
are those of their respective owners. display paired bluetooth devices.
See Radio Frequency Statement on Voice Recognition: Press to
page 13-15. display voice recognition options.
. Voice Prompt Volume: Press to
adjust the prompt volume.
. Prompt Length: Press to select
short or long prompts.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Favorite Pages: Press to select Startup Volume: Press to set the Set Date:
the number of favorite pages maximum volume level for startup . Press the up or down arrows to
displayed on the screen. The choice that will be used even if a higher increase or decrease the Month,
is 1–6 pages. volume had been set when the radio Day, and Year settings.
Display Settings: Press to adjust was turned off.
the screen settings. Radio Favorites: Press to select increase or decrease the date
. The Auto setting adjusts the the number of FAV pages to be settings.
screen background automatically used in the system.
. Press OK or the Back screen
depending on the exterior Add/Remove XM Categories: button to save the adjustments.
lighting conditions. Press to customize which available
. The Day setting brightens the XM Categories are displayed and Radio Settings
map background. used in the system.
Press the Config button on the
. The Night setting darkens the RDS Settings: Press to customize Home Page or the CONFIG button
map background. station name and radio text display on the faceplate to enter the menu
options. options. Turn the PUSH/SEL knob
Speed Dependent Volume: Select or touch-tap the scroll bar to scroll
OFF, Low, Medium, or High Set Time:
through the available options. Press
sensitivity to automatically adjust . Press the up or down arrows to the PUSH/SEL knob or press Radio
the volume to minimize the effects increase or decrease the Hours, Settings to display the radio settings
of unwanted background noise that Minutes, AM, PM, or 24 hr on menu. Press this feature to make
can result from changing road the clock. changes for radio information
surfaces, driving speeds, or open . Press and hold to quickly displayed, preset pages, Auto
windows. This feature works best at increase or decrease the time Volume Control, and XM Categories
lower volume settings where settings.
background noise is typically louder
than the sound system volume. . Press OK or the Back screen

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Restore. See Satellite Radio (Radio Rear Vision Camera (If

without Touchscreen) on page 7-15 Equipped)
or Satellite Radio (Radio with
Touchscreen) on page 7-18 (if The rear vision camera can assist
equipped), for more information the driver when backing up by
about XM Categories. displaying a view of the area behind
the vehicle.
The Radio Settings are:
Phone Settings
See Bluetooth on page 7-37 in the Press the Config button to access
“Phone” section for more the Display settings. Adjust the
information on phone settings. brightness of the screen by pressing
the − or + screen button. See Rear
Vehicle Settings Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9-37.
See Vehicle Personalization (With
Display An image appears on the system’s
screen so that the driver can check
Mode: Press Mode to change the the surroundings for safety.
screen background. This setting
controls map colors.
Calibrate Touchscreen: Press to
display the Touchscreen Calibration
Screen.
Turn Display Off: Press to turn the
Display option off.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Trademarks and
License Agreements
Manufactured under license from

Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Copyright
Manufactured under license under 1992-2010 Dolby Laboratories. All
U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942; rights reserved.
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks
and the DTS logos and Symbol are
trademarks of DTS, Inc.©
1996-2010 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
2 NOTES

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with
Climate Control Systems this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Rear Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Rear Climate Control System
(with Rear Seat Audio) . . . . . . 8-9
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
1. Fan Control 9 (Off): Turn the fan control all the

2. REAR (Rear Climate Control) way counterclockwise to turn the
front climate control system off.
3. Temperature Control
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise
4. Recirculation or counterclockwise to increase or
5. Air Delivery Mode Control decrease the fan speed.
6. Air Conditioning
7. Rear Window Defogger

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
8-2 Climate Controls
Temperature Control: Turn automatically selects outside air. # (Air Conditioning): Press to
clockwise or counterclockwise to Recirculation cannot be selected turn the air conditioning system on
increase or decrease the while in floor mode. or off. An indicator light comes on
temperature of the air flowing from - (Defog): This clears the when A/C is on. The air conditioning
the system. windows of fog or moisture. Air is system does not operate when the
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn directed to the windshield, floor outside temperature is below 4°C
clockwise or counterclockwise to outlets, and side window vents. (40°F). The indicator light flashes
change the current airflow mode. When this mode is selected, the three times and turns off when
system turns off recirculation and outside conditions affect air
By positioning the right knob conditioning operation. This is
between two modes, a combination runs the air conditioning unless the
outside temperature is less than 4°C normal.
of those two modes is selected.
(40°F). Recirculation cannot be For quicker cool down on hot days:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the selected while in the defog mode.
instrument panel outlets. Do not drive the vehicle until all the 1. Open the windows to let hot air
windows are clear. escape.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel and 0 (Defrost): This clears the 2. Select H mode.
floor outlets. Some air is directed windshield of fog or frost more
toward the windshield and side quickly. Air is directed to the 3. Select #.
window outlets. Cooler air is windshield and side window vents, 4. Select the coolest temperature.
directed to the upper outlets and with some to the floor vents. In this
warmer air to the floor outlets. 5. Select the highest fan speed.
mode, outside air is pulled inside
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the the vehicle. Recirculation cannot be 6. Close the windows after the hot
floor outlets, with some of the air selected while in the defrost mode. air has escaped.
directed to the windshield, side The air conditioning system runs 7. Once the vehicle's interior
window, and second row floor automatically in this setting, unless temperature is below the outside
outlets. In this mode, the system the outside temperature is less than
4°C (40°F). Do not drive the vehicle temperature, select @ mode
until all windows are clear. for faster cooling.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Using recirculation for long periods The recirculation mode cannot be 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
of time could cause the air inside used with floor, defrost, or defogging Press to turn the rear window
the vehicle to become too dry. To modes. If recirculation is selected in defogger on or off. The rear window
prevent this from happening, after these modes, the indicator flashes defogger stays on for about
the inside of the vehicle has cooled, three times and turns off. The air 10 minutes, before automatically
turn the recirculation mode off. conditioning also comes on when turning off. The defogger will also
The air conditioning system this mode is activated unless the turn off when the engine is
removes moisture from the air, so outside air temperature is less than turned off.
water might drip under the vehicle 4°C (40°F). While in recirculation
mode the windows can fog when Do not drive the vehicle until all
while idling or after turning off the windows are clear.
engine. This is normal. the weather is cold and damp. To
clear the fog, select either the defog For vehicles with heated outside
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn or defrost mode and increase the rearview mirrors, fog or frost is
the recirculation mode on or off. An fan speed. cleared from the surface of the
indicator light comes on when mirror when 1 is pressed.
recirculation is on. When the engine REAR (Rear Climate Control):
is turned off, the recirculation mode Press to turn the rear heating and
automatically turns off and must be air conditioning on or off. See Rear
Climate Control System on page 8-8
{ Caution
re-selected when the engine is
turned on again. or Rear Climate Control System Using a razor blade or sharp
(with Rear Seat Audio) on page 8-9. object on the inside rear window
This mode recirculates and helps to can damage the antenna or
quickly cool the air inside the Rear Window Defogger
defogger. Repairs would not be
vehicle. It can be used to prevent The rear window defogger uses a covered by the vehicle warranty.
outside air and odors from entering warming grid to remove fog from the Do not stick anything to the rear
the vehicle. rear window. window.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Dual Automatic Climate Control System function along with the inside
temperature setting. The outside
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with temperature is displayed on the
this system. instrument cluster.
( (On/Off): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to turn the climate
control system on or off.
The climate control system will also
turn on if the defrost, AUTO, or air
conditioning buttons are pressed.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): The system
automatically controls the inside
temperature, the air delivery, and
the fan speed.
To use automatic mode:
1. Driver and Passenger Side 7. Rear Window Defogger
Temperature Controls 1. Press the AUTO button.
8. Fan Control
2. Air Delivery Mode Controls When AUTO is selected, the
9. Recirculation current temperature(s) is
3. SYNC (Synchronized 10. Air Conditioning displayed and the AUTO
Temperature) indicator light is on.
4. AUTO (Automatic Operation) Display Function
When AUTO is selected, the air
5. REAR (Rear Climate Control) Each time the temperature, mode,
conditioning and air inlet are
or fan controls are adjusted, the
6. Defrost automatically controlled. The air
climate control display shows that
conditioning runs when the

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
outside temperature is over is available. Turn the fan knob to temperature. The passenger side
4°C (40°F). The system is override this delay and select display will show the temperature
automatically set to outside air, the fan speed. setting.
unless it is hot outside and then SYNC (Synchronized
the air inlet changes to Temperature Control
Temperature): Press to set the
recirculation mode to help The driver and passenger side passenger temperature to match the
quickly cool the vehicle. The temperature controls are used to driver temperature setting.
recirculation indicator light will adjust the temperature of the air
come on. coming through the system. The Manual Operation
2. Set the temperature for the temperature can be adjusted even if
The air delivery mode or fan speed
driver and passenger. the system is turned off since
can be manually adjusted.
outside air still enters the vehicle,
To find a comfortable setting, unless the recirculation mode is 9 (Fan Control): Turn the knob
start with a 22°C (73°F) selected. See “Recirculation” later in clockwise or counterclockwise to
temperature setting and allow this section. increase or decrease the fan speed.
about 20 minutes for the system
Driver Side Temperature Turning the fan control knob while in
to regulate. Use the driver side
Control: Turn clockwise or automatic control places the fan
or passenger side temperature
counterclockwise to increase or speed under manual control.
control to adjust the temperature
setting as necessary. The decrease the driver side The air delivery mode remains in
system will remain at the temperature. The driver side automatic control. The fan setting
selected setting. Choosing the temperature display will show the displays momentarily and then no
warmest or coolest temperatures temperature setting. longer displays.
does not cause the vehicle to Passenger Side Temperature
heat or cool more quickly. Control: Turn clockwise or Air Delivery Modes: Press H, ),
counterclockwise to increase or 6, or- to change the direction of
To avoid blowing cold air in cold the airflow in the vehicle. An
weather, the system delays decrease the passenger side
indicator light comes on in the
turning on the fan until warm air selected mode button. Pressing a

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
mode button while the system is off outlets, and side window vents. The A/C does not work when the
changes the air delivery mode When this mode is selected, the outside temperature is below 4°C
without turning the system on. system turns off recirculation and (40°F). If A/C is pressed the
Changing the air delivery mode runs the air conditioning compressor indicator flashes three times and
while in automatic control places the unless the outside temperature is turns off to show that the A/C mode
system into manual control. The air less than 4°C (40°F). Do not drive is not available. If the A/C is on and
delivery mode button indicator the vehicle until all the windows are the outside temperature drops
displays, and the AUTO button clear. below a temperature which is too
indicator light turns off. 0 (Defrost): Press to turn the cool for air conditioning to be
H (Vent): Air is directed to the defrost on or off. This mode quickly effective, the A/C indicator turns off
instrument panel outlets. clears the windshield of fog or frost. to show that the A/C mode has
Air is directed to the windshield, been canceled.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
side window, and floor vents. In this On hot days, open the windows
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets. Some air is directed mode, outside air is pulled inside briefly to let hot inside air escape.
towards the windshield and side the vehicle. The air conditioning This helps reduce the time it takes
window outlets. Cooler air is system runs automatically in this for the interior of the vehicle to
directed to the upper outlets and setting, unless the outside cool down.
warmer air to the floor outlets. temperature is less than 4°C (40°F). The air conditioning system
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the Do not drive the vehicle until all the removes moisture from the air, so
floor outlets, with some of the air windows are clear. water might drip under the vehicle
directed to the windshield, side while idling or after turning off the
Air Conditioning engine. This is normal.
window, and second row floor
outlets. In this mode, the system A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to @ (Recirculation): Press to turn
uses outside air. turn the air conditioning on and off. the recirculation mode on or off. An
An indicator light comes on when indicator light comes on when
- (Defog): This mode clears the A/C is on. recirculation is on. When the engine
windows of fog or moisture. Air is
directed to the windshield, floor is turned off, the recirculation mode

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
automatically turns off and must be Rear Window Defogger

re-selected when the engine is Caution (Continued)
The rear window defogger uses a
turned on again.
warming grid to remove fog from the covered by the vehicle warranty.
This mode recirculates and helps to rear window. Do not stick anything to the rear
quickly cool the air inside the window.
vehicle. It can be used to prevent R1 (Rear Window Defogger):
outside air and odors from entering Press to turn the rear window
the vehicle. defogger on or off. The rear window Sensors
defogger stays on for about
The recirculation mode cannot be The solar sensor in the defrost grille
10 minutes, before turning off. The
used with floor, defog, or defrosting in the middle of the instrument
defogger also turns off when the
modes. If recirculation is selected in panel, monitors the solar heat. Do
engine is turned off. Do not drive the
these modes, the indicator flashes not cover the solar sensor or the
vehicle until all the windows are
three times and turns off. The air system will not work properly.
clear.
conditioning compressor also comes
on when this mode is activated. If equipped with heated outside
While in recirculation mode the rearview mirrors, fog or frost is
windows can fog when the weather cleared from the surface of the
is cold and damp. To clear the fog, mirror when the rear window defog
select either the defog or defrost button is pressed.
mode and increase the fan speed.
REAR: Press to turn the rear { Caution
heating and air conditioning on or
Using a razor blade or sharp
off. See Rear Climate Control
System on page 8-8 or Rear object on the inside rear window
Climate Control System (with Rear can damage the antenna or
Seat Audio) on page 8-9. defogger. Repairs would not be
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The interior temperature sensor, on Rear Climate Control System

the instrument panel to the right of
the steering column, measures the
temperature of the air inside the
vehicle.
There is also an exterior
temperature sensor behind the front
grille. This sensor reads the outside
air temperature and helps maintain
the temperature inside the vehicle.
Any cover on the front of the vehicle
could cause a false reading in the
displayed temperature.
The climate control system uses the
information from these sensors to
1. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front
maintain comfort settings by
2. Temperature Control climate control system to control the
adjusting the temperature, fan
rear climate control system. The
speed, and air delivery mode. The 3. Air Delivery Mode Control REAR text displays when the rear
system may also supply cooler air to
For vehicles with the rear climate system is on.
the side of the vehicle facing the
sun. The recirculation mode will also control system, the controls are Sync Mode: This mode matches
be used as needed to maintain cool located on the rear of the center the rear climate control to the front
outlet temperatures. console. The system can also be climate control settings. It comes on
controlled with the front controls. when REAR is pressed.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Independent Mode: This mode Rear Climate Control System (with Rear Seat Audio)
directs rear seating airflow
according to the settings of the rear
controls. It comes on when any rear
control is adjusted.
Fan Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob to ( to turn the fan off.
Temperature Control: Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the airflow
temperature.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
to the desired mode to change the 1. Fan Control rear controls, except C , are
airflow direction. 2. Air Delivery Mode Control pressed. The display is activated
H (Vent): Air is directed through when the rear system is on.
3. Temperature Control
the overhead outlets. The system can also be turned off,
For vehicles with the rear climate
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed control system, the controls are by pressingC until the fan goes off.
through the rear floor outlets, as located on the rear of the center Sync Mode: This mode matches
well as the overhead outlets. console. the rear climate control to the front
6 (Floor): Air is directed through Press the REAR button on the front climate control settings. It comes on
the floor outlets. The rear system climate control system to control the when REAR is pressed.
floor outlets are located under the rear climate control system. The
third row seats. system also turns on if any of the

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Independent Mode: This mode N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Air Vents
directs rear seating airflow Press to manually change the
according to the settings of the rear direction of the airflow. Repeatedly Use the slider switch in the center of
controls. It comes on when any rear press the button until the desired the outlet, to change the direction of
control is adjusted. mode appears on the display. the airflow. Use the thumbwheel
near the outlet to control the amount
D and C (Fan Control): Press the H (Vent): Air is directed through of airflow or to shut off the airflow.
fan up or down buttons to increase the overhead outlets.
or decrease the fan speed. Keep all outlets open whenever
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed possible for best system
Temperature Control: Press + or through the rear floor outlets, as performance.
− to increase or decrease the air well as the overhead outlets.
temperature. The temperature Operation Tips
settings will display in 6 (Floor): Air is directed through
0-12 increments, going from the the floor outlets. The rear system . Clear away any ice, snow,
coolest (0) to the warmest (12) floor outlets are located under the or leaves from the air inlets at
setting. third row seats. the base of the windshield that
can block the flow of air into the
vehicle.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect Maintenance
the performance of the system.
. Keep the path under all seats
Passenger Compartment
clear of objects to help circulate Air Filter
the air inside the vehicle more The filter removes dust, pollen, and
effectively. other airborne irritants from outside
. If fogging reoccurs while in vent air and inside air when in
or bi-level modes with mild recirculation mode.
temperature throughout the The filter should be replaced as part
vehicle, turn on the air of routine scheduled maintenance.
conditioner to reduce windshield See Maintenance Schedule on
fogging. 2. Twist the compartment
page 11-3. To find out what type of retainers (1) and pull outward to
replacement filter to use, see remove.
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 11-12. 3. Lower the instrument panel
compartment assembly (2)
1. Open the glove box. beyond the stops.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
4. If needed, unsnap the instrument 5. Squeeze the housing cover (1)

panel compartment assembly (2) tabs to remove.
from the instrument panel. When 6. Remove the old air filter from the
reinstalling, be sure the passenger compartment air filter
instrument panel compartment housing (2).
dampener arm is aligned
properly to the dampener gear 7. Install the new air filter.
assembly. 8. Replace the housing cover.
9. If removed, reinstall the
instrument panel compartment
assembly.
10. Reinstall the compartment
retainers.
See your dealer if additional
assistance is needed.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Cruise Control
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Operating Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . .
9-19
9-20 Driver Assistance Systems
Parking over Things Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Driving Information Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-34
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Engine Exhaust Side Blind Zone
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Running the Vehicle While Rear Vision
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Lane Departure
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Automatic Transmission Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-22
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Fuel
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7 Drive Systems Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-44
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 California Fuel
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Brakes Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Antilock Brake Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-44
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Starting and Operating Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Filling a Portable Fuel
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-28
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Ride Control Systems
Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
9-2 Driving and Operating
Trailer Towing
. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 distractions.
Driving Characteristics and Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50 and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52 task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Conversions and Add-Ons activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into
Add-On Electrical from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
governments have enacted laws driving.
regarding driver distraction. Become . Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
to the floor.
To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands
to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
. Keep pets in an appropriate
. Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
. Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. Allow enough following distance
Control of a Vehicle
{ Warning between you and the driver in
front of you. Braking, steering, and accelerating
Taking your eyes off the road too are important factors in helping to
. Focus on the task of driving.
long or too often could cause a control a vehicle while driving.
crash resulting in injury or death.
Focus your attention on driving. Drunk Driving Braking
Death and injury associated with
Braking action involves perception
Refer to the Infotainment section drinking and driving is a global
time and reaction time. Deciding to
and the infotainment manual for tragedy.
push the brake pedal is perception
more information on using that time. Actually doing it is
system, including pairing and using { Warning reaction time.
a cell phone.
Drinking and then driving is very Average driver reaction time is
dangerous. Your reflexes, about three-quarters of a second. In
Defensive Driving that time, a vehicle moving at
perceptions, attentiveness, and
Defensive driving means “always judgment can be affected by even 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
expect the unexpected.” The first a small amount of alcohol. You (66 ft), which could be a lot of
step in driving defensively is to wear can have a serious — or even distance in an emergency.
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on fatal — collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
page 3-13. drinking. include:
. Assume that other road users Do not drink and drive or ride with . Keep enough distance between
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and you and the vehicle in front
a driver who has been drinking.
other drivers) are going to be of you.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
careless and make mistakes.
Anticipate what they might do with a group, designate a driver . Avoid needless heavy braking.
and be ready. who will not drink. . Keep pace with traffic.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
If the engine ever stops while the If the vehicle seems harder to steer
vehicle is being driven, brake than normal when parking or driving Caution (Continued)
normally but do not pump the slowly, there may be a problem with
brakes. Doing so could make the the system. You will still have power damage may occur to the power
pedal harder to push down. If the steering, but steering will be stiffer steering system and there may be
engine stops, there will be some than normal at slow speeds. See loss of power steering assist.
power brake assist but it will be your dealer for service.
used when the brake is applied. Curve Tips
Once the power assist is used up, it Hydraulic Power Steering
can take longer to stop and the This vehicle has hydraulic power
. Take curves at a reasonable
brake pedal will be harder to push. steering. It may require speed.
maintenance. See Power Steering . Reduce speed before entering a
Steering Fluid on page 10-18. curve.
Variable Effort Steering If power steering assist is lost . Maintain a reasonable, steady
because the engine stops, or there speed through the curve.
Some vehicles have a steering is a system malfunction, the vehicle
system that varies the amount of
. Wait until the vehicle is out of
can be steered but may require
effort required to steer the vehicle in the curve before accelerating
increased effort. See your dealer if
relation to the speed of the vehicle. gently into the straightaway.
there is a problem.
The amount of steering effort Steering in Emergencies
required is less at slower speeds to { Caution . There are some situations when
make the vehicle more steering around a problem may
maneuverable and easier to park. At If the steering wheel is turned
be more effective than braking.
faster speeds, the steering effort until it reaches the end of its
increases to provide a sport-like feel travel, and is held in that position . Holding both sides of the
to the steering. This provides for more than 15 seconds, steering wheel allows you to turn
maximum control and stability. 180 degrees without removing
(Continued)
a hand.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. Antilock Brake System (ABS) 2. Turn the steering wheel about Defensive drivers avoid most skids
allows steering while braking. one-eighth of a turn, until the by taking reasonable care suited to
right front tire contacts the existing conditions, and by not
Off-Road Recovery pavement edge. overdriving those conditions. But
3. Turn the steering wheel to go skids are always possible.
straight down the roadway. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
these suggestions:
Loss of Control . Ease your foot off the
Skidding accelerator pedal and steer the
way you want the vehicle to go.
There are three types of skids that The vehicle may straighten out.
correspond to the vehicle's three Be ready for a second skid if it
control systems: occurs.
. Braking Skid — wheels are not . Slow down and adjust your
rolling. driving according to weather
. Steering or Cornering Skid — conditions. Stopping distance
The vehicle's right wheels can drop too much speed or steering in a can be longer and vehicle
off the edge of a road onto the curve causes tires to slip and control can be affected when
shoulder while driving. Follow lose cornering force. traction is reduced by water,
these tips: snow, ice, gravel, or other
. Acceleration Skid — too much material on the road. Learn to
1. Ease off the accelerator and throttle causes the driving recognize warning clues — such
then, if there is nothing in the wheels to spin. as enough water, ice, or packed
way, steer the vehicle so that it snow on the road to make a
straddles the edge of the mirrored surface — and slow
pavement. down when you have any doubt.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. Try to avoid sudden steering, There is no hard and fast rule about
acceleration, or braking, Warning (Continued) hydroplaning. The best advice is to
including reducing vehicle speed slow down when the road is wet.
by shifting to a lower gear. Any After driving through a large
sudden changes could cause puddle of water or a car/vehicle Other Rainy Weather Tips
the tires to slide. wash, lightly apply the brake Besides slowing down, other wet
Remember: Antilock brakes help pedal until the brakes work weather driving tips include:
avoid only the braking skid. normally.
. Allow extra following distance.
Flowing or rushing water creates
Driving on Wet Roads strong forces. Driving through
. Pass with caution.
flowing water could cause the . Keep windshield wiping
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle to be carried away. If this equipment in good shape.
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate. happens, you and other vehicle . Keep the windshield washer fluid
Always drive slower in these types occupants could drown. Do not reservoir filled.
of driving conditions and avoid ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to drive
. Have good tires with proper
driving through large puddles and tread depth. See Tires on
deep‐standing or flowing water. through flowing water.
page 10-35.
{ Warning Hydroplaning
. Turn off cruise control.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water Highway Hypnosis
They might not work as well in a can build up under the vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the Always be alert and pay attention to
quick stop and could cause your surroundings while driving.
pulling to one side. You could water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast If you become tired or sleepy, find a
lose control of the vehicle. safe place to park the vehicle
enough. When the vehicle is
(Continued) hydroplaning, it has little or no and rest.
contact with the road.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Other driving tips include:

. Stay in your own lane. Do not
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
{ Warning swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
. Keep the interior Using the brakes to slow the speeds that let you stay in your
temperature cool. vehicle on a long downhill slope own lane.
can cause brake overheating, can
. Keep your eyes moving — scan . Be alert on top of hills;
reduce brake performance, and something could be in your lane
the road ahead and to the sides.
could result in a loss of braking. (stalled car, accident).
. Check the rearview mirror and Shift the transmission to a lower
vehicle instruments often. gear to let the engine assist the
. Pay attention to special road
brakes on a steep downhill slope. signs (falling rocks area, winding
Hill and Mountain Roads roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
Driving on steep hills or through appropriate action.
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
{ Warning
driving in these conditions include:
Winter Driving
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in or with the ignition off is Driving on Snow or Ice
good shape. dangerous. This can cause Drive carefully when there is snow
overheating of the brakes and or ice between the tires and the
. Check all fluid levels and brakes,
loss of steering. Always have the road, creating less traction or grip.
tires, cooling system, and
transmission. engine running and the vehicle Wet ice can occur at about 0°C
in gear. (32°F) when freezing rain begins to
. Shift to a lower gear when going fall, resulting in even less traction.
down steep or long hills. Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Drive with caution, whatever the Turn off cruise control on slippery
condition. Accelerate gently so surfaces. Warning (Continued)
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin Blizzard Conditions cannot be seen or smelled. It can
and makes the surface under the Being stuck in snow can be a cause unconsciousness and even
tires slick, so there is even less serious situation. Stay with the death.
traction. vehicle unless there is help nearby. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
Try not to break the fragile traction. If possible, use Roadside . Clear away snow from around
If you accelerate too fast, the drive Assistance. See Roadside
the base of your vehicle,
wheels will spin and polish the Assistance Program on page 13-5.
especially any that is blocking
surface under the tires even more. To get help and keep everyone in
the exhaust pipe.
the vehicle safe:
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) . Check again from time to
improves vehicle stability during
. Turn on the hazard warning
time to be sure snow does
hard stops on slippery roads, but flashers.
not collect there.
apply the brakes sooner than when . Tie a red cloth to an outside
on dry pavement. See Antilock
. Open a window about 5 cm
mirror.
Brake System (ABS) on page 9-26. (2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
Allow greater following distance on { Warning wind to bring in fresh air.
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on
occur on otherwise clear roads in under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument
shaded areas. The surface of a cause exhaust gases to get panel.
curve or an overpass can remain icy inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the climate control
when the surrounding roads are carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that
clear. Avoid sudden steering (Continued) circulates the air inside the
maneuvers and braking while vehicle and set the fan speed
on ice. (Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Warning (Continued)
If the Vehicle Is Stuck Rocking the Vehicle to Get
it Out
Slowly and cautiously spin the
to the highest setting. See wheels to free the vehicle when Turn the steering wheel left and
“Climate Control Systems” in stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. right to clear the area around the
the Index. front wheels. Turn off any traction
If stuck too severely for the traction
For more information about system. Shift back and forth
system to free the vehicle, turn the
between R (Reverse) and a low
carbon monoxide, see Engine traction system off and use the
forward gear, spinning the wheels
Exhaust on page 9-21. rocking method. See Traction
as little as possible. To prevent
Control/Electronic Stability Control
transmission wear, wait until the
on page 9-28.
To save fuel, run the engine for only wheels stop spinning before shifting
short periods as needed to warm gears. Release the accelerator
the vehicle and then shut the engine { Warning pedal while shifting, and press
off and close the window most of lightly on the accelerator pedal
the way to save heat. Repeat this If the vehicle's tires spin at high when the transmission is in gear.
until help arrives but only when you speed, they can explode, and you Slowly spinning the wheels in the
feel really uncomfortable from the or others could be injured. The forward and reverse directions
cold. Moving about to keep warm vehicle can overheat, causing an causes a rocking motion that could
also helps. engine compartment fire or other free the vehicle. If that does not get
damage. Spin the wheels as little the vehicle out after a few tries, it
If it takes some time for help to
as possible and avoid going might need to be towed out. If the
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator above 56 km/h (35 mph). vehicle does need to be towed out,
pedal slightly so the engine runs see Towing the Vehicle on
faster than the idle speed. This page 10-70.
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
as possible to save fuel.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Load Limits Warning (Continued)

information label shows the
number of occupant seating
It is very important to know how positions (1), and the maximum
much weight your vehicle can vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a vehicle capacity weight (2) in
carry. This weight is called the kilograms and pounds.
vehicle capacity weight and crash. Overloading can also
includes the weight of all shorten the life of the vehicle. The Tire and Loading
occupants, cargo, and all Information label also shows the
nonfactory-installed options. Tire and Loading Information size of the original equipment
Two labels on your vehicle show Label tires (3) and the recommended
how much weight it may cold tire inflation pressures (4).
properly carry, the Tire and For more information on tires
Loading Information label and and inflation see Tires on
the Certification/Tire label. page 10-35 and Tire Pressure
on page 10-42.
{ Warning There is also important loading
information on the vehicle
Do not load the vehicle any Certification/Tire label. It tells
heavier than the Gross you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Vehicle Weight Rating Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
(GVWR), or either the Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
maximum front or rear Gross the front and rear axle. See
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Example Label
“Certification/Tire Label” later in
This can cause systems to A vehicle-specific Tire and this section.
break and change the way the Loading Information label is
(Continued) attached to the center pillar
(B-pillar). The tire and loading

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
“Steps for Determining Correct and luggage load capacity is

Load Limit– 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
1. Locate the statement "The = 650 lbs.)
combined weight of 5. Determine the combined
occupants and cargo should weight of luggage and cargo
never exceed XXX kg or being loaded on the vehicle.
XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s That weight may not safely
placard. exceed the available cargo
2. Determine the combined and luggage load capacity
weight of the driver and calculated in Step 4.
passengers that will be riding 6. If your vehicle will be towing Example 1
in your vehicle. a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
3. Subtract the combined
vehicle. Consult this manual Example 1 = 453 kg
weight of the driver and
to determine how this (1,000 lbs).
passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs. reduces the available cargo 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
and luggage load capacity of 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle.” (300 lbs).
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity. See Trailer Towing on page 9-50 3. Available Occupant and
For example, if the "XXX" for important information on Cargo Weight = 317 kg
amount equals 1400 lbs. and towing a trailer, towing safety (700 lbs).
there will be five 150 lb rules and trailering tips.
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Refer to your vehicle's tire and

loading information label for
specific information about your
vehicle's capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 2 Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg
(750 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
3. Available Cargo Weight = 3. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs).
Label Example
A vehicle-specific Certification/
Tire label is attached to the
center pillar (B-pillar).

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The label shows the gross If you put things inside your
weight capacity of your vehicle. { Warning vehicle — like suitcases, tools,
This is called the Gross Vehicle Do not load the vehicle any packages, or anything else, they
Weight Rating (GVWR). The heavier than the Gross will go as fast as the vehicle
GVWR includes the weight of Vehicle Weight Rating goes. If you have to stop or turn
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, (GVWR), or either the quickly, or if there is a crash,
and cargo. maximum front or rear Gross they will keep going.
The Certification/Tire label also Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
tells you the maximum weights This can cause systems to { Warning
for the front and rear axles, break and change the way the Things you put inside the
called the Gross Axle Weight vehicle handles. This could vehicle can strike and injure
Rating (GAWR). To find out the cause loss of control and a people in a sudden stop or
actual loads on your front and crash. Overloading can also turn, or in a crash.
rear axles, you need to go to a shorten the life of the vehicle.
weigh station and weigh your . Put things in the cargo
vehicle. Your dealer can help area of the vehicle. Try to
you with this. Be sure to spread spread the weight evenly.
out your load equally on both
{ Caution . Never stack heavier
sides of the centerline. Overloading the vehicle may things, like suitcases,
Never exceed the GVWR for cause damage. Repairs would inside the vehicle so that
not be covered by the vehicle some of them are above
your vehicle or the GAWR for
warranty. Do not overload the the tops of the seats.
either the front or rear axle.
vehicle.
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Warning (Continued) Starting and Caution (Continued)

Operating
. Do not leave an breaking-in guideline every
unsecured child restraint time you get new brake
New Vehicle Break-In linings.
in the vehicle.
. Do not tow a trailer during
. When you carry something { Caution break-in. See Driving
inside the vehicle, secure Characteristics and Towing
it whenever you can. The vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will Tips on page 9-47 for the
. Do not leave a seat folded trailer towing capabilities of
perform better in the long run if
down unless you need to. the vehicle and more
you follow these guidelines:
information.
. Do not drive at any one
Following break-in, engine speed
constant speed, fast or slow,
for the first 805 km (500 mi). and load can be gradually
Do not make full-throttle increased.
starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
. Avoid making hard stops for
the first 322 km (200 mi) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Ignition Positions The steering can bind with the

{ Caution wheels turned off center. If this
happens, move the steering wheel
Using a tool to force the key to from right to left while turning the
turn in the ignition could cause key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
damage to the switch or break the does not work, then the vehicle
key. Use the correct key, make needs service.
sure it is all the way in, and turn it
only with your hand. If the key Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
cannot be turned by hand, see
loss of power assist in the brake
your dealer.
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.
( (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ If the vehicle must be shut off in an
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is emergency:
stopped, turn the ignition switch to
The ignition switch has four different 1. Brake using a firm and steady
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
positions. pressure. Do not pump the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
In order to shift out of P (Park), the will remain active. See Retained brakes repeatedly. This may
ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ Accessory Power (RAP) on deplete power assist, requiring
ACCESSORY and the brake pedal page 9-19. increased brake pedal force.
must be applied. 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
This position locks the ignition,
transmission, and the steering This can be done while the
wheel when the key Is removed vehicle is moving. After shifting
from the ignition. The key can be to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
removed in LOCK/OFF. brakes and steer the vehicle to a
safe location.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
3. Come to a complete stop, shift power outlets. This position unlocks / (START): This is the position
to P (Park), and turn the ignition the ignition and steering wheel. Use that starts the engine. When the
to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with this position if the vehicle must be engine starts, release the key. The
an automatic transmission, the pushed or towed. ignition switch will return to ON/RUN
shift lever must be in P (Park) to R (ON/RUN): This position can be for driving.
turn the ignition switch to the used to operate the electrical
LOCK/OFF position. Key Lock Release
accessories and to display some
4. Set the parking brake. See instrument panel warning and The vehicle has an electronic key
Parking Brake on page 9-27. indicator lights. This position can lock release system. This system is
also be used for service and to prevent ignition key removal
{ Warning diagnostics, and to verify the proper
operation of the malfunction
unless the shift lever is in P (Park).
The key lock release will not work if
Turning off the vehicle while indicator lamp as may be required the battery is charged less than
moving may cause loss of power for emission inspection purposes. 9-volts, or uncharged. Try charging
assist in the brake and steering The switch stays in this position or jump starting the battery. See
systems and disable the airbags. when the engine is running. The Jump Starting on page 10-66
While driving, only shut the transmission is also unlocked in this
position. If you leave the key in the
vehicle off in an emergency.
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
Starting the Engine
position with the engine off, the Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, battery could be drained. You may N (Neutral). The engine will not start
and must be shut off while driving, not be able to start the vehicle if the in any other position. To restart the
turn the ignition to ACC/ battery is allowed to drain for an engine when the vehicle is already
ACCESSORY. extended period of time. moving, use N (Neutral) only.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is
the position in which you can
operate the electrical accessories or
items plugged into the accessory

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
turned to the START position,

{ Caution { Caution and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the
Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the If the steering wheel is turned engine will continue cranking for
vehicle is moving. If you do, you until it reaches the end of its a few seconds or until the
could damage the transmission. travel, and is held in that position vehicle starts. If the engine does
Shift to P (Park) only when the while starting the vehicle, damage not start and the key is held in
vehicle is stopped. may occur to the hydraulic power START, cranking will be stopped
steering system and there may be after 15 seconds to prevent
loss of power steering assist. cranking motor damage. To
prevent gear damage, this
{ Caution Starting Procedure system also prevents cranking if
If you add electrical parts or the engine is already running.
1. With your foot off the accelerator Engine cranking can be stopped
accessories, you could change pedal, turn the ignition to START. by turning the ignition switch to
the way the engine operates. Any When the engine starts, let go of the ACC/ACCESSORY or
resulting damage would not be the key. The idle speed will slow LOCK/OFF position.
covered by the vehicle warranty. down as the engine warms. Do
See Add-On Electrical Equipment
on page 9-54.
not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
{ Caution
engine and transmission gently Cranking the engine for long
to allow the oil to warm up and periods of time, by returning the
lubricate all moving parts. ignition to the START position
The vehicle has a immediately after cranking has
Computer-Controlled Cranking ended, can overheat and damage
System. This feature assists in the cranking motor, and drain the
starting the engine and protects (Continued)
components. If the ignition key is

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
engine and transmission gently reservoir. See Engine

Caution (Continued) until the oil warms up and Compartment Overview on
lubricates all moving parts. page 10-5.
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the 3. Plug the cord into a normal,
cranking motor cool down.
Engine Heater grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
The engine coolant heater can
2. If the engine does not start after
provide easier starting and better { Warning
fuel economy during engine
five to 10 seconds, especially in warm-up in cold weather conditions Plugging the cord into an
very cold weather (below −18°C at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles ungrounded outlet could cause an
or 0°F), it could be flooded with with an engine coolant heater electrical shock. Also, the wrong
too much gasoline. Try pushing should be plugged in at least four kind of extension cord could
the accelerator pedal all the way hours before starting. Some models overheat and cause a fire. You
to the floor and holding it there may have an internal thermostat in
as you hold the key in START could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord which will prevent engine the cord into a properly grounded
for up to a maximum of coolant heater operation at
15 seconds. Wait at least three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
temperatures above 0°F (−18°C). If the cord will not reach, use a
15 seconds between each try, to
allow the cranking motor to cool To Use the Engine Coolant heavy-duty three-prong extension
down. When the engine starts, Heater cord rated for at least 15 amps.
let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but 1. Turn off the engine.
4. Before starting the engine, be
then stops again, repeat these 2. Open the hood and unwrap the sure to unplug and store the
steps. This clears the extra electrical cord. The bundled cord cord as it was before to keep it
gasoline from the engine. Do not is located on the driver side of away from moving engine parts.
race the engine immediately the engine compartment, If you do not, it could be
after starting it. Operate the between the engine air cleaner damaged.
and the windshield washer fluid

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The length of time the heater should All these features will work when the Leaving the Vehicle with the
remain plugged in depends on key is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ Engine Running
several factors. Ask a dealer in the ACCESSORY positions.
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this. Shifting Into Park { Warning
1. Hold the brake pedal down and It can be dangerous to leave the
Retained Accessory set the parking brake. See vehicle with the engine running.
Power (RAP) Parking Brake on page 9-27 for It could overheat and catch fire.
These vehicle accessories can be more information. It is dangerous to get out of the
used for up to 10 minutes after the 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
ignition key is turned off: by holding in the button on the in P (Park) with the parking brake
. Audio System shift lever and pushing the shift firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
lever all the way toward the front Do not leave the vehicle when the
. Power Windows of the vehicle.
engine is running. If you have left
. Sunroof (if equipped) 3. Turn the ignition key to the engine running, the vehicle
Power to the windows and sunroof LOCK/OFF. can move suddenly. You or others
will work up to 10 minutes or until a 4. Remove the key and take it with could be injured. To be sure the
door is opened. you. If you can leave the vehicle vehicle will not move, even when
The radio continues to work for with the ignition key in your you are on fairly level ground,
10 minutes or until the driver door is hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). always set the parking brake and
opened. move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
For an additional 10 minutes of
page 9-19. If you are towing a
operation, close all the doors and
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
turn the key to ON/RUN and then
back to LOCK/OFF. and Towing Tips on page 9-47.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
If you have to leave the vehicle with If torque lock does occur, your If the vehicle has an uncharged
the engine running, be sure the vehicle may need to be pushed battery or a battery with low voltage,
vehicle is in P (Park) and the uphill by another vehicle to relieve try charging or jump starting the
parking brake is firmly set before the parking pawl pressure, so you battery. See Jump Starting on
you leave it. After you have moved can shift out of P (Park). page 10-66 for more information.
the shift lever into P (Park), hold the To shift out of P (Park):
regular brake pedal down. Then, Shifting out of Park
see if you can move the shift lever 1. Place the ignition in ON/RUN.
away from P (Park) without first The vehicle is equipped with an
electronic shift lock release system. 2. Apply the brake pedal.
pushing the button.
The shift lock release is 3. Press the shift lever button.
If you can, it means that the shift designed to:
lever was not fully locked in 4. Move the shift lever to the
P (Park).
. Prevent ignition key removal desired position.
unless the shift lever is in
If you still are unable to shift out of
Torque Lock P (Park) with the shift lever
P (Park):
Torque lock is when the weight of button fully released, and
. 1. Fully release the shift lever
the vehicle puts too much force on Prevent movement of the shift
button.
the parking pawl in the lever out of P (Park), unless the
transmission. This happens when ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ 2. While holding down the brake
parking on a hill and shifting the ACCESSORY and the regular pedal, press the shift lever
transmission into P (Park) is not brake pedal is applied. button again.
done properly and then it is difficult The shift lock release is always 3. Move the shift lever to the
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent functional except in the case of an desired position.
torque lock, set the parking brake uncharged or low voltage (less than
and then shift into P (Park). To find If you still cannot move the shift
9-volt) battery. lever from P (Park), see your dealer.
out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
listed previously.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Parking over Things Engine Exhaust Warning (Continued)

That Burn
{ Warning . There are holes or openings
{ Warning
Engine exhaust contains carbon
in the vehicle body from
damage or aftermarket
Things that can burn could touch monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
hot exhaust parts under the seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
vehicle and ignite. Do not park can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
over papers, leaves, dry grass, even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
or other things that can burn. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Running the Vehicle Automatic

While Parked
{ Warning
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
It is better not to park with the
engine running. vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
If the vehicle is left with the engine firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
running, follow the proper steps to
be sure the vehicle will not move. Do not leave the vehicle when the
See Shifting Into Park on page 9-19 engine is running. If you have left
and Engine Exhaust on page 9-21. the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others
If parking on a hill and pulling a
could be injured. To be sure the
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9-47. vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park on
P (Park): This position locks the page 9-19 and Driving
front wheels. It is the best position Characteristics and Towing Tips
to use when starting the engine on page 9-47.
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. With the ignition in ON/
RUN, fully apply the regular brake,

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
then press the button on the back of To rock the vehicle back and forth to
the shift lever before shifting from get out of snow, ice, or sand without { Caution
P (Park). If you cannot shift out of damaging the transmission, see If
P (Park), ease pressure on the shift the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-9. Shifting out of P (Park) or
lever, then push the shift lever all N (Neutral) with the engine
N (Neutral): In this position, the running at high speed may
the way into P (Park) as you engine does not connect with the
maintain brake application. Then damage the transmission. The
wheels. To restart the engine when repairs would not be covered by
press the shift lever button and the vehicle is already moving, use
move the shift lever into another the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
N (Neutral) only. Also, use
gear. See Shifting out of Park on engine is not running at high
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
page 9-20. speed when shifting the vehicle.
being towed.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up. { Warning D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the best
{ Caution Shifting into a drive gear while the fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
engine is running at high speed is
Shifting to R (Reverse) while the dangerous. Unless your foot is . Going less than 56 km/h
vehicle is moving forward could firmly on the brake pedal, the (35 mph), push the accelerator
damage the transmission. The vehicle could move very rapidly. pedal about halfway down.
repairs would not be covered by You could lose control and hit
the vehicle warranty. Shift to
. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
people or objects. Do not shift
more, push the accelerator all
R (Reverse) only after the vehicle into a drive gear while the engine the way down.
is stopped. is running at high speed.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Manual Mode To use this feature:

{ Caution 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).
Electronic Range Select
If the vehicle accelerates slowly, (ERS) Mode 2. Press the plus/minus button on
or does not shift gears, the the shift lever, to increase or
transmission could be damaged. ERS mode allows you to choose the decrease the gear range
Have the vehicle serviced top-gear limit of the transmission available.
right away. and the vehicle's speed while
driving downhill or towing a trailer. When you shift from D (Drive) to
The vehicle has an electronic shift L (Low), the transmission will shift to
If the vehicle is stopped on a hill, position indicator within the a pre-determined lower gear range.
with your foot off the brake pedal, instrument panel cluster. When The highest gear available for this
the vehicle may roll. This is normal using the ERS mode a number will pre-determined range is displayed
and is due to the torque converter display next to the L, indicating the next to the L in the DIC. See Driver
designed to improve fuel economy current gear that has been selected. Information Center (DIC) (With DIC
and performance. Use the brake to Buttons) on page 5-24 or Driver
hold the vehicle on a hill. Do not use Information Center (DIC) (Without
the accelerator pedal. DIC Buttons) on page 5-29 for more
information. The number displayed
L (Low): This position gives you
access to gear ranges. This in the DIC is the highest gear that
provides more engine braking but the transmission will be allowed to
operate in. This means that all
lower fuel economy than D (Drive).
gears below that number are
You can use it on very steep hills,
or in deep snow or mud. See available. For example, when
Manual Mode on page 9-24. 4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L,
1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are
automatically shifted by the vehicle.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The transmission will not shift into Tow/Haul Mode Automatic Engine Grade
5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is Braking
used or you shift back into D (Drive). _ (Tow/Haul): If equipped with
Tow/Haul mode, the button is on the Automatic Engine Grade Braking
While in L (Low), the transmission center stack under the climate assists when driving on a downhill
will prevent shifting to a lower gear controls. grade. It maintains vehicle speed by
range if the engine speed is too automatically implementing a shift
high. You have a brief period of time Push the button to activate the
schedule that uses the engine and
to slow the vehicle. If vehicle speed system. Push it again to deactivate
the transmission to slow the vehicle.
is not reduced within the time the system. You can use this feature
The system will automatically
allowed, the lower gear range shift to assist when towing or hauling a
command downshifts to reduce
will not be completed. You must heavy load.
vehicle speed, until the brake pedal
further slow the vehicle, then press When Tow/Haul is activated, the is no longer being pressed.
the − (Minus) button to the desired Tow/Haul symbol will come on in the
lower gear range. While in the Electronic Range
instrument cluster. See “Tow/Haul
Select (ERS) mode, grade braking
Automatic Engine Grade Braking is Mode” under Driving Characteristics
is deactivated, allowing the driver to
not available when the ERS is and Towing Tips on page 9-47.
select a range and limiting the
active. It is available in D (Drive) for highest gear available. Grade
both normal and Tow/Haul mode. braking is available for normal
While using the ERS, cruise control driving and in Tow/Haul mode.
and the Tow/Haul mode can be
used. See Tow/Haul Mode following. See Automatic Transmission on
page 9-22.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Drive Systems Brakes If driving safely on a wet road and it

becomes necessary to slam on the
brakes and continue braking to
All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake avoid a sudden obstacle, a
Vehicles with this feature transfer System (ABS) computer senses that the wheels
engine power, as required, to all are slowing down. If one of the
This vehicle has ABS, an advanced
four wheels. It is fully automatic, and wheels is about to stop rolling, the
electronic braking system that helps
adjusts itself as needed for road computer will separately work the
prevent a braking skid.
conditions. brakes at each wheel.
When the vehicle begins to drive
When using a compact spare tire on ABS can change the brake pressure
away, ABS checks itself.
an AWD vehicle, the system to each wheel, as required, faster
A momentary motor or clicking noise
automatically detects the compact than any driver could. This can help
might be heard while this test is
spare and reduces AWD you steer around the obstacle while
going on, and it might even be
performance to protect the system. braking hard.
noticed that the brake pedal moves
To restore full AWD operation and a little. This is normal. As the brakes are applied, the
prevent excessive wear on the computer keeps receiving updates
system, replace the compact spare on wheel speed and controls
with a full-size tire as soon as braking pressure accordingly.
possible. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 10-65. Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
If there is a problem with ABS, this close to the vehicle in front of you,
warning light stays on. See Antilock there will not be enough time to
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light apply the brakes if that vehicle
on page 5-20.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
suddenly slows or stops. Always Parking Brake

leave enough room up ahead to { Caution
stop, even with ABS.
Driving with the parking brake on
Using ABS can overheat the brake system
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold and cause premature wear or
the brake pedal down firmly and let damage to brake system parts.
ABS work. You might hear the ABS Make sure that the parking brake
pump or motor operating and feel is fully released and the brake
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is warning light is off before driving.
normal.
Braking in Emergencies To release the parking brake, hold
the regular brake pedal down, then
ABS allows you to steer and brake push down momentarily on the
at the same time. In many parking brake pedal until you feel
emergencies, steering can help To set the parking brake, hold the
the pedal release. Slowly pull your
more than even the very best regular brake pedal down, then
foot up off the parking brake pedal.
braking. push the parking brake pedal down.
If the parking brake is not released
If the ignition is on, the brake when you begin to drive, the brake
system warning light will come on. system warning light will be on and
See Brake System Warning Light on a chime will sound warning you that
page 5-19. the parking brake is still on.
If you are towing a trailer and are
parking on a hill, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 9-47.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Brake Assist Hill Start Assist (HSA) Ride Control Systems

This vehicle has a brake assist This vehicle has an HSA feature,
feature designed to assist the driver which may be useful when the Traction Control/
in stopping or decreasing vehicle vehicle is stopped on a grade. This Electronic Stability
speed in emergency driving feature is designed to prevent the
conditions. This feature vehicle from rolling, either forward or Control
automatically uses the stability rearward, during vehicle drive off. System Operation
system hydraulic brake control After the driver completely stops
module to supplement the power and holds the vehicle in a complete The vehicle has a Traction Control
brake system under conditions standstill on a grade, HSA will be System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, an
where the driver has quickly and automatically activated. During the electronic stability control system.
forcefully applied the brake pedal in transition period between when the These systems help limit wheel slip
an attempt to quickly stop or slow driver releases the brake pedal and and assist the driver in maintaining
down the vehicle. The stability starts to accelerate to drive off on a control, especially on slippery road
system hydraulic brake control grade, HSA holds the braking conditions.
module increases brake pressure at pressure for a maximum of TCS activates if it senses that any
each corner of the vehicle until the two seconds to ensure that there is of the drive wheels are spinning or
ABS activates. Minor brake pedal no rolling. The brakes will beginning to lose traction. When this
pulsation or pedal movement during automatically release when the happens, TCS applies the brakes to
this time is normal and the driver accelerator pedal is applied within the spinning wheels and reduces
should continue to apply the brake the two-second window. It will not engine power to limit wheel spin.
pedal as the driving situation activate if the vehicle is in a drive
dictates. The brake assist feature gear and facing downhill, or if the StabiliTrak activates when the
will automatically disengage when vehicle is facing uphill and in vehicle senses a difference between
the brake pedal is released or brake R (Reverse). the intended path and the direction
pedal pressure is quickly the vehicle is actually traveling.
decreased. StabiliTrak selectively applies
braking pressure to any one of the

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
vehicle wheel brakes to assist the If d comes on and stays on:

driver in keeping the vehicle on the
intended path. 1. Stop the vehicle.
If cruise control is being used and 2. Turn the engine off and wait
traction control or StabiliTrak begins 15 seconds.
to limit wheel spin, cruise control will 3. Start the engine.
disengage. Cruise control may be The indicator light for both systems
turned back on when road is in the instrument cluster. This Drive the vehicle. If d comes on
conditions allow. light will: and stays on, the vehicle may need
more time to diagnose the problem.
Both systems come on . Flash when TCS is limiting
If the condition persists, see your
automatically when the vehicle is wheel spin.
dealer.
started and begins to move. The . Flash when StabiliTrak is
systems may be heard or felt while activated. Turning the Systems Off
they are operating or while and On
performing diagnostic checks. This
. Turn on and stay on when either
is normal and does not mean there system is not working.
is a problem with the vehicle. If either system fails to turn on or to
It is recommended to leave both activate, a message displays in the
systems on for normal driving Driver Information Center (DIC), and
conditions, but it may be necessary d comes on and stays on to
to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets indicate that the system is inactive
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. and is not assisting the driver in The button for TCS and StabiliTrak
See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on maintaining control. The vehicle is is on the center stack.
page 9-9 and “Turning the Systems safe to drive, but driving should be
Off and On” later in this section. adjusted accordingly.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Cruise Control If the Traction Control System (TCS)

{ Caution or StabiliTrak system begins to limit
With cruise control, a speed of wheel spin while cruise control is
Do not repeatedly brake or about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can being used, the cruise control will
accelerate heavily when TCS is be maintained without keeping your disengage. See Traction Control/
off. The vehicle driveline could be foot on the accelerator. Cruise Electronic Stability Control on
damaged. control does not work at speeds page 9-28. If a collision alert occurs
below about 40 km/h (25 mph). when cruise control is activated,
To turn off TCS and StabiliTrak, When the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged. See
Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
press and release the 4 button. The cruise control is disengaged.
System on page 9-32. When road
appropriate message displays in the conditions allow you to safely use it
DIC. To turn TCS and StabiliTrak on { Warning again, the cruise control can be
again, press and release the 4 turned on.
button. The appropriate message Cruise control can be dangerous
displays in the DIC. See Ride where you cannot drive safely at
Control System Messages on a steady speed. Do not use the
page 5-38. cruise control on winding roads or
in heavy traffic.
If TCS is limiting wheel spin when
the 4 button is pressed, the system Cruise control can be dangerous
will not turn off until the wheels stop on slippery roads. On such roads,
spinning. fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
Adding accessories can affect the you could lose control. Do not use
vehicle performance. See cruise control on slippery roads.
Accessories and Modifications on
page 10-2.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise The cruise control light on the Increasing Speed While Using
control on and off. The indicator instrument cluster comes on after Cruise Control
light on the button comes on when the cruise control has been set to If the cruise control system is
the cruise control is on. the desired speed. already activated:
+RES (Resume/Accelerate): 1. PressI to turn the cruise . Press and hold the +RES button
Press briefly to make the vehicle control system on. on the steering wheel until the
resume to a previously set speed, desired speed is reached, then
2. Get up to the speed desired.
or press and hold to accelerate. release it.
If cruise control is already active, 3. Press and release the SET–
use to increase vehicle speed. button on the steering wheel.
. To increase vehicle speed in
small increments, press the
SET–: Press briefly to set the 4. Remove foot from the +RES button briefly. Each time
speed and activate cruise control. accelerator. this is done, the vehicle goes
If cruise control is already active, about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
Resuming a Set Speed
use to decrease vehicle speed.
If the cruise control is set at a Reducing Speed While Using
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage
desired speed and then the brakes Cruise Control
cruise control without erasing the
are applied, the cruise control is If the cruise control system is
set speed from memory.
disengaged without erasing the set already activated:
Setting Cruise Control speed from memory. . Press and hold the SET– button
If the cruise button is on when not in Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h on the steering wheel until the
use, it could get bumped and go into (25 mph) or greater, press the +RES lower speed desired is reached,
cruise when not desired. Keep the button on the steering wheel. The then release it.
cruise control switch off when cruise vehicle returns to the previously set
is not being used. speed.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. To slow down in small Using Cruise Control on Hills
increments, press the SET– Driver Assistance
How well the cruise control will work
button briefly. Each time this is
on hills depends upon the vehicle
Systems
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower. speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, Forward Collision Alert
Passing Another Vehicle While you might have to step on the (FCA) System
Using Cruise Control accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle speed. When going If equipped, the FCA system may
Use the accelerator pedal to help to avoid or reduce the harm
increase the vehicle speed. When downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to keep the caused by front-end crashes. FCA
you take your foot off the pedal, the provides a red flashing visual alert
vehicle will slow down to the vehicle speed down. When the
brakes are applied the cruise control and beeps when approaching a
previously set cruise speed. While vehicle directly ahead too quickly.
pressing the accelerator pedal or is disengaged.
FCA also provides a visual alert if
shortly following the release to Ending Cruise Control following another vehicle much too
override cruise control, briefly closely.
pressing the SET– button will result There are three ways to end cruise
in cruise control set to the current control: The forward-looking FCA camera
vehicle speed. . Step lightly on the brake pedal. sensor is on the windshield ahead
of the rearview mirror. FCA detects
. Press the [ button. vehicles within a distance of
approximately 60 m (197 ft) and
. To turn off the cruise control, operates at speeds above 40 km/h
press T on the steering wheel. (25 mph).
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory by pressing
T or if the ignition is turned off.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The green vehicle ahead indicator

{ Warning will appear when a vehicle is Warning (Continued)
detected ahead. Whenever this
FCA is a warning system and indicator does not appear, FCA will proper condition. Keep the
does not apply the brakes. When not respond. The indicator may windshield, headlamps, and FCA
approaching a slower-moving or disappear on curves, highway exit sensors clean and in good repair.
stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, ramps, or hills, or due to poor
or when following a vehicle too visibility. The FCA system will not Tailgating Alert
closely, FCA may not provide a detect another vehicle ahead until it
warning with enough time to help is completely in the driving lane. The green vehicle ahead indicator
avoid a crash. FCA does not warn will turn amber if the vehicle ahead
remains much too close.
of pedestrians, animals, signs,
guardrails, bridges, construction
{ Warning
Collision Alert
barrels, or other objects. Be ready FCA does not provide a warning
to take action and apply the to help avoid a crash, unless it
brakes. For more information, see detects a vehicle. FCA may not
Defensive Driving on page 9-3. detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA
sensor is blocked by dirt, snow,
or ice, or if the windshield is
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
damaged. It may also not detect a
vehicle on winding or hilly roads, When your vehicle approaches
or in conditions that can limit another vehicle too rapidly, this red
visibility such as fog, rain, FCA display will flash and eight
or snow, or if the headlamps or beeps will sound from the front.
windshield are not cleaned or in When this occurs, the brake system
(Continued) prepares for driver braking to occur

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
more rapidly. Continue to apply the Unnecessary Alerts avoiding objects while in
brake pedal as the driving situation R (Reverse). URPA operates at
FCA may provide unnecessary
dictates. speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
alerts to turning vehicles, vehicles in
The sensors on the rear bumper are
Selecting the Alert Timing other lanes, objects that are not
used to detect objects up to
vehicles, or shadows. These alerts
Press the collision alert button, [, 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and
are normal operation and the
on the center stack to set the alert at least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground
vehicle does not need service.
timing to far, medium, near, or off. and below liftgate level. Detection
The first button press shows the Other Messages distances may be less during
current control setting on the DIC. warmer or humid weather.
There are messages that may
Additional button presses will appear on the Driver Information
change this setting. The chosen Center (DIC) in the instrument { Warning
setting will remain until it is changed cluster to provide information about
and will affect both the Collision The URPA system does not
FCA. See Object Detection System
Alert and the Tailgating Alert detect children, pedestrians,
Messages on page 5-36.
features. The timing of both alerts bicyclists, animals, or objects
will vary based on vehicle speed. Cleaning the System below the bumper or that are too
The faster the vehicle speed, the If the FCA system does not seem to close or too far from the vehicle.
further away the alert will occur. operate properly, clean the outside It is not available at speeds
Consider traffic and weather of the windshield area in front of the greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To
conditions when selecting the alert camera sensor before considering prevent injury, death, or vehicle
timing. The range of selectable alert taking the vehicle in for service. damage, even with URPA, always
timing may not be appropriate for all check the area around the vehicle
drivers and driving conditions. and check all mirrors before
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
backing.
If available, the Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) system
assists the driver with parking and

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
How the System Works When the System Does Not

. A trailer was attached to the
Seem to Work Properly vehicle, or an object was
URPA comes on automatically when hanging out of the liftgate during
the shift lever is moved into The following messages may be the last drive cycle. Once the
R (Reverse). A single beep sounds displayed on the DIC: object is removed, URPA will
to indicate the system is working. return to normal operation.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this
An obstacle is indicated by audible message occurs, take the vehicle to . A tow bar is attached to the
beeps. The interval between the your dealer to repair the system. vehicle.
beeps becomes shorter as the
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE . The bumper is damaged. Take
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
OWNERS MANUAL: This the vehicle to your dealer to
When the distance is less than
message can occur under the repair the system.
30 cm (12 in) the beeping is
following conditions:
continuous for five seconds. . Other conditions, such as
. The ultrasonic sensors are not vibrations from a jackhammer or
Turning the System On and Off clean. Keep the vehicle's rear the compression of air brakes on
The system can be disabled through bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, a very large truck, are affecting
the Driver Information Center (DIC). ice, and slush. For cleaning system performance.
See “Park Assist” under Driver instructions, see Exterior Care
Information Center (DIC) (With DIC on page 10-73.
Buttons) on page 5-24 or Driver . The park assist sensors are
Information Center (DIC) (Without covered by frost or ice. Frost or
DIC Buttons) on page 5-29 for more ice can form around and behind
information. the sensors and may not always
Turn off URPA when towing a trailer. be seen; this can occur after
washing the vehicle in cold
URPA defaults to the on setting weather. The message may not
each time the vehicle is started. clear until the frost or ice has
melted.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Side Blind Zone SBZA Detection Zones over that is in the side blind zone.
This indicates it may be unsafe to
Alert (SBZA) change lanes. Before making a lane
If equipped, the Side Blind Zone change, check the SBZA display,
Alert system is a lane-changing aid check mirrors, glance over your
that assists drivers with avoiding shoulder, and use the turn signals.
crashes that occur with vehicles in
the side blind zone (or spot) areas.
The SBZA warning display will light
up in the corresponding outside side
mirror and will flash if the turn signal
is on.
Left Side Mirror Right Side Mirror
{ Warning Display Display
The SBZA sensor covers a zone of
SBZA does not detect vehicles approximately one lane over from When the vehicle is started, both
rapidly approaching outside of the both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m outside mirror SBZA displays will
side blind zones, pedestrians, (11 ft). The height of the zone is briefly come on to indicate the
bicyclists, or animals. Failure to approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) system is operating. When the
use proper care when changing and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. This vehicle is moving forward, the left-
lanes may result in injury, death, zone starts at approximately the or right-side mirror display will light
middle of the vehicle and goes back up if a vehicle is detected in that
or vehicle damage. Before
5 m (16 ft). blind zone. If the turn signal is
making a lane change, always
activated in the same direction of a
check mirrors, glance over your How the System Works detected vehicle, this display will
shoulder, and use the turn flash as an extra warning not to
signals. The SBZA symbol lights up in the
change lanes.
side mirrors when the system
detects a vehicle in the next lane

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
SBZA can be disabled through the SBZA may not always alert the When SBZA is disabled for any
Driver Information Center (DIC). See driver to vehicles in the side blind reason other than the driver turning
Driver Information Center (DIC) zone, especially in wet conditions. it off, the Side Blind Zone Alert ON
(With DIC Buttons) on page 5-24 or The system does not need to be option will not be available on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) serviced. The system may light up DIC menu.
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 5-29. due to guardrails, signs, trees,
If SBZA is disabled by the driver, shrubs, and other non-moving FCC Information
the SBZA mirror displays will not objects. This is normal system See Radio Frequency Statement on
light up. operation; the vehicle does not need page 13-15.
service.
When the System Does Not
Seem to Work Properly SBZA may not operate when the Rear Vision
SBZA sensors in the left or right Camera (RVC)
SBZA displays may not come on corners of the rear bumper are
when passing a vehicle quickly or covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, The vehicle may have an RVC
when towing a trailer. Keep in mind or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For system. Read this entire section
the SBZA detection zones that cleaning instructions, see "Washing before using it.
extend back from the side of the the Vehicle" under Exterior Care on
vehicle do not move further back page 10-73. If the DIC still displays { Warning
when a trailer is towed. Use extra the SIDE DETECTION SYS
caution while changing lanes when TEMPORARILY OFF message after The RVC system does not display
towing a trailer. SBZA may alert you cleaning both sides of the vehicle children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
to objects attached to the vehicle, toward the rear corners of the animals, or any other object
such as a trailer, bicycle, or object vehicle, see your dealer. located outside the camera's field
extending out to either side of the of view, below the bumper,
vehicle. This is normal system If the SBZA displays do not light up
when vehicles are in the blind zone or under the vehicle. Perceived
operation; the vehicle does not need distances may be different from
service. and the system is clean, the system
may need service. Take the vehicle (Continued)
to your dealer.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
shifts out of R (Reverse), the video R (Reverse), the video image

Warning (Continued) image automatically disappears automatically appears on the
from the inside rearview mirror. infotainment screen. Once the driver
actual distances. Do not back the shifts out of R (Reverse), the screen
vehicle using only the RVC Turning the Rear Vision Camera will go back to the last screen that
screen, during longer, higher System Off or On
had been displayed, after a delay.
speed backing maneuvers, To turn off the rear vision camera
or where there could be cross Turning the Rear Vision Camera
system, press and hold z , located System On or Off
traffic. Failure to use proper care on the inside rearview mirror, until
before backing may result in the left indicator light turns off. The To turn the rear vision camera
injury, death, or vehicle damage. rear vision camera display is now system on or off:
Always check behind and around disabled. 1. Shift into P (Park).
the vehicle before backing.
To turn the rear vision camera 2. Press the Settings menu button
system on again, press and hold z on the Home screen of the
Vehicles with RVC on the until the left indicator light infotainment system.
Rearview Mirror illuminates. The rear vision camera 3. Select the Rear Camera screen
The rear vision camera system is system display is now enabled and button. The Rear Camera screen
designed to help the driver when the display will appear in the mirror displays.
backing up by displaying a view of normally.
4. Select Rear Camera display and
the area behind the vehicle. When
Vehicles with RVC on the then select ON or OFF.
the key is in the ON/RUN position
and the driver shifts the vehicle into Infotainment System
R (Reverse), the video image The rear vision camera system is
automatically appears on the inside designed to help the driver when
rearview mirror. Once the driver backing up by displaying a view of
the area behind the vehicle. When
the driver shifts the vehicle into

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The RVC display remains on after To turn the symbols on or off: Use caution while backing up when
shifting out of R (Reverse) for 1. Shift into P (Park). towing a trailer, as the RCTA
approximately 10 seconds. Return to detection zones that extend out
the previous screen sooner by 2. Press the Settings menu button from the back of your vehicle do not
performing one of the following: on the Home screen of the move further back when a trailer is
infotainment system. towed.
. Press a hard key on the
infotainment system. 3. Select the Rear Camera screen The RCTA system can be disabled
button. The Rear Camera screen through the Driver Information
. Shift into P (Park). displays. Center (DIC). See Driver
. Reach a vehicle speed of 4. Select Park Assist Symbols and Information Center (DIC) (With DIC
8 km/h (5 mph). then select ON or OFF. Buttons) on page 5-24 or Driver
Symbols Information Center (DIC) (Without
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) DIC Buttons) on page 5-29.
The RVC system may have a On vehicles with RCTA, a red
feature that lets the driver view Rear Vision Camera Location
warning triangle with an arrow may
caution symbols on the RVC screen also display on the RVC screen to The camera is located above the
while using the rear vision camera. warn of traffic coming from either license plate.
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist direction, behind the vehicle. When
(URPA) system must not be The area displayed by the camera is
an object is detected, three beeps limited and does not display objects
disabled to use these symbols. See sound on the left or right side,
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on that are close to either corner or
depending on the direction of the under the bumper. The area
page 9-34. detected vehicle. This system displayed can vary depending on
The caution symbols appear when detects objects coming from up to vehicle orientation or road
an object has been detected by the 20 m (65 ft) from the left or right side conditions. Displayed images may
URPA system. The symbol may behind the vehicle. be farther or closer than they
cover the object when viewing the appear.
RVC screen.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The following illustrations show the 2. Corner of the rear bumper. camera and its position and
field of view that the camera mounting angle checked at your
provides. When the System Does Not dealer.
Seem To Work Properly . There are extreme temperature
The rear vision camera system changes.
might not work properly or display a
clear image if: The rear vision camera system
display in the rearview mirror may
. The RVC is turned off. See turn off or not appear as expected
“Turning the Rear Camera due to one of the following
System On or Off” earlier in this conditions. If this occurs the left
section. indicator light on the mirror will
. It is dark. flash.
. The sun or the beam of . A slow flash may indicate a loss
headlights is shining directly into of video signal, or no video
the camera lens. signal present during the reverse
1. View displayed by the camera. cycle.
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens. . A fast flash may indicate that the
Clean the lens, rinse it with display has been on for the
water, and wipe it with a soft maximum allowable time during
cloth. a reverse cycle, or the display
has reached an Over
. The back of the vehicle is in an Temperature limit.
accident. The position and
mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can
be affected. Be sure to have the
1. View displayed by the camera.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
The fast flash conditions are

used to protect the video device { Warning Warning (Continued)
from high temperature
conditions. Once conditions The LDW system is an aid to help and maintain proper vehicle
return to normal the device will the vehicle stay in the driving position within the lane, or vehicle
reset and the green indicator will lane. It does not steer the vehicle. damage, injury, or death could
stop flashing. The LDW system may not: occur. Always keep the
. Provide enough time to avoid windshield clean and do not use
During any of these fault conditions, LDW in bad weather conditions.
the display will be blank and the a crash.
indicator will continue to flash as . Detect lane markings under
long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) bad weather conditions or if When the vehicle crosses a
or until the conditions return to the windshield is dirty. detected lane marking, the LDW
normal. indicator will flash and three beeps
. Detect lane markings and will will sound from the left or right side,
Pressing and holding z when the not detect road edges. depending on the lane departure
left indicator light is flashing will turn . Warn that the vehicle is direction. LDW will not warn if the
off the video display along with the crossing a lane marking if the turn signal is on or if a sharp
left indicator light. system does not detect the maneuver is made.
lane marking.
Lane Departure How the System Works
If LDW only detects lane
Warning (LDW) markings on one side of the road,
The LDW camera sensor is on the
windshield ahead of the rearview
The vehicle may have an LDW it will only warn you when mirror.
system. Read this entire section departing the lane on the side
before using the system. where it has detected a lane To turn LDW on and off, press @ on
marker. Even with LDW, always the center stack, forward of the shift
keep your attention on the road lever. The control indicator will light
(Continued) when LDW is on.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
When the System Does Not

Seem To Work Properly Warning (Continued)
If the LDW symbol does not appear: also not detect a lane on winding
. The lane markings on the road or hilly roads, or in conditions that
may not be seen. can limit visibility such as fog,
rain, or snow, or if the headlamps
When the vehicle is started, the . The camera sensor may be or windshield are not cleaned or
LDW indicator will come on briefly. blocked by dirt, snow, or ice. in proper condition. Keep the
LDW operates at speeds of 56 km . The windshield may be windshield, headlamps, and
(35 mph) or greater. If LDW is on, damaged. camera sensors clean and in
the LDW indicator will appear green good repair.
if the system detects a left or right
. The weather may be limiting
lane marking. This indicator will visibility.
change to amber, flash, and sound This is normal operation; the vehicle LDW warnings may occasionally
three beeps if the vehicle crosses a does not need service. Clean the occur due to tar marks, shadows,
detected lane marking without using windshield. cracks in the road, or other road
the turn signal. These beeps will imperfections. This is normal system
operation; the vehicle does not need
sound from the left or right side,
depending on the lane departure
{ Warning service.
direction. LDW does not provide a warning
to help avoid a crash, unless it
detects the lane markings. LDW
may not detect the lane markings
if the camera sensor is blocked
by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the
windshield is damaged. It may
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Fuel Recommended Fuel then they are acceptable to use.

However, E85 and other fuels
Use of the recommended fuel is an Use regular unleaded gasoline with containing more than 15% ethanol
important part of the proper a posted octane rating of 87 or must be used only in FlexFuel
maintenance of this vehicle. To help higher. If the octane rating is less vehicles.
keep the engine clean and maintain than 87, an audible knocking noise
may be heard. If this occurs, use a
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend using TOP TIER gasoline rated at 87 octane or { Caution
Detergent Gasolines. See higher as soon as possible. If heavy Do not use fuel containing
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP knocking is heard when using methanol. It can corrode metal
TIER Detergent Gasolines. gasoline with a higher octane rating,
parts in the fuel system and also
the engine needs service.
damage plastic and rubber parts.
Use of Seasonal Fuels That damage would not be
Use summer and winter fuels in the covered under the vehicle
appropriate season. Driving or warranty.
starting could be affected if the
incorrect fuel is used. Drive the Some gasolines that are not
vehicle with the engine running until reformulated for low emissions can
the fuel is a half tank or less, then contain an octane-enhancing
refuel with the current seasonal fuel. additive called
Prohibited Fuels methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use
Gasolines containing oxygenates, gasolines with MMT as they can
such as ethers and ethanol, as well reduce spark plug life and affect
as reformulated gasolines are emission control system
available in some cities. If these performance. The malfunction
gasolines comply with the indicator lamp may turn on. If this
previously described specification, occurs, see your dealer for service.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Gasoline Specifications vehicle may not pass a smog-check Fuel Additives

test. See Malfunction Indicator
At a minimum, gasoline should meet Lamp on page 5-17. If this occurs, To keep fuel systems clean, TOP
ASTM specification D 4814. Some return to your authorized dealer for TIER Detergent Gasoline is
gasolines contain an diagnosis. If it is determined that the recommended. See Fuel on
octane-enhancing additive called condition is caused by the type of page 9-43.
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese fuel used, repairs may not be If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend covered by the vehicle warranty. not available, one bottle of Fuel
against the use of gasolines System Treatment PLUS, part
containing MMT. See “Prohibited Fuels in Foreign number 88861013, added to the fuel
Fuels" in Recommended Fuel on tank at every engine oil change, can
page 9-43. Countries
help. Fuel System Treatment PLUS
If planning to drive in countries is the only gasoline additive
California Fuel outside the U.S. or Canada, the recommended by General Motors.
Requirements proper fuel might be hard to find. It is available at your dealer.
Check regional auto club or fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet retail brand websites for availability
California Emissions Standards, it is Filling the Tank
in the country where driving. Never
designed to operate on fuels that use leaded gasoline, fuel containing
meet California specifications. See methanol, or any other fuel not { Warning
the underhood emission control recommended. Costly repairs
label. If this fuel is not available in Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn
caused by use of improper fuel
states adopting California Emissions would not be covered by the vehicle violently and can cause injury or
Standards, the vehicle will operate warranty. death.
satisfactorily on fuels meeting (Continued)
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
To remove the fuel cap, turn it

Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued) slowly counterclockwise. The fuel
cap has a spring in it; if the cap is
. To help avoid injuries to you wait for any hiss noise to stop released too soon, it will spring back
and others, read and follow then unscrew the cap all to the right.
all the instructions on the fuel the way
pump island. While refueling, hang the tethered
.
fuel cap from the hook on the
Turn off the engine when The tethered fuel cap is located fuel door.
refueling. behind a hinged fuel door on the
driver side of the vehicle. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
. Keep sparks, flames, and top off or overfill the tank and wait a
smoking materials away To open the fuel door, push the few seconds after you have finished
from fuel. rearward center edge in and release pumping before removing the
. Do not leave the fuel pump and it will open. nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
unattended. surfaces as soon as possible. See
. Do not reenter the vehicle Exterior Care on page 10-73.
while pumping fuel. When replacing the fuel cap, turn it
. Keep children away from the clockwise until it clicks. Make sure
fuel pump and never let the cap is fully installed. The
children pump fuel. diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or
. Fuel can spray out if the fuel improperly installed. This would
cap is opened too quickly. allow fuel to evaporate into the
This spray can happen if the atmosphere. See Malfunction
tank is nearly full, and is Indicator Lamp on page 5-17.
more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Filling a Portable Fuel

{ Warning Container
Warning (Continued)
If a fire starts while you are
. Place the container on the
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
{ Warning ground.
shutting off the pump or by Filling a portable fuel container . Place the nozzle inside the fill
notifying the station attendant. while it is in the vehicle can cause opening of the container
Leave the area immediately. fuel vapors that can ignite either before dispensing fuel, and
by static electricity or other keep it in contact with the fill
means. You or others could be opening until filling is
badly burned and the vehicle complete.
{ Caution could be damaged. Always: . Fill the container no more
If a new fuel cap is needed, be . Use approved fuel than 95% full to allow for
sure to get the right type of cap containers. expansion.
from your dealer. The wrong type . Remove the container from . Do not smoke, light matches,
of fuel cap might not fit properly, the vehicle, trunk, or pickup or use lighters while
might cause the malfunction bed before filling. pumping fuel.
indicator lamp to light, and could . Avoid using cell phones or
(Continued)
damage the fuel tank and other electronic devices.
emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5-17.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. Do not tow a trailer during the
Trailer Towing first 800 km (500 mi), to prevent Warning (Continued)
damage to the engine, axle or
General Towing other parts. . Do not drive with the liftgate,
Information trunk/hatch, or rear-most
. Then, during the first 800 km window open.
Only use towing equipment that has (500 mi) trailer towing, do not
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and . Fully open the air outlets on
been designed for the vehicle.
do not make starts at full throttle. or under the instrument
Contact your dealer or trailering
panel.
dealer for assistance with preparing . The vehicle can tow in D (Drive)
the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read but M (Manual Mode) is . Also adjust the Climate
the entire section before towing a recommended. See Manual Control system to a setting
trailer. Mode on page 9-24. Use a lower that brings in only outside air.
gear if the transmission shifts See “Climate Control
For towing a disabled vehicle, see
too often. Systems” in the Index.
Towing the Vehicle on page 10-70.
For towing the vehicle behind . Turn off Park Assist when For more information about
another vehicle such as a motor towing. Carbon Monoxide, see Engine
home, see Recreational Vehicle Exhaust on page 9-21.
Towing on page 10-70.
{ Warning
Towing a trailer requires a certain
Driving Characteristics When towing a trailer, exhaust amount of experience. The
and Towing Tips gases may collect at the rear of combination you are driving is
the vehicle and enter if the longer and not as responsive as the
Driving with a Trailer liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
When towing a trailer: window is open. the handling and braking of the rig
When towing a trailer: before setting out for the open road.
. Become familiar with the state
and local laws that apply (Continued)
specifically to trailer towing.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Before starting, check all trailer hitch Following Distance Making Turns
parts and attachments, safety
Stay at least twice as far behind the
chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirrors. If the trailer has
vehicle ahead as you would when { Caution
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
electric brakes, start the Making very sharp turns while
This can help to avoid situations
combination moving and then apply trailering could cause the trailer to
that require heavy braking and
the trailer brake controller by hand come in contact with the vehicle.
sudden turns.
to be sure the brakes work. The vehicle could be damaged.
During the trip, check occasionally Passing Avoid making very sharp turns
to be sure that the load is secure More passing distance is needed while trailering.
and the lamps and any trailer when towing a trailer. Because the
brakes still work. rig is longer, it is necessary to go When turning with a trailer, make
Towing with a Stability Control farther beyond the passed vehicle wider turns than normal so the
before returning to the lane. trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
System
Backing Up curbs, road signs, trees or other
When towing, the sound of the objects. Use the turn signal well in
stability control system might be Hold the bottom of the steering advance and avoid jerky or sudden
heard. The system is reacting to the wheel with one hand. To move the maneuvers.
vehicle movement caused by the trailer to the left, move your hand to
trailer, which mainly occurs during the left. To move the trailer to the Turn Signals When Towing a
cornering. This is normal when right, move your hand to the right. Trailer
towing heavier trailers. Always back up slowly and, The turn signal indicators on the
if possible, have someone instrument cluster flash whenever
guide you. signaling a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
lamps also flash, telling other normal altitudes. If the engine is If parking the rig on a hill:
drivers the vehicle is turning, turned off immediately after towing 1. Press the brake pedal, but do
changing lanes or stopping. at high altitude on steep uphill not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
When towing a trailer, the arrows on grades, the vehicle could show the wheels into the curb if facing
the instrument cluster flash for turns signs similar to engine overheating. downhill or into traffic if facing
even if the bulbs on the trailer are To avoid this, let the engine run uphill.
burned out. Check occasionally to while parked, preferably on level
ground, with the transmission in 2. Have someone place chocks
be sure the trailer bulbs are still under the trailer wheels.
working. P (Park) for a few minutes before
turning the engine off. If the 3. When the wheel chocks are in
Driving on Grades overheat warning comes on, see place, release the brake pedal
Engine Overheating on page 10-16. until the chocks absorb the load.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before starting down a long or Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
steep downgrade. If the apply the parking brake and shift
transmission is not shifted down, the
brakes might have to be used so
{ Warning into P (Park).
much that they would get hot and no 5. Release the brake pedal.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with
longer work well. the trailer attached can be Leaving After Parking on a Hill
The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). dangerous. If something goes 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
Use a lower gear if the transmission wrong, the rig could start to move. while you:
shifts too often. People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
. Start the engine.
The Tow/Haul Mode may be used if
the transmission shifts too often. damaged. When possible, always . Shift into a gear.
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-25. park the rig on a flat surface. . Release the parking brake.
When towing at high altitude on 2. Let up on the brake pedal.
steep uphill grades, engine coolant
boils at a lower temperature than at

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is Trailer Towing Maximum trailer weight is calculated
clear of the chocks. assuming only the driver is in the
Three important considerations tow vehicle and it has all the
4. Stop and have someone pick up have to do with weight:
and store the chocks. required trailering equipment. The
. The weight of the trailer. weight of additional optional
Maintenance When Trailer equipment, passengers and cargo in
. The weight of the trailer tongue. the tow vehicle must be subtracted
Towing
. The total weight on the vehicle's from the maximum trailer weight.
The vehicle needs service more tires.
often when pulling a trailer. See the Use the following chart to determine
Maintenance Schedule on Weight of the Trailer how much the vehicle can weigh,
page 11-3. Things that are based upon the vehicle model and
How heavy can a trailer safely be? options.
especially important in trailer
operation are automatic Speed, altitude, road grades,
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle outside temperature, special
lubricant, belts, cooling system and equipment, and the amount of
brake system. Inspect these before tongue weight the vehicle can carry
and during the trip. must be considered. See “Weight of
the Trailer Tongue” later in this
Check periodically to see that all
section for more information.
hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer
Towing
The cooling system may temporarily
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 10-16.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

Front-Wheel Drive 907 kg (2,000 lb) 3 402 kg (7,500 lb)
Front-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 2 359 kg (5,200 lb) 4 649 kg (10,250 lb)
All-Wheel Drive 907 kg (2,000 lb) 3 493 kg (7,700 lb)
All-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 2 359 kg (5,200 lb) 4 740 kg (10,450 lb)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for trailering If there are a lot of options,

information or advice. equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
Weight of the Trailer Tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which
The tongue load (1) of any trailer is will also reduce the trailer weight the
an important weight to measure vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
because it affects the total gross the tongue load must be added to
weight of the vehicle. The Gross the GVW because the vehicle will
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the be carrying that weight, too. See
curb weight of the vehicle, any Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-10.
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
If a weight-carrying hitch or a The only way to be sure it is not Towing Equipment

weight-distributing hitch is being exceeding any of these ratings is to
used, the trailer tongue (1) should weigh the vehicle and trailer. Hitches
weigh 10-15 percent of the total It is important to have the correct
loaded trailer weight (2). Total Weight on the Vehicle's
Tires hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
After loading the trailer, weigh the trucks going by, and rough roads
trailer and then the tongue, Inflate the vehicle's tires to the are a few reasons why the right
separately, to see if the weights are upper limit for cold tires. These hitch is needed.
proper. If they are not, adjustments numbers can be found on the
Certification label or see Vehicle
. The rear bumper on the vehicle
might be made by moving some is not intended for hitches. Do
items around in the trailer. Load Limits on page 9-10 for more
information. Do not go over the not attach rental hitches or other
Trailering may be limited by the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the bumper-type hitches to it. Use
vehicle's ability to carry tongue GAWR, including the weight of the only a frame-mounted hitch that
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause trailer tongue. If using a weight does not attach to the bumper.
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR distributing hitch, do not go over the . Will any holes be made in the
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or rear axle limit before applying the body of the vehicle when the
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle weight distribution spring bars. trailer hitch is installed? If so,
Weight Rating). The effect of then be sure to seal the holes
additional weight may reduce the when the hitch is removed. If the
trailering capacity more than the holes are not sealed, dirt, water,
total of the additional weight. and deadly carbon monoxide
It is important that the vehicle does (CO) from the exhaust may get
not exceed any of its ratings — into the vehicle. See Engine
GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Exhaust on page 9-21.
Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Safety Chains Trailer Wiring Harness

Weight Carrying Hitches
Always attach chains between the Basic Trailer Wiring
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of The trailer wiring harness, with a
the trailer to help prevent the tongue seven-pin connector, is located at
from contacting the road if it the rear of the vehicle and is tied to
becomes separated from the hitch. the vehicle's frame. The harness
Always leave just enough slack so connector can be plugged into a
the rig can turn. Never allow safety seven-pin universal heavy-duty
chains to drag on the ground. trailer connector available through
your dealer.
Trailer Brakes The seven-wire harness contains
A loaded trailer that weighs more the following trailer circuits:
than 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs to . Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
have its own brake system that is
1. Body-to-Ground Distance adequate for the weight of the
. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn
2. Front of Vehicle trailer. Be sure to read and follow Signal
the instructions for the trailer brakes . Brown: Taillamps
When using a weight-distributing so they are installed, adjusted, and
hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so maintained properly.
. Black: Ground
that the distance (1) remains the
Because the vehicle has antilock
. Light Green: Back-up Lamps
same both before and after coupling
the trailer to the tow vehicle. brakes, do not try to tap into the . Red/Black: Battery Feed
vehicle's hydraulic brake system. . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
If you do, both brake systems will
not work well, or at all.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
*The fuse for this circuit is installed Electric Trailer Brake Control Conversions and
in the underhood electrical center, Wiring Provisions
but the wires are not connected. These wiring provisions for an
Add-Ons
They should be connected by your electric trailer brake controller are
dealer or a qualified service center. included with the vehicle as part of Add-On Electrical
If the back-up lamp circuit is not the trailer wiring package. The Equipment
functional, contact your dealer. instrument panel contains blunt cut
If a remote (non-vehicle) battery is wires above the parking brake
assembly for the electric trailer
{ Caution
being charged, press the Tow/Haul
mode switch located on the center brake controller. The harness Some electrical equipment can
console near the climate controls. contains the following wires: damage the vehicle or cause
This will boost the vehicle system . Red/Black: Power Supply components to not work and
voltage and properly charge the . White: Brake Switch Signal would not be covered by the
battery. If the trailer is too light for warranty. Always check with your
Tow/Haul mode, turn on the . Gray: Illumination dealer before adding electrical
headlamps (non-HID only) as a . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal equipment.
second way to boost the vehicle
system and charge the battery.
. Black: Ground
Add-on equipment can drain the
The electric trailer brake controller
vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
should be installed by your dealer or
vehicle is not operating.
a qualified service center.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-34 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-34.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Overheated Engine

Protection
Electrical System
High Voltage Devices and
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-18 Electrical System
General Information Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Fuses and Circuit
California Proposition Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Engine Compartment Fuse
California Perchlorate All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-2 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-23 Instrument Panel Fuse
Accessories and Automatic Transmission Shift Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Lock Control Function
Vehicle Checks Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Wheels and Tires
Doing Your Own Ignition Transmission Lock Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Park Brake and P (Park) Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Engine Compartment Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-24 Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Wiper Blade Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-37
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Tire Terminology and
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Headlamp Aiming Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Automatic Transmission
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Bulb Replacement System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-11 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Pressure Monitor
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-16 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-27 Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-28

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-2 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New General Information cause cancer and birth defects or
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 other reproductive harm. Engine
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 For service and parts needs, visit exhaust, many parts and systems,
Different Size Tires and your dealer. You will receive many fluids, and some component
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 genuine GM parts and GM-trained wear by-products contain and/or
Uniform Tire Quality and supported service people. emit these chemicals.
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Genuine GM parts have one of
Wheel Alignment and Tire these marks: California Perchlorate
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-54 Materials Requirements
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Certain types of automotive
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 applications, such as airbag
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-65 and lithium batteries contained in
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
Jump Starting may contain perchlorate materials.
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Special handling may be necessary.
Towing the Vehicle For additional information, see
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-70 www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
Recreational Vehicle perchlorate.
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Accessories and
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 California Proposition Modifications
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 65 Warning Adding non‐dealer accessories or
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 Most motor vehicles, including this making modifications to the vehicle
one, contain and/or emit chemicals can affect vehicle performance and
known to the State of California to safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-3
handling, emissions systems, Vehicle Checks This vehicle has an airbag system.
aerodynamics, durability, and Before attempting to do your own
electronic systems like antilock service work, see Servicing the
brakes, traction control, and stability Doing Your Own Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
control. These accessories or Service Work page 3-34.
modifications could even cause Keep a record with all parts receipts
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
{ Warning and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Damage to vehicle components It can be dangerous to work on Maintenance Records on
resulting from modifications or the your vehicle if you do not have page 11-13.
installation or use of non‐GM the proper knowledge, service
certified parts, including control
module or software modifications, is
manual, tools, or parts. Always
follow owner manual procedures
{ Caution
not covered under the terms of the and consult the service manual Even small amounts of
vehicle warranty and may affect for your vehicle before doing any contamination can cause damage
remaining warranty coverage for service work. to vehicle systems. Do not allow
affected parts. contaminants to contact the fluids,
GM Accessories are designed to If doing some of your own service reservoir caps, or dipsticks.
complement and function with other work, use the proper service
systems on the vehicle. See your manual. It tells you much more
dealer to accessorize the vehicle about how to service the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories than this manual can. To order the
installed by a dealer technician. proper service manual, see Service
Also, see Adding Equipment to the Publications Ordering Information
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on on page 13-11.
page 3-34.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-4 Vehicle Care
Hood 3. After you have partially lifted the

hood, gas struts will
To open the hood: automatically take over to lift and
hold the hood in the fully open
position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all
filler caps are on properly.
Pull the hood down to close. Lower
the hood until the lifting pressure of
1. Pull the hood release handle the strut is reduced. Then allow the
with this symbol on it. It is under hood to fall and latch into place
the instrument panel on the under its own weight. Check to
2. At the front of the vehicle, pull make sure the hood is closed. If the
driver side of the vehicle.
up on the center of the hood, hood does not fully latch, gently
and push the secondary hood push the hood down at the front and
release to the right. center of the hood until it is
completely latched.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-5
Engine Compartment Overview

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-6 Vehicle Care
1. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. 7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When Engine Cover
See Jump Starting on to Add Engine Oil” under Engine
page 10-66. Oil on page 10-7.
2. Engine Compartment Fuse 8. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of
Block on page 10-29. View). See “Checking Engine
3. Radiator Pressure Cap (Out of Oil” under Engine Oil on
View). See Cooling System on page 10-7.
page 10-12. 9. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of
4. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap. View). See Cooling System on
See Cooling System on page 10-12.
page 10-12. 10. Engine Cover on page 10-6.
5. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. 11. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See
See Jump Starting on “Brake Fluid” under Brakes on
page 10-66. page 10-20. 1. Oil Fill Cap
6. Power Steering Reservoir and 12. Windshield Washer Fluid 2. Engine Cover
Cap (Under Engine Cover). See Reservoir. See “Adding Washer To remove:
Power Steering Fluid on Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
page 10-18. page 10-19. 1. Remove the oil fill cap (1).
13. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on 2. Raise the engine cover (2) to
page 10-11. release it from the retainers.
3. Lift and remove the engine
cover.
4. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall
engine cover.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-7
Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
with a paper towel or cloth, then
To ensure proper engine It is a good idea to check the engine
push it back in all the way.
performance and long life, careful oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
Remove it again, keeping the tip
attention must be paid to engine oil. get an accurate reading, the vehicle
down, and check the level.
Following these simple, but must be on level ground. The
important steps will help protect engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. When to Add Engine Oil
your investment: See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10-5 for the location of the
. Always use engine oil approved engine oil dipstick.
to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See Obtaining an accurate oil level
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” reading is essential:
in this section. 1. If the engine has been running
. Check the engine oil level recently, turn off the engine and
regularly and maintain the allow several minutes for the oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched
proper oil level. See “Checking to drain back into the oil pan. area at the tip of the dipstick, add
Engine Oil” and “When to Add Checking the oil level too soon 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
Engine Oil” in this section. after engine shutoff will not and then recheck the level. See
provide an accurate oil level “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in
. Change the engine oil at the reading. this section for an explanation of
appropriate time. See Engine Oil what kind of oil to use. For engine
Life System on page 10-9.
. Always dispose of engine oil
{ Warning oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
properly. See “What to Do with The engine oil dipstick handle page 12-2.
Used Oil” in this section. may be hot; it could burn you.
Use a towel or glove to touch the
dipstick handle.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-8 Vehicle Care
Selecting the Right Engine Oil

{ Caution Selecting the right engine oil
{ Caution
Do not add too much oil. Oil depends on both the proper oil Failure to use the recommended
levels above or below the specification and viscosity grade. engine oil can result in engine
acceptable operating range See Recommended Fluids and damage not covered by the
shown on the dipstick are harmful Lubricants on page 11-11. vehicle warranty. Check with your
to the engine. If you find that you Specification dealer or service provider on
have an oil level above the whether the oil is approved to the
operating range, i.e., the engine Use and ask for licensed engine oils dexos1 specification.
has so much oil that the oil level with the dexos1® approved
certification mark. Engine oils
gets above the cross-hatched Viscosity Grade
meeting the requirements for the
area that shows the proper
vehicle should have the dexos1 SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
operating range, the engine could approved certification mark. This
be damaged. You should drain grade for the vehicle. Do not use
certification mark indicates that the other viscosity grade oils such as
out the excess oil or limit driving oil has been approved to the dexos1
of the vehicle and seek a service SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.
specification.
professional to remove the Cold Temperature Operation: In an
excess amount of oil. area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C (−20°
F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be used.
See Engine Compartment Overview An oil of this viscosity grade will
on page 10-5 for the location of the provide easier cold starting for the
engine oil fill cap. engine at extremely low
Add enough oil to put the level temperatures. When selecting an oil
somewhere in the proper operating of the appropriate viscosity grade,
range. Push the dipstick all the way always select an oil of the correct
back in when through.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-9
specification. See “Specification” containing used engine oil. See the When the system has calculated
earlier in this section for more manufacturer's warnings about the that oil life has been diminished, it
information. use and disposal of oil products. indicates that an oil change is
Used oil can be a threat to the necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
Engine Oil Additives/Engine OIL SOON message comes on.
Oil Flushes environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil Change the oil as soon as possible
Do not add anything to the oil. The from the filter before disposal. Never within the next 1 000 km (600 mi).
recommended oils with the dexos dispose of oil by putting it in the It is possible that, if driving under
specification and displaying the trash or pouring it on the ground, the best conditions, the oil life
dexos certification mark are all that into sewers, or into streams or system might indicate that an oil
is needed for good performance and bodies of water. Recycle it by taking change is not necessary for up to a
engine protection. it to a place that collects used oil. year. The engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year
Engine oil system flushes are not and, at this time, the system must
recommended and could cause Engine Oil Life System be reset. Your dealer has trained
engine damage not covered by the service people who will perform this
vehicle warranty. When to Change Engine Oil
work and reset the system. It is also
This vehicle has a computer system important to check the oil regularly
What to Do with Used Oil that indicates when to change the over the course of an oil drain
Used engine oil contains certain engine oil and filter. This is based interval and keep it at the proper
elements that can be unhealthy for on a combination of factors which level.
your skin and could even cause include engine revolutions, engine
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on temperature, and miles driven. If the system is ever reset
your skin for very long. Clean your Based on driving conditions, the accidentally, the oil must be
skin and nails with soap and water, mileage at which an oil change is changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or indicated can vary considerably. For since the last oil change.
properly dispose of clothing or rags the oil life system to work properly, Remember to reset the oil life
the system must be reset every time system whenever the oil is changed.
the oil is changed.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-10 Vehicle Care
How to Reset the Engine Oil 3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. Automatic Transmission
Life System If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Fluid
Reset the system whenever the SOON message comes back on
when the vehicle is started, the It is not necessary to check the
engine oil is changed so that the transmission fluid level.
system can calculate the next engine oil life system has not
been reset. Repeat the A transmission fluid leak is the only
engine oil change. To reset the reason for fluid loss. If a leak
system: procedure.
occurs, take the vehicle to the
If the vehicle does not have Driver If the vehicle has Driver Information dealer and have it repaired as soon
Information Center (DIC) buttons: Center (DIC) buttons: as possible.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, Change the fluid at the intervals
with the engine off. The vehicle with the engine off. listed in Maintenance Schedule on
must be in P (Park) to access 2. Press the vehicle information page 11-3, and be sure to use the
this display. Press the trip button until OIL LIFE transmission fluid listed in
odometer reset stem until OIL REMAINING displays. Recommended Fluids and
LIFE REMAINING displays. Lubricants on page 11-11.
3. Press and hold the set/reset
2. Press and hold the trip odometer button until “100%” is displayed.
reset stem until OIL LIFE Three chimes sound and the { Caution
REMAINING shows “100%.” CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Three chimes sound and the Use of the incorrect automatic
message goes off.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON transmission fluid may damage
message goes off. 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. the vehicle, and the damage may
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON not be covered by the vehicle
message comes back on when the warranty. Always use the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life automatic transmission fluid listed
system has not been reset. Repeat in Recommended Fluids and
the procedure. Lubricants on page 11-11.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-11
The transmission fluid will not reach from vehicle) to release loose dust 4. Inspect or replace the air
the end of the dipstick unless the and dirt. If the filter remains covered cleaner/filter.
transmission is at operating with dirt, a new filter is required. 5. Reverse Steps 1–4 to reinstall
temperature. If you need to check To inspect or replace the engine air the housing cover and reconnect
the transmission fluid level, please cleaner/filter: the electrical connector to the
take the vehicle to your dealer. sensor.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
{ Warning
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the others to be burned. The air
scheduled maintenance intervals cleaner not only cleans the air; it
and replace it at the first oil change helps to stop flames if the engine
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mile) backfires. Use caution when
interval. See Maintenance Schedule working on the engine and do not
on page 11-3. If driving in dusty/dirty
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change. 1. Air Duct Clamp
See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 10-5 for the location of the
2. Electrical Connector
{ Caution
engine air cleaner/filter. 3. Screws
If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt
How to Inspect the Engine Air 1. Loosen the air duct clamp (1).
can easily get into the engine,
Cleaner/Filter 2. Disconnect the electrical which could damage it. Always
connector (2). have the air cleaner/filter in place
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle 3. Remove the screws (3) and lift when you are driving.
and lightly shake the filter (away the cover assembly.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-12 Vehicle Care
Cooling System
{ Warning { Caution
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct An electric engine cooling fan Using coolant other than
working temperature. under the hood can start up even DEX-COOL® can cause
when the engine is not running premature engine, heater core,
and can cause injury. Keep or radiator corrosion. In addition,
hands, clothing, and tools away the engine coolant could require
from any underhood electric fan. changing sooner. Any repairs
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant
{ Warning in the vehicle.
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very Engine Coolant
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned. The cooling system in the vehicle is
filled with DEX-COOL® engine
1. Radiator Pressure Cap (Under Do not run the engine if there is a coolant. See Maintenance Schedule
Sight Shield) leak. If you run the engine, it on page 11-3 and Recommended
2. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank could lose all coolant. That could Fluids and Lubricants on
cause an engine fire, and you page 11-11.
3. Engine Cooling Fans (Out could be burned. Get any leak
of View) The following explains the cooling
fixed before you drive the vehicle. system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 10-16.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-13
What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and DEX-COOL Caution (Continued)
{ Warning coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added. mixture can freeze and crack
This mixture: engine cooling parts. The repairs
Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system . Gives freezing protection down vehicle warranty. Use only the
can be dangerous. Plain water to −37°C (−34°F), outside proper mixture of engine coolant
and other liquids, can boil before temperature. for the cooling system. See
the proper coolant mixture will. . Gives boiling protection up to Recommended Fluids and
The coolant warning system is set 129°C (265°F), engine Lubricants on page 11-11.
for the proper coolant mixture. temperature.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too
. Protects against rust and Never dispose of engine coolant by
hot but you would not get the corrosion. putting it in the trash, pouring it on
overheat warning. The engine . Will not damage aluminum parts. the ground, or into sewers, streams,
could catch fire and you or others or bodies of water. Have the coolant
. Helps keep the proper engine changed by an authorized service
could be burned. Use a 50/ temperature.
50 mixture of clean, drinkable center, familiar with legal
water and DEX-COOL coolant. requirements regarding used
{ Caution coolant disposal. This will help
protect the environment and your
If improper coolant mixture, health.
inhibitors, or additives are used in
the vehicle cooling system, the Checking Coolant
engine could overheat and be The vehicle must be on a level
damaged. Too much water in the surface when checking the coolant
(Continued) level.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-14 Vehicle Care
Check to see if coolant is visible in When the engine is hot, the level
the coolant recovery tank. If the could be higher than the FULL { Caution
coolant inside the coolant recovery COLD line. If the coolant is below
tank is boiling, do not do anything the FULL COLD line when the This vehicle has a specific
else until it cools down. If coolant is engine is hot, there could be a leak coolant fill procedure. Failure to
visible but the coolant level is not at in the cooling system. follow this procedure could cause
or above the FULL COLD mark, add the engine to overheat and be
If the coolant is low, add the coolant severely damaged.
a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable or take the vehicle to a dealer for
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the service.
coolant recovery tank, but be sure If recovery tank is empty, check the
the cooling system is cool before How to Add Coolant to the coolant level in the radiator before
this is done. See Engine Recovery Tank adding coolant to the recovery tank
Overheating on page 10-16. or take the vehicle to the dealer for
{ Warning service. See “How to Add Coolant to
the Radiator” later in this section.
You can be burned if you spill If coolant is needed, add the proper
coolant on hot engine parts. DEX-COOL coolant mixture at the
Coolant contains ethylene glycol coolant recovery tank.
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
The coolant recovery tank cap has coolant on a hot engine.
this symbol on it.
When the engine is cold, the coolant
level should be at or above the
FULL COLD line marked on the
recovery tank.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-15
How to Add Coolant to the 2. Remove the radiator pressure

Radiator cap when the cooling system,
including the upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the
{ Warning pressure cap slowly
Steam and scalding liquids from a counterclockwise about one
hot cooling system can blow out full turn.
and burn you badly. Never turn If a hiss is heard, wait for that to
the cap when the cooling system, stop. A hiss means there is still
including the surge tank pressure some pressure left in the
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system.
system and surge tank pressure 3. Keep turning the pressure cap
cap to cool. 1. Detach the fasteners and lift off slowly and remove it.
the panel that covers the
radiator cap. 4. Fill the radiator to the base of
If coolant is needed, add the proper the filler neck with the proper
mixture directly to the radiator, but DEX-COOL coolant mixture.
be sure the cooling system is cool
before this is done. Then check the
recovery tank and add coolant if
needed.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-16 Vehicle Care
6. Reinstall the cap on the coolant

recovery tank but leave the { Caution
radiator pressure cap off.
If the pressure cap is not tightly
7. Start the engine and let it run installed, coolant loss and
until the upper radiator hose possible engine damage may
feels warm. Any time during this occur. Be sure the cap is properly
procedure, watch out for the and tightly secured.
engine cooling fans.
8. If the coolant level inside the
radiator filler neck is low, add Engine Overheating
more of the proper DEX-COOL The vehicle has several indicators
coolant mixture through the filler to warn of engine overheating.
neck until the level is back up to
the base of the filler neck. There is an engine coolant
temperature gauge on the
9. Replace the pressure cap tightly. instrument panel cluster. See
At any time during this Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
procedure if coolant begins to on page 5-13.
flow out of the filler neck,
reinstall the pressure cap. The vehicle may also display an
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
ENGINE and ENGINE
OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See Engine Cooling
System Messages on page 5-34.
5. Fill the coolant recovery tank to
the FULL COLD mark or to the
FULL COLD ISO symbol mark.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-17
You may decide not to lift the hood If Steam Is Coming from the
when this warning appears, but Engine Compartment Warning (Continued)
instead get service help right away.
See Roadside Assistance Program See Overheated Engine
on page 13-5.
{ Warning Protection Operating Mode on
page 10-18 for information on
If you do decide to lift the hood, Steam from an overheated engine
driving to a safe place in an
make sure the vehicle is parked on can burn you badly, even if you
emergency.
a level surface. just open the hood. Stay away
Then check to see if the engine from the engine if you see or hear
cooling fans are running. If the steam coming from it. Turn it off If No Steam Is Coming from
engine is overheating, both fans and get everyone away from the the Engine Compartment
should be running. If they are not, vehicle until it cools down. Wait If an engine overheat warning is
do not continue to run the engine until there is no sign of steam or displayed but no steam can be seen
and have the vehicle serviced. coolant before you open or heard, the problem may not be
the hood. too serious. Sometimes the engine
{ Caution If you keep driving when the can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
vehicles engine is overheated,
Running the engine without the liquids in it can catch fire. You . Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
coolant may cause damage or a or others could be badly burned.
fire. Vehicle damage would not be
. Stops after high-speed driving.
Stop the engine if it overheats,
covered by the vehicle warranty. and get out of the vehicle until the
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
See Overheated Engine engine is cool. . Tows a trailer.
Protection Operating Mode on
page 10-18 for information on (Continued)
driving to a safe place in an
emergency.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-18 Vehicle Care
If the overheat warning is displayed If there is no sign of steam, idle the

with no sign of steam: engine for three minutes while { Caution
1. Turn the air conditioning off. parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it After driving in the overheated
2. Turn the heater on to the highest cools down. Also, see “Overheated engine protection operating
temperature and to the highest Engine Protection Operating Mode” mode, the engine oil will be
fan speed. Open the windows as next in this section. severely degraded. Any repairs
necessary. performed before the engine is
3. When it is safe to do so, pull off Overheated Engine cool may cause engine damage.
Allow the engine to cool before
the road, shift to P (Park) or Protection attempting any repair. Repair the
N (Neutral), and let the
engine idle.
Operating Mode cause of coolant loss, change the
This emergency operating mode lets oil, and reset the oil life system.
If the temperature overheat gauge is See Engine Oil on page 10-7.
no longer in the overheat zone or an the vehicle be driven to a safe place
overheat warning no longer in an emergency situation. If an
overheated engine condition exists,
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
an overheat protection mode which Power Steering Fluid
Continue to drive the vehicle slow
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe alternates firing groups of cylinders
vehicle distance from the car in front helps prevent engine damage. In
of you. If the warning does not come this mode, there is a significant loss
back on, continue to drive normally in power and engine performance.
and have the cooling system The temperature gauge indicates an
checked for proper fill and function. overheat condition exists. Driving
extended distances and/or towing a
If the warning continues, pull over, trailer in the overheat protection
stop, and park the vehicle mode should be avoided.
right away.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-19
The power steering fluid reservoir is 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
under the engine cover on the dipstick with a clean rag. Caution (Continued)
passenger side of the vehicle. See 5. Replace the cap and completely
Engine Compartment Overview on the correct fluid listed in
tighten it. Recommended Fluids and
page 10-5 for reservoir location.
6. Remove the cap again and look Lubricants on page 11-11.
When to Check Power Steering at the fluid level on the dipstick.
Fluid
The fluid level should be Washer Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly somewhere between the MAX and
check power steering fluid unless MIN line on the dipstick in room What to Use
you suspect there is a leak in the temperature. If the fluid is on or When adding windshield washer
system or you hear an unusual below the MIN line, add fluid close fluid, be sure to read the
noise. A fluid loss in this system to the MAX Line. manufacturer's instructions before
could indicate a problem. Have the use. If the vehicle will be operating
system inspected and repaired. What to Use
in an area where the temperature
To determine what kind of fluid to may fall below freezing, use a fluid
How to Check Power Steering
use, see Recommended Fluids and that has sufficient protection against
Fluid Lubricants on page 11-11. Always freezing.
To check the power steering fluid: use the proper fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
1. Turn the key off and let the
engine compartment cool down. { Caution When the windshield washer fluid
reservoir is low, a WASHER FLUID
2. Remove the engine cover. See Use of the incorrect fluid may LOW ADD FLUID message will be
Engine Cover on page 10-6. damage the vehicle and the displayed on the Driver Information
3. Wipe the cap and the top of the damages may not be covered by Center (DIC). See Washer Fluid
reservoir clean. the vehicle warranty. Always use Messages on page 5-42 for more
(Continued) information.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-20 Vehicle Care
Caution (Continued) { Warning

. When using concentrated The brake wear warning sound
washer fluid, follow the means that soon the brakes will
manufacturer instructions for not work well. That could lead to
adding water. a crash. When the brake wear
Open the cap with the washer . Fill the washer fluid tank only warning sound is heard, have the
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
three-quarters full when it is vehicle serviced.
the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on very cold. This allows for fluid
page 10-5 for reservoir location. expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank
if it is completely full. { Caution
{ Caution Continuing to drive with worn-out
. Do not use engine coolant Brakes brake pads could result in costly
(antifreeze) in the windshield brake repair.
washer. It can damage the This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
windshield washer system brake pads have built-in wear
and paint. indicators that make a high-pitched Some driving conditions or climates
warning sound when the brake pads can cause a brake squeal when the
. Do not mix water with are worn and new pads are needed. brakes are first applied or lightly
ready-to-use washer fluid. The sound can come and go or be applied. This does not mean
Water can cause the solution heard all the time when the vehicle something is wrong with the brakes.
to freeze and damage the is moving, except when applying the
washer fluid tank and other Properly torqued wheel nuts are
brake pedal firmly. necessary to help prevent brake
parts of the washer system.
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
(Continued) inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-21
proper sequence to torque new, approved replacement parts. There are only two reasons why the
specifications. See Capacities and If this is not done, the brakes might brake fluid level in the reservoir
Specifications on page 12-2. not work properly. For example, might go down:
Brake linings should always be installing disc brake pads that are . The brake fluid level goes down
replaced as complete axle sets. wrong for the vehicle, can change because of normal brake lining
the balance between the front and wear. When new linings are
Brake Pedal Travel rear brakes — for the worse. The installed, the fluid level goes
braking performance expected can back up.
See your dealer if the brake pedal
change in many other ways if the
does not return to normal height, . A fluid leak in the brake
wrong replacement brake parts are
or if there is a rapid increase in hydraulic system can also cause
installed.
pedal travel. This could be a sign a low fluid level. Have the brake
that brake service might be hydraulic system fixed, since a
required. Brake Fluid
leak means that sooner or later
Brake Adjustment the brakes will not work well.
Every time the brakes are applied, Do not top off the brake fluid.
with or without the vehicle moving, Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
the brakes adjust for wear. If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid
Replacing Brake System Parts when new brake linings are
The braking system on a vehicle is The brake master cylinder reservoir installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
complex. Its many parts have to be is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as as necessary, only when work is
of top quality and work well together indicated on the reservoir cap. See done on the brake hydraulic system.
if the vehicle is to have really good Engine Compartment Overview on
braking. The vehicle was designed page 10-5 for the location of the
and tested with top-quality brake reservoir.
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-22 Vehicle Care
{ Warning { Warning Caution (Continued)

If too much brake fluid is added, it With the wrong kind of fluid in the . If brake fluid is spilled on the
can spill on the engine and burn, brake hydraulic system, the vehicle's painted surfaces,
if the engine is hot enough. You brakes might not work well. This the paint finish can be
or others could be burned, and could cause a crash. Always use damaged. Be careful not to
the vehicle could be damaged. the proper brake fluid. spill brake fluid on the
Add brake fluid only when work is vehicle. If you do, wash it off
done on the brake hydraulic immediately.
system.
{ Caution Battery
. Using the wrong fluid can
When the brake fluid falls to a low Refer to the replacement number on
level, the brake warning light comes badly damage brake the original battery label when a
on. See Brake System Warning hydraulic system parts. For new battery is needed.
Light on page 5-19. example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
What to Add engine oil, in the brake { Warning
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid hydraulic system can damage
Battery posts, terminals, and
from a sealed container. See brake hydraulic system parts
so badly that they will have to related accessories contain lead
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-11. be replaced. Do not let and lead compounds, chemicals
someone put in the wrong known to the State of California to
Always clean the brake fluid cause cancer and reproductive
kind of fluid.
reservoir cap and the area around harm. Wash hands after handling.
the cap before removing it. This (Continued)
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-23
Vehicle Storage All-Wheel Drive 3. Try to start the engine in each

gear. The vehicle should start
Transfer case fluid does not require
{ Warning checking unless there is a fluid leak
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
If the vehicle starts in any other
or unusual noise. If required, have position, contact your dealer for
Batteries have acid that can burn
the transfer case serviced by your service.
you and gas that can explode.
dealer.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on Automatic Transmission
page 10-66 for tips on working
Starter Switch Check Shift Lock Control
around a battery without Function Check
getting hurt. { Warning
When you are doing this { Warning
Infrequent Usage: Remove the inspection, the vehicle could
black, negative (−) cable from the move suddenly. If the vehicle When you are doing this
battery to keep the battery from moves, you or others could be inspection, the vehicle could
running down. injured. move suddenly. If the vehicle
Extended Storage: Remove the moves, you or others could be
black, negative (−) cable from the injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
battery or use a battery trickle sure there is enough room
charger. around the vehicle. 1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
2. Firmly apply both the parking
around the vehicle. It should be
brake and the regular brake.
parked on a level surface.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-24 Vehicle Care

. To check the P (Park)
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. Park Brake and P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
Mechanism Check With the engine running, shift to
begins to move. P (Park). Then release the
3. With the engine off, turn the
{ Warning parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
ignition on, but do not start the When you are doing this check,
engine. Without applying the Contact your dealer if service is
the vehicle could begin to move. required.
regular brake, try to move the You or others could be injured
shift lever out of P (Park) with
and property could be damaged.
normal effort. If the shift lever
Make sure there is room in front
Wiper Blade Replacement
moves out of P (Park), contact
of the vehicle in case it begins to Front Wiper Blade
your dealer for service.
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
Windshield wiper blades should be
brake at once should the vehicle
Ignition Transmission begin to move.
inspected for wear or cracking. See
Lock Check Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-3.
While parked, and with the parking Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Replacement blades come in
brake set, try to turn the ignition to vehicle facing downhill. Keeping different types and are removed in
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever your foot on the regular brake, set different ways. For the proper type
position. the parking brake. and size, see Maintenance
. The ignition should turn to . To check the parking brake's Replacement Parts on page 11-12.
LOCK/OFF only when the shift holding ability: With the engine To replace the wiper blade
lever is in P (Park). running and the transmission in assembly:
. The ignition key should come N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake 1. Pull the windshield wiper
out only in LOCK/OFF.
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is assembly away from the
Contact your dealer if service is held by the parking brake only. windshield.
required.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-25
Allowing the wiper blade arm to

touch the windshield when no
wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do
not allow the wiper blade arm to
2. Squeeze the tabs on each side touch the windshield.
of the wiper blade assembly and
slide the assembly off the end of 4. Repeat the steps for the other
the wiper arm. blade. 2. Push the release lever (2) to
disengage the hook and push
Rear Wiper Blade the wiper arm (1) out of the
To replace the rear wiper blade: blade assembly (3).
1. Pull the wiper blade assembly 3. Push the new blade assembly
away from the backglass. securely in the wiper arm hook
until the release lever clicks into
The rear wiper blade will not lock place.
in a vertical position so care
3. Install the new blade onto the should be used when pulling it 4. Return the wiper arm and blade
arm connector and make sure away from the vehicle. assembly to the rest position on
the tabs are fully set in the the glass.
locked position.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-26 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
Headlamp aim has been preset and For the proper type of replacement
on page 2-8.
should need no further adjustment. bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 10-28. 2. Remove the convenience net,
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,
if the vehicle has one.
the headlamp aim may be affected. For any bulb‐changing procedure
If adjustment to the headlamps is not listed in this section, contact
necessary, see your dealer. your dealer.
Taillamps, Turn Signal,

and Stoplamps
3. Remove the two taillamp screw

covers.
4. Remove the two screws holding
the taillamp assembly in place.
5. Pull out the taillamp assembly.
1. Turn Signal Lamp
2. Stoplamp/Taillamp

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-27
6. Turn the bulb socket License Plate Lamp

counterclockwise and pull it
straight out to remove it from the To replace one of these bulbs:
taillamp assembly. 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
7. Pull the old bulb straight out of on page 2-8.
the bulb socket.
8. Push the new bulb straight into
the bulb socket.
9. Push the taillamp assembly back
into its original location.
When reinstalling the taillamp
assembly, make sure the pin on 4. Turn the bulb socket (1)
the taillamp assembly lines up counterclockwise to remove it
and is inserted correctly into the from the lamp assembly (3).
opening of the vehicle. 5. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of
10. Reinstall the two screws that the bulb socket.
hold the taillamp assembly in 6. Push the replacement bulb
place. 2. Push the left end of the lamp
assembly toward the right. straight into the bulb socket and
11. Reinstall the two taillamp screw turn the bulb socket clockwise to
covers. 3. Turn the lamp assembly down to install it into the lamp assembly.
remove it from the liftgate.
7. Turn the lamp assembly into the
liftgate engaging the clip side
first.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-28 Vehicle Care
8. Push on the lamp side opposite Electrical System Electrical System

the clip until the lamp assembly
snaps into place.
Overload
High Voltage Devices and The vehicle has fuses and circuit
Replacement Bulbs Wiring breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
Bulb
Exterior Lamp
Number { Warning When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
License Plate Lamp 194 LL Exposure to high voltage can and closes, protecting the circuit
Rear Turn 7443 NA cause shock, burns, and even until the current load returns to
Signal Lamp death. The high voltage normal or the problem is fixed. This
components in the vehicle can greatly reduces the chance of circuit
Taillamp/Stop Lamp 7444 LL only be serviced by technicians overload and fire caused by
with special training. electrical problems.
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer. High voltage components are Fuses and circuit breakers protect
identified by labels. Do not power devices in the vehicle.
remove, open, take apart, Replace a bad fuse with a new one
or modify these components. of the identical size and rating.
High voltage cable or wiring has
orange covering. Do not probe, If there is a problem on the road and
tamper with, cut, or modify high a fuse needs to be replaced, the
same amperage fuse can be
voltage cable or wiring.
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-29
Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit

An electrical overload may cause Breakers
the lamps to go on and off, or in
The wiring circuits in your vehicle
some cases to remain off. Have the
are protected from short circuits by
headlamp wiring checked right away
a combination of fuses, circuit
if the lamps go on and off or
breakers and fusible thermal links.
remain off.
This greatly reduces the chance of
Windshield Wipers fires caused by electrical problems.
If the wiper motor overheats due to Look at the silver-colored band
heavy snow or ice, the windshield inside the fuse. If the band is broken
wipers will stop until the motor cools or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
and will then restart. you replace a bad fuse with a new Lift the cover for access to the fuse/
one of the identical size and rating. relay block.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload Fuses of the same amperage can
due to heavy snow or ice may be temporarily borrowed from { Caution
cause wiper linkage damage. another fuse location, if a fuse goes
Always clear ice and heavy snow out. Replace the fuse as soon as Spilling liquid on any electrical
from the windshield before using the you can. component on the vehicle may
windshield wipers. damage it. Always keep the
If the overload is caused by an Engine Compartment covers on any electrical
component.
electrical problem and not snow or Fuse Block
ice, be sure to get it fixed. The underhood fuse block is in the
To remove fuses, hold the end of
engine compartment, on the
the fuse between your thumb and
passenger side of the vehicle.
index finger and pull straight out.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-30 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage
A/C CLTCH Air Conditioning
Clutch
ABS MTR Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
Motor
AIRBAG Airbag System
AUX POWER Auxiliary Power
AUX Auxiliary
VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump
AWD All-Wheel-Drive
System
BATT 1 Battery 1
BATT 2 Battery 2
BATT 3 Battery 3
CIGAR Cigarette Lighter
LIGHTER
ECM 1 Engine Control
Module 1
EMISSION 1 Emission 1
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and EMISSION 2 Emission 2
features shown.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-31
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils LT TRLR Trailer Left RT TRLR Trailer Right
STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn
FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1
Signal Signal
FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2
ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils RVC SNSR Regulated Voltage
FSCM Fuel System Control Sensor
PCM IGN Powertrain Control
Control Module
Module Ignition S/ROOF/ Sunroof
HORN Horn SUNSHADE
PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate
HTD MIR Heated Outside SERVICE Service Repair
PWR Power Outlet
Rearview Mirror
OUTLET SPARE Spare
HTD Heated Steering
RR APO Rear Accessory STOP Stoplamps
STR WHL Wheel
Power Outlet LAMPS
HUMIDITY/ Humidity Sensor/
RR DEFOG Rear Defogger STRTR Starter
MAF MAF Sensor
RR HVAC Rear Climate TCM Transmission
HVAC BLWR Heating,
Control System Control Module
Ventilation, and Air
Conditioning RT HI BEAM Right High-Beam TRANS Transmission
Blower Headlamp
TRLR Trailer Back-up
LT HI BEAM Left High-Beam RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam BCK/UP Lamps
Headlamp Headlamp
TRLR BRK Trailer Brake
LT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam RT PRK Right
TRLR Trailer Parking
Headlamp Parking Lamp
PRK LAMP Lamps
LT PRK Left Parking Lamp

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-32 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Relays Usage Instrument Panel Fuse

TRLR PWR Trailer Power IGN Ignition Main Block
WPR/WSW Windshield Wiper/ LT TRLR Trailer Left
Washer STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn
Signal Lamp
Relays Usage PRK LAMP Parking Lamp
A/C Air Conditioning PWR/TRN Powertrain
CMPRSR Compressor Clutch
CLTCH RR DEFOG Rear Window
Defogger
AUX Auxiliary
VAC PUMP Vacuum Pump RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam
Headlamp
CRNK Switched Power
RT TRLR Trailer Right
FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn The instrument panel fuse block is
FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Signal Lamp under the instrument panel on the
FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3 STOP LAMP Stop Lamps passenger side of the vehicle. Pull
down on the cover to access the
HI BEAM High-Beam TRLR Trailer Back-up
fuse block.
Headlamps BCK/UP Lamps
HID/ High Intensity WPR Windshield Wiper

LO BEAM Discharge (HID) WPR HI Windshield Wiper
Low-Beam High Speed
Headlamps
HORN Horn

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-33
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

# GMC NON HID = DRL/ Daytime Running
Lo Beam LO BEAM Lamps Relay/Low
Beam Headlamps
) GMC NON HID =
Relay
High Shutter
DSPLY Display
)) Chevy = Fog
Lamps FRT WSW Front Windshield
Washer
))) Buick China =
Rear Fog Lamp HTD/ Heated/Cooling
COOL SEAT Seats
AIRBAG Airbag
HVAC Heating,
AMP Amplifier
Ventilation, and Air
BCK Back-up Lamp/ Conditioning
UP/STOP Stoplamp
INADV PWR Inadvertent Power/
BCM Body Control INT LAMPS Interior Light Pipe
Module Lamps
CNSTR Canister Vent INFOTMNT/ Infotainment/
VENT MSM Memory Seat
Module
CTSY Courtesy Lamps
LT TRN SIG Driver Side Turn
DR LCK Door Locks
Fuse Side Signal
The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-34 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Relays Usage

OBS Rear Park Assist/ LT/ Driver Side Power
DET/URS Side Blind Zone PWR/SEAT Seat Relay
Alert/Forward
RT/ Passenger Side
Collision Alert/
PWR/SEAT Power Seat Relay
Universal Remote
System PWR/WNDW Power Windows
Relay
PDM Power Mirrors,
Liftgate Release PWR/ Power Steering
COLUMN Column Relay
PWR MODE Power Mode
L/GATE Liftgate Relay
PWR MIR Power Mirrors
LCK Power Lock Relay
RDO Radio
REAR/WSW Rear Window
REAR WPR Rear Wiper
Washer Relay
RT TRN SIG Passenger Side
UNLCK Power Unlock
Turn Signal
Relay
STR WHL Steering Wheel
DRL/ Daytime Running
ILLUM Illumination
LO BEAM Lamps Relay/
USB CHRG USB Charging Low-Beam
Headlamps Relay
Relay Side LT/UNLCK Driver Side Unlock
Relay

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-35
Relays Usage Wheels and Tires Warning (Continued)

DRL/ Daytime Running
LO BEAM Lamps Relay (If Tires and a serious crash. See
Equipped) Every new GM vehicle has Vehicle Load Limits on
high-quality tires made by a page 9-10.
FOG LAMPS Fog Lamps Relay
FRT/WSW Front Windshield leading tire manufacturer. See . Underinflated tires pose
Washer Relay the warranty manual for the same danger as
information regarding the tire overloaded tires. The
warranty and where to get resulting crash could
service. For additional cause serious injury.
information refer to the tire Check all tires frequently
manufacturer. to maintain the
recommended pressure.
{ Warning Tire pressure should be
checked when the tires
. Poorly maintained and are cold.
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
. Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
. Overloading the tires can or broken by a sudden
cause overheating as a impact — such as when
result of too much flexing. hitting a pothole. Keep
There could be a blowout tires at the recommended
(Continued) pressure.
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-36 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued)
All-Season Tires Winter Tires
This vehicle may come with This vehicle was not originally
. Worn or old tires can all-season tires. These tires are equipped with winter tires. Winter
cause a crash. If the tread designed to provide good overall tires are designed for increased
is badly worn, performance on most road surfaces traction on snow and ice-covered
replace them. and weather conditions. Original roads. Consider installing winter
equipment tires designed to GM's tires on the vehicle if frequent
. Replace any tires that specific tire performance criteria driving on snow or ice-covered
have been damaged by have a TPC specification code roads is expected. See your dealer
impacts with potholes, molded onto the sidewall. Original for details regarding winter tire
curbs, etc. equipment all-season tires can be availability and proper tire selection.
identified by the last two characters Also, see Buying New Tires on
. Improperly repaired tires of this TPC code, which will page 10-50.
can cause a crash. Only be “MS.”
the dealer or an With winter tires, there may be
Consider installing winter tires on decreased dry road traction,
authorized tire service the vehicle if frequent driving on increased road noise, and shorter
center should repair, snow or ice-covered roads is tread life. After changing to winter
replace, dismount, and expected. All-season tires provide tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
mount the tires. adequate performance for most handling and braking.
. Do not spin the tires in winter driving conditions, but they If using winter tires:
may not offer the same level of
excess of 56 km/h . Use tires of the same brand and
traction or performance as winter
(35 mph) on slippery tires on snow or ice-covered roads. tread type on all four wheel
surfaces such as snow, See Winter Tires on page 10-36. positions.
mud, ice, etc. Excessive
spinning may cause the
tires to explode.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-37

. Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
speed rating as the original Useful information about a tire is section.
equipment tires. molded into its sidewall. The
Winter tires with the same speed examples show a typical (2) TPC Spec (Tire
rating as the original equipment tires passenger vehicle tire and a Performance Criteria
may not be available for H, V, W, Y, compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter equipment tires designed to
tires with a lower speed rating are GM's specific tire performance
chosen, never exceed the tire's criteria have a TPC specification
maximum speed capability. code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
Summer Tires exceed all federal safety
This vehicle may come with high guidelines.
performance summer tires. These (3) DOT (Department of
tires have a special tread and
Transportation): The
compound that are optimized for
maximum dry and wet road Department of Transportation
performance. This special tread and (DOT) code indicates that the
compound will decrease Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example tire is in compliance with the
performance in cold climates, and U.S. Department of
on ice and snow. We recommend (1) Tire Size: The tire size is a Transportation Motor Vehicle
installing winter tires on the vehicle combination of letters and Safety Standards.
if frequent driving in cold numbers used to define a
temperatures or on snow or ice particular tire's width, height, DOT Tire Date of
covered roads is expected. See aspect ratio, construction type, Manufacture: The last four
Winter Tires on page 10-36. digits of the TIN indicate the tire
manufactured date. The first two

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-38 Vehicle Care
digits represent the week performance factors: treadwear, (2) Temporary Use Only: The
(01–52) and the last two digits, traction, and temperature compact spare tire or temporary
the year. For example, the third resistance. For more information use tire should not be driven at
week of the year 2010 would see Uniform Tire Quality speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).
have a four-digit DOT date Grading on page 10-52. The compact spare tire is for
of 0310. (7) Maximum Cold Inflation emergency use when a regular
(4) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load that road tire has lost air and gone
(TIN): The letters and numbers can be carried and the flat. If the vehicle has a compact
following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to spare tire, see Compact Spare
of Transportation) code are the support that load. Tire on page 10-65 and If a Tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN). Goes Flat on page 10-55.
The TIN shows the (3) Tire Identification Number
manufacturer and plant code, (TIN): The letters and numbers
tire size, and date the tire was following the DOT (Department
manufactured. The TIN is of Transportation) code are the
molded onto both sides of the Tire Identification Number (TIN).
tire, although only one side may The TIN shows the
have the date of manufacture. manufacturer and plant code,
(5) Tire Ply Material : The type tire size, and date the tire was
of cord and number of plies in manufactured. The TIN is
the sidewall and under the tread. molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
(6) Uniform Tire Quality Compact Spare Tire Example
have the date of manufacture.
Grading (UTQG): Tire (1) Tire Ply Material : The type
manufacturers are required to of cord and number of plies in
grade tires based on three the sidewall and under the tread.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-39
(4) Maximum Cold Inflation criteria have a TPC specification vehicle tire engineered to
Load Limit: Maximum load that code molded onto the sidewall. standards set by the U.S. Tire
can be carried and the GM's TPC specifications meet or and Rim Association.
maximum pressure needed to exceed all federal safety (2) Tire Width: The three-digit
support that load. guidelines. number indicates the tire section
(5) Tire Inflation: The width in millimeters from
temporary use tire or compact Tire Designations sidewall to sidewall.
spare tire should be inflated to Tire Size (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
420 kPa (60 psi). For more number that indicates the tire
The following is an example of a
information on tire pressure and height-to-width measurements.
typical passenger vehicle
inflation see Tire Pressure on For example, if the tire size
tire size.
page 10-42. aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
(6) Tire Size: A combination of item 3 of the illustration, it would
letters and numbers define a mean that the tire's sidewall is
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, 60 percent as high as it is wide.
construction type, and service (4) Construction Code: A letter
description. The letter T as the code is used to indicate the type
first character in the tire size of ply construction in the tire.
means the tire is for temporary (1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a The letter R means radial ply
use only. construction; the letter D means
metric tire sizing system. The
(7) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in diagonal or bias ply
Performance Criteria the tire size means a passenger construction; and the letter B
Specification): Original means belted-bias ply
equipment tires designed to construction.
GM's specific tire performance

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-40 Vehicle Care
(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of automatic transmission, power before a tire has built up heat
the wheel in inches. windows, power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure
(6) Service Description: These conditioning. on page 10-42.
characters represent the load Aspect Ratio: The relationship Curb Weight: The weight of a
index and speed rating of the of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and
tire. The load index represents Belt: A rubber coated layer of optional equipment including the
the load carrying capacity a tire cords between the plies and the maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
is certified to carry. The speed tread. Cords may be made from and coolant, but without
rating is the maximum speed a steel or other reinforcing passengers and cargo.
tire is certified to carry a load. materials. DOT Markings: A code molded
Bead: The tire bead contains into the sidewall of a tire
Tire Terminology and signifying that the tire is in
Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto compliance with the U.S.
Air Pressure: The amount of the rim. Department of Transportation
air inside the tire pressing (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
outward on each square inch of Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code
the tire. Air pressure is in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) alternate angles less than Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
or psi (pounds per square inch). 90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
the tread. identify the tire manufacturer,
Accessory Weight: The production plant, brand, and
combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire, date of production.
accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
or psi (pounds per square inch) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-10.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-41
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure: Outward Facing Sidewall: The
Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to side of an asymmetrical tire that
Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated. has a particular side that faces
page 9-10. The maximum air pressure is outward when mounted on a
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight molded onto the sidewall. vehicle. The side of the tire that
Rating for the rear axle. See Maximum Load Rating: The contains a whitewall, bears
Vehicle Load Limits on load rating for a tire at the white lettering, or bears
page 9-10. maximum permissible inflation manufacturer, brand, and/or
pressure for that tire. model name molding that is
Intended Outboard Sidewall : higher or deeper than the same
The side of an asymmetrical tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle moldings on the other sidewall
that must always face outward Weight: The sum of curb of the tire.
when mounted on a vehicle. weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric tire used on passenger cars and
unit for air pressure. production options weight.
some light duty trucks and
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A Normal Occupant Weight: The multipurpose vehicles.
tire used on light duty trucks and number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by Recommended Inflation
some multipurpose passenger Pressure: Vehicle
vehicles. 68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9-10. manufacturer's recommended
Load Index: An assigned tire inflation pressure as shown
number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution : on the tire placard. See Tire
that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions. Pressure on page 10-42 and
carrying capacity of a tire. Vehicle Load Limits on
page 9-10.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-42 Vehicle Care
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Treadwear Indicators: Narrow 68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated
tire in which the ply cords that bands, sometimes called wear cargo load. See Vehicle Load
extend to the beads are laid at bars, that show across the tread Limits on page 9-10.
90 degrees to the centerline of of a tire when only 1.6 mm Vehicle Maximum Load on the
the tread. (1/16 in) of tread remains. See Tire: Load on an individual tire
Rim: A metal support for a tire When It Is Time for New Tires due to curb weight, accessory
and upon which the tire beads on page 10-49. weight, occupant weight, and
are seated. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality cargo weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire Grading Standards): A tire Vehicle Placard: A label
between the tread and the bead. information system that provides permanently attached to a
consumers with ratings for a vehicle showing the vehicle
Speed Rating: An tire's traction, temperature, and
alphanumeric code assigned to capacity weight and the original
treadwear. Ratings are equipment tire size and
a tire indicating the maximum determined by tire
speed at which a tire can recommended inflation pressure.
manufacturers using See “Tire and Loading
operate. government testing procedures. Information Label” under Vehicle
Traction: The friction between The ratings are molded into the Load Limits on page 9-10.
the tire and the road surface. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
The amount of grip provided. Tire Quality Grading on Tire Pressure
page 10-52.
Tread: The portion of a tire that Tires need the correct amount of
comes into contact with Vehicle Capacity Weight: The air pressure to operate
the road. number of designated seating effectively.
positions multiplied by

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-43
The Tire and Loading How to Check

{ Caution Information label on the vehicle Use a good quality pocket-type
Neither tire underinflation nor indicates the original equipment gauge to check tire pressure.
overinflation is good. tires and the correct cold tire Proper tire inflation cannot be
Underinflated tires, or tires inflation pressures. The determined by looking at the tire.
that do not have enough air, recommended pressure is the Check the tire inflation pressure
can result in: minimum air pressure needed to when the tires are cold, meaning
support the vehicle's maximum the vehicle has not been driven
. Tire overloading and load carrying capacity. See
overheating which could for at least three hours or no
Vehicle Load Limits on more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
lead to a blowout. page 9-10.
. Premature or Remove the valve cap from the
How the vehicle is loaded tire valve stem. Press the tire
irregular wear. affects vehicle handling and ride gauge firmly onto the valve to
. Poor handling. comfort. Never load the vehicle get a pressure measurement.
with more weight than it was If the cold tire inflation pressure
. Reduced fuel economy. designed to carry. matches the recommended
Overinflated tires, or tires that
When to Check pressure on the Tire and
have too much air, can Loading Information label, no
result in: Check the tires once a month or
further adjustment is necessary.
Unusual wear. more. Do not forget the compact
.
If the inflation pressure is low,
spare, if the vehicle has one.
. Poor handling. add air until the recommended
The cold compact spare tire
pressure is reached. If the
. Rough ride. pressure should be at 420 kPa
inflation pressure is high, press
(60 psi). See Compact Spare
. Needless damage from on the metal stem in the center
Tire on page 10-65.
road hazards. of the tire valve to release air.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-44 Vehicle Care
Recheck the tire pressure with tire inflation pressure label, you not reached the level to trigger
the tire gauge. should determine the proper tire illumination of the TPMS low tire
inflation pressure for those tires.) pressure telltale.
Return the valve caps on the
valve stems to prevent leaks As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been
vehicle has been equipped with a equipped with a TPMS malfunction
and keep out dirt and moisture.
tire pressure monitoring system indicator to indicate when the
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire system is not operating properly.
Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or more The TPMS malfunction indicator is
System of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure
under-inflated. telltale. When the system detects a
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then
technology to check tire pressure
should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated.
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
the air pressure in your tires and
to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start-ups as
transmit tire pressure readings to a
significantly under-inflated tire long as the malfunction exists.
receiver located in the vehicle.
causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is
Each tire, including the spare (if
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation illuminated, the system may not be
provided), should be checked
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire
monthly when cold and inflated to
tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS
the inflation pressure recommended
vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
ability. of reasons, including the installation
vehicle placard or tire inflation
Please note that the TPMS is not a of replacement or alternate tires or
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
tires of a different size than the size
maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
indicated on the vehicle placard or
responsibility to maintain correct tire Always check the TPMS malfunction
pressure, even if under-inflation has telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-45
ensure that the replacement or about the DIC operation and

alternate tires and wheels allow the displays see Driver Information
TPMS to continue to function Center (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) on
properly. page 5-24 or Driver Information
See Tire Pressure Monitor Center (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)
Operation on page 10-45. on page 5-29 and Tire Messages on
When a low tire pressure condition page 5-39.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
is detected, the TPMS illuminates The low tire pressure warning light
page 13-15.
the low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when
located on the instrument cluster. the vehicle is first started, and then
Tire Pressure Monitor If the warning light comes on, stop turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
Operation as soon as possible and inflate the could be an early indicator that the
tires to the recommended pressure air pressure is getting low and
This vehicle may have a Tire
shown on the tire loading needs to be inflated to the proper
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
information label. See Vehicle Load pressure.
The TPMS is designed to warn the
Limits on page 9-10.
driver when a low tire pressure A Tire and Loading Information label
condition exists. TPMS sensors are A message to check the pressure in shows the size of the original
mounted onto each tire and wheel a specific tire displays in the Driver equipment tires and the correct
assembly, excluding the spare tire Information Center (DIC). The low inflation pressure for the tires when
and wheel assembly, if the vehicle tire pressure warning light and the they are cold. See Vehicle Load
has one. The TPMS sensors DIC warning message come on at Limits on page 9-10, for an example
monitor the air pressure in the tires each ignition cycle until the tires are of the Tire and Loading Information
and transmits the tire pressure inflated to the correct inflation label and its location. Also see Tire
readings to a receiver located in the pressure. Using the DIC, tire Pressure on page 10-42.
vehicle. pressure levels can be viewed. For
additional information and details

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-46 Vehicle Care
The TPMS can warn about a low TPMS Malfunction Light and
. The TPMS sensor matching
tire pressure condition but it does Message process was not done or not
not replace normal tire completed successfully after
maintenance. See Tire Inspection The TPMS will not function properly rotating the tires. The
on page 10-48, Tire Rotation on if one or more of the TPMS sensors malfunction light and the DIC
page 10-48 and Tires on are missing or inoperable. When the message should go off after
page 10-35. system detects a malfunction, the successfully completing the
low tire warning light flashes for sensor matching process. See
about one minute and then stays on "TPMS Sensor Matching
{ Caution for the remainder of the ignition Process" later in this section.
cycle. A DIC warning message
Tire sealant materials are not all . One or more TPMS sensors are
displays. The malfunction light and
the same. A non-approved tire missing or damaged. The
DIC warning message come on at
sealant could damage the TPMS each ignition cycle until the problem malfunction light and the DIC
sensors. TPMS sensor damage is corrected. Some of the conditions message should go off when the
caused by using an incorrect tire that can cause these to come TPMS sensors are installed and
sealant is not covered by the on are: the sensor matching process is
vehicle warranty. Always use only performed successfully. See
the GM approved tire sealant
. One of the road tires has been your dealer for service.
available through your dealer or replaced with the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. The
. Replacement tires or wheels do
included in the vehicle. not match the original equipment
spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensor. The malfunction tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
light and DIC message should other than those recommended
go off after the road tire is could prevent the TPMS from
replaced and the sensor functioning properly. See Buying
matching process is performed New Tires on page 10-50.
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
Matching Process" later in this
section.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-47

. Operating electronic devices or relearn tool, in the following order: 4. Start with the driver side
being near facilities using radio driver side front tire, passenger side front tire.
wave frequencies similar to the front tire, passenger side rear tire,
TPMS could cause the TPMS 5. Place the relearn tool against
and driver side rear. See your the tire sidewall, near the valve
sensors to malfunction. dealer for service or to purchase a stem. Then press the button to
If the TPMS is not functioning relearn tool. activate the TPMS sensor.
properly, it cannot detect or signal a There are two minutes to match the A horn chirp confirms that the
low tire condition. See your dealer first tire/wheel position, and sensor identification code has
for service if the TPMS malfunction five minutes overall to match all four been matched to this tire and
light and DIC message comes on tire/wheel positions. If it takes wheel position.
and stays on. longer, the matching process stops 6. Proceed to the passenger side
TPMS Sensor Matching and must be restarted. front tire, and repeat the
Process The TPMS sensor matching process procedure in Step 5.
is outlined below: 7. Proceed to the passenger side
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. The identification 1. Set the parking brake. rear tire, and repeat the
code needs to be matched to a new 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with procedure in Step 5.
tire/wheel position after rotating the the engine off. 8. Proceed to the driver side rear
tires or replacing one or more of the tire, and repeat the procedure in
TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter's LOCK and Step 5. The horn sounds two
matching process should also be times to indicate the sensor
performed after replacing a spare UNLOCK buttons at the same
time for approximately identification code has been
tire with a road tire containing the matched to the driver side rear
TPMS sensor. The malfunction light five seconds. The horn sounds
twice to signal the receiver is in tire, and the TPMS sensor
and the DIC message should go off matching process is no longer
at the next ignition cycle. The relearn mode and TIRE
LEARNING ACTIVE message active. The TIRE LEARNING
sensors are matched to the tire/ ACTIVE message on the DIC
wheel positions, using a TPMS displays on the DIC screen.
display screen goes off.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-48 Vehicle Care
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. . The tread or sidewall is inflation pressure, and check for
10. Set all four tires to the
cracked, cut, or snagged damaged tires or wheels. If the
recommended air pressure deep enough to show cord or unusual wear continues after the
level as indicated on the Tire fabric. rotation, check the wheel
and Loading Information label. . The tire has a bump, bulge, alignment. See When It Is Time
11. Put the valve caps back on the or split. for New Tires on page 10-49
valve stems. and Wheel Replacement on
. The tire has a puncture, cut, page 10-54.
or other damage that cannot
Tire Inspection be repaired well because of
We recommend that the tires, the size or location of the
including the spare tire, if the damage.
vehicle has one, be inspected
for signs of wear or damage at Tire Rotation
least once a month.
Tires should be rotated every
Replace the tire if: 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
. The indicators at three or Maintenance Schedule on
more places around the tire page 11-3.
can be seen. Tires are rotated to achieve a
. There is cord or fabric uniform wear for all tires. The
showing through the tire's first rotation is the most Use this rotation pattern when
rubber. important. rotating the tires.
Anytime unusual wear is If the vehicle has a compact
noticed, rotate the tires as soon spare tire, do not include it in the
as possible, check for proper tire tire rotation.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-49
Adjust the front and rear tires to

Warning (Continued)
When It Is Time for New
the recommended inflation Tires
pressure on the Tire and off and cause an accident. When
Loading Information label after Factors such as maintenance,
changing a wheel, remove any temperatures, driving speeds,
the tires have been rotated. See rust or dirt from places where the vehicle loading, and road conditions
Tire Pressure on page 10-42 wheel attaches to the vehicle. In affect the wear rate of the tires.
and Vehicle Load Limits on an emergency, a cloth or a paper
page 9-10. towel can be used; however, use
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor a scraper or wire brush later to
System. See Tire Pressure remove all rust or dirt.
Monitor Operation on
page 10-45. Lightly coat the center of the
Check that all wheel nuts are wheel hub with wheel bearing
properly tightened. See “Wheel grease after a wheel change or
Nut Torque” under Capacities tire rotation to prevent corrosion
and Specifications on or rust build-up. Do not get
page 12-2. grease on the flat wheel
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.
{ Warning Treadwear indicators are one way to
tell when it is time for new tires.
Check that the spare tire, if the
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the vehicle has one, is stored Treadwear indicators appear when
parts to which it is fastened, can properly. Push, pull, and then try the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
make wheel nuts become loose to rotate or turn the tire. If it or less of tread remaining. See Tire
after time. The wheel could come Inspection on page 10-48 and Tire
moves, tighten the cable. See
(Continued) Rotation on page 10-48.
Tire Changing on page 10-57.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-50 Vehicle Care
The rubber in tires ages over time. slow aging. This area should be free GM's exclusive TPC Spec
This also applies to the spare tire, of grease, gasoline, or other system considers over a dozen
if the vehicle has one, even if it is substances that can deteriorate critical specifications that impact
never used. Multiple factors rubber. the overall performance of the
including temperatures, loading Parking for an extended period can vehicle, including brake system
conditions, and inflation pressure cause flat spots on the tires that
maintenance affect how fast aging performance, ride and handling,
may result in vibrations while traction control, and tire
takes place. GM recommends that driving. When storing a vehicle for
tires, including the spare if pressure monitoring
at least a month, remove the tires or performance. GM's TPC Spec
equipped, be replaced after six raise the vehicle to reduce the
years, regardless of tread wear. The weight from the tires.
number is molded onto the tire's
tire manufacturer date is the last sidewall near the tire size. If the
four digits of the DOT Tire tires have an all-season tread
Identification Number (TIN) which is Buying New Tires
design, the TPC Spec number
molded into one side of the tire GM has developed and matched will be followed by MS for mud
sidewall. The first two digits specific tires for the vehicle. The and snow. See Tire Sidewall
represent the week (01–52) and the original equipment tires installed
last two digits, the year. For Labeling on page 10-37.
were designed to meet General
example, the third week of the year GM recommends replacing worn
2010 would have a four-digit DOT
Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) tires in complete sets of four.
date of 0310. Uniform tread depth on all tires
system rating. When
Vehicle Storage replacement tires are needed, will help to maintain the
GM strongly recommends performance of the vehicle.
Tires age when stored normally
buying tires with the same TPC Braking and handling
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
a vehicle that will be stored for at Spec rating. performance may be adversely
least a month in a cool, dry, clean affected if all the tires are not
area away from direct sunlight to replaced at the same time.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-51
If proper rotation and

maintenance have been done, Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
all four tires should wear out at Only your dealer or authorized A tire and/or wheel could fail
about the same time. See Tire tire service center should suddenly and cause a crash.
Rotation on page 10-48. mount or dismount the tires. Use only radial-ply tires with
However, if it is necessary to the wheels on the vehicle.
replace only one axle set of
worn tires, place the new tires
on the rear axle. { Warning If the vehicle tires must be
replaced with a tire that does not
Winter tires with the same speed Mixing tires of different sizes, have a TPC Spec number, make
rating as the original equipment brands, or types may cause sure they are the same size,
tires may not be available for H, loss of control of the vehicle, load range, speed rating, and
V, W, Y and ZR speed rated resulting in a crash or other construction (radial) as the
tires. Never exceed the winter vehicle damage. Use the original tires.
tires’ maximum speed capability correct size, brand, and type
when using winter tires with a of tires on all wheels. Vehicles that have a tire
lower speed rating. pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
low-pressure warning if non-TPC
{ Warning { Warning Spec rated tires are installed.
Tires could explode during See Tire Pressure Monitor
Using bias-ply tires on the
improper service. Attempting System on page 10-44.
vehicle may cause the wheel
to mount or dismount a tire rim flanges to develop cracks
could cause injury or death. after many miles of driving.
(Continued)
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-52 Vehicle Care
The Tire and Loading Uniform Tire Quality

Information label indicates the { Warning Grading
original equipment tires on the If different sized wheels are used,
vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits Quality grades can be found
there may not be an acceptable
on page 9-10. level of performance and safety if
where applicable on the tire
tires not recommended for those sidewall between tread shoulder
Different Size Tires and wheels are selected. This and maximum section width. For
Wheels increases the chance of a crash example:
and serious injury. Only use GM Treadwear 200 Traction AA
If wheels or tires are installed that
specific wheel and tire systems Temperature A
are a different size than the original
developed for the vehicle, and
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle The following information relates
performance, including its braking, have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician. to the system developed by the
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover United States National Highway
may be affected. If the vehicle has See Buying New Tires on
Traffic Safety Administration
electronic systems such as antilock page 10-50 and Accessories and (NHTSA), which grades tires by
brakes, rollover airbags, traction Modifications on page 10-2. treadwear, traction, and
control, electronic stability control, temperature performance. This
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance applies only to vehicles sold in
of these systems can also be the United States. The grades
affected. are molded on the sidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter tires,
compact spare tires, tires with

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-53
nominal rim diameters of graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), one-half (1½) times as well on tests, and does not include
or to some limited-production the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering,
tires. graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction
While the tires available on performance of tires depends characteristics.
General Motors passenger cars upon the actual conditions of
Temperature
and light trucks may vary with their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A
respect to these grades, they
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C,
must also conform to federal
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance
safety requirements and
differences in road to the generation of heat and its
additional General Motors Tire
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
Performance Criteria (TPC)
tested under controlled
standards. Traction conditions on a specified indoor
All Passenger Car Tires Must The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
Conform to Federal Safety highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
Requirements In Addition To and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
These Grades. the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
Treadwear pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade
The treadwear grade is a specified government test C corresponds to a level of
comparative rating based on the surfaces of asphalt and performance which all
wear rate of the tire when tested concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet
under controlled conditions on a have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety
specified government test Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and
course. For example, a tire assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-54 Vehicle Care
performance on the laboratory surface variations such as troughs Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
test wheel than the minimum or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
required by law. Warning: The vibrating when driving on a smooth System (TPMS) sensors with new
temperature grade for this tire is road, the tires and wheels may need GM original equipment parts.
to be rebalanced. See your dealer
established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
for proper diagnosis. { Warning
overloaded. Excessive speed, Wheel Replacement Using the wrong replacement
underinflation, or excessive wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
loading, either separately or in Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or nuts can be dangerous. It could
combination, can cause heat affect the braking and handling of
buildup and possible tire failure. corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
wheel nuts should be replaced. and cause loss of control, causing
Wheel Alignment and Tire If the wheel leaks air, replace it. a crash. Always use the correct
Balance Some aluminum wheels can be wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
repaired. See your dealer if any of nuts for replacement.
The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to these conditions exist.
provide the longest tire life and best Your dealer will know the kind of
overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing
wheel that is needed. { Caution
Each new wheel should have the
are not necessary on a regular same load-carrying capacity, The wrong wheel can also cause
basis. Consider an alignment check diameter, width, offset, and be problems with bearing life, brake
if there is unusual tire wear or the mounted the same way as the one it cooling, speedometer or
vehicle is significantly pulling to one replaces. odometer calibration, headlamp
side or the other. Some slight pull to aim, bumper height, vehicle
the left or right, depending on the
(Continued)
crown of the road and/or other road

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-55
Caution (Continued)
Tire Chains If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
ground clearance, and tire or tire { Warning while driving, especially if the tires
chain clearance to the body and are maintained properly. See Tires
chassis. Do not use tire chains. There is on page 10-35. If air goes out of a
not enough clearance. Tire chains tire, it is much more likely to leak
used on a vehicle without the out slowly. But if there ever is a
Used Replacement Wheels proper amount of clearance can blowout, here are a few tips about
cause damage to the brakes, what to expect and what to do:
{ Warning suspension, or other vehicle
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
parts. The area damaged by the
Replacing a wheel with a used creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
tire chains could cause loss of toward that side. Take your foot off
one is dangerous. How it has control and a crash.
been used or how far it has been the accelerator pedal and grip the
driven may be unknown. It could Use another type of traction steering wheel firmly. Steer to
device only if its manufacturer maintain lane position, and then
fail suddenly and cause a crash.
recommends it for the vehicle's gently brake to a stop, well off the
When replacing wheels, use a
tire size combination and road road, if possible.
new GM original equipment
wheel. conditions. Follow that A rear blowout, particularly on a
manufacturer's instructions. To curve, acts much like a skid and
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow may require the same correction as
and readjust or remove the used in a skid. Stop pressing the
traction device if it contacts the accelerator pedal and steer to
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. straighten the vehicle. It may be
If traction devices are used, install very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake
them on the front tires. to a stop, well off the road,
if possible.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-56 Vehicle Care
{ Warning Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)

Driving on a flat tire will cause changing a flat tire. If it is used for 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
permanent damage to the tire. anything else, you or others could 2. Put an automatic
Re-inflating a tire after it has been be badly injured or killed if the transmission in P (Park) or a
driven on while severely vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack manual transmission in
underinflated or flat may cause a is provided with the vehicle, only 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
blowout and a serious crash. use it for changing a flat tire.
3. Turn off the engine and do
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
not restart while the vehicle
that has been driven on while If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire is raised.
severely underinflated or flat. and wheel damage by driving slowly
Have your dealer or an authorized 4. Do not allow passengers to
to a level place, well off the road,
tire service center repair or remain in the vehicle.
if possible. Turn on the hazard
replace the flat tire as soon as warning flashers. See Hazard 5. Place wheel blocks on both
possible. Warning Flashers on page 6-3. sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire
{ Warning being changed.
{ Warning Changing a tire can be When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),
Lifting a vehicle and getting under dangerous. The vehicle can slip use the following example as a
it to do maintenance or repairs is off the jack and roll over or fall guide to assist in the placement of
dangerous without the causing injury or death. Find a the wheel blocks (1).
appropriate safety equipment and level place to change the tire. To
training. If a jack is provided with help prevent the vehicle from
the vehicle, it is designed only for moving:
(Continued) (Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-57
4. Turn the jack on its side, with the

bottom facing toward you.
5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom
first.
1. Wheel Block
2. Flat Tire
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire. 1. Tool Bag
2. Wing Bolt
Tire Changing 3. Jack
Removing Tools 1. Open the jack storage
compartment by pulling on the 1. Jack
The tools needed to remove the
latch tab, located toward the rear
spare tire are located in the storage 2. Wrench (Three-Piece Shown,
of the vehicle, and pulling the
compartment on the driver side, at One-Piece Similar)
cover off.
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Remove the wing bolt (2) by The tools you will be using include
turning it counterclockwise. the jack (1) and wrench (2).
3. Push the jack (3) up out of the

holding bracket and remove the
tool bag (1).

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-58 Vehicle Care
Removing the Spare Tire 1. Open the storage compartment 5. Tilt the retainer and slip it
door of the convenience through the wheel opening to
The compact spare tire is located
center (1) that is nearest the remove the spare tire from the
under the vehicle, in front of the rear
liftgate. cable.
bumper. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 10-65 for more information. 2. Open the carpet cutout (3) that 6. Turn the wrench clockwise to
is located through the hole of the raise the cable back up after
storage compartment. removing the spare tire.
3. Attach the wrench (2) into the Do not store a full-size or a flat
hoist shaft (4). road tire under the vehicle. See
4. Turn the wrench (2) “Storing the Spare Tire” and
counterclockwise to lower the “Storing the Flat Tire” later in this
spare tire (5) to the ground. section.
Continue turning the wrench until Removing the Flat Tire and
the spare tire can be pulled out Installing the Spare Tire
from under the vehicle.
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10-55 for more
1. Rear Convenience Center information.
2. Wrench (Three-Piece Shown,
One-Piece Similar)
3. Carpet Cutout
4. Hoist Shaft
5. Compact Spare Tire
6. Retainer

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-59
2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover,

loosen the plastic nut caps with { Caution
the wheel wrench. They will not
come off. Then, using the flat If this vehicle has wheel locks and
end of the wheel wrench, pry an impact wrench is used to
along the edge of the cover until remove the wheel nuts, the lock
it comes off. Be careful; the nut or wheel lock key could be
edges may be sharp. Do not try damaged. Do not use an impact
to remove the cover with your wrench to remove the wheel nuts
bare hands. if this vehicle has wheel locks.
Store the wheel cover securely
in the rear of the vehicle until
you have the flat tire repaired or 3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do
replaced. not remove them — using the
If the vehicle has aluminum wrench. For wheels with a wheel
wheels, remove the wheel nut lock key, use the wheel lock key
caps using the wheel wrench. between the lock nut and
wrench. The key is supplied in
the front passenger door pocket.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-60 Vehicle Care
4. To identify the appropriate

jacking location, find the triangle { Caution { Warning
or rectangular notch about
30.5 cm (12 in) from the front tire If a jack is used to raise the Raising the vehicle with the jack
or about 27 cm (10.5 in) from the vehicle without positioning it improperly positioned can
rear tire. correctly, the vehicle could be damage the vehicle and even
damaged. When raising the make the vehicle fall. To help
vehicle on a jack, avoid contact avoid personal injury and vehicle
with the rear axle control arms. damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
5. Attach the wrench to the jack, before raising the vehicle.
and turn the wrench clockwise to
raise the jack head 7.6 cm (3 in). 7. Raise the vehicle by turning the
6. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put wrench clockwise in the jack.
the compact spare tire near you. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so that there is
enough room for the spare tire to
{ Warning fit under the wheel well.
Triangle Shown, Without Similar Getting under a vehicle when it is 8. Remove all the wheel nuts and
The triangle may be located lifted on a jack is dangerous. the flat tire.
near each wheel on the vehicle's If the vehicle slips off the jack,
exterior. you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle
when it is supported only by
a jack.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-61
mounting surface. Make sure

Warning (Continued) the rounded end is toward the
wheel.
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the 13. Lower the vehicle by attaching
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In the wrench to the jack and
an emergency, a cloth or a paper turning the wrench
towel can be used; however, use counterclockwise. Lower the
a scraper or wire brush later to jack completely.
remove all rust or dirt.
{ Warning
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
9. Remove the plastic spare tire { Warning incorrectly tightened can cause
heat shield by pulling the rubber the wheels to become loose or
latch. Store the plastic spare tire Never use oil or grease on bolts come off. The wheel nuts should
heat shield. See “Storing the or nuts because the nuts might be tightened with a torque wrench
Spare Tire” later in this section come loose. The vehicle's wheel to the proper torque specification
for more information. could fall off, causing a crash. after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
{ Warning 10. Remove any rust or dirt from aftermarket manufacturer when
the wheel bolts, mounting using accessory locking wheel
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the nuts. See Capacities and
surfaces, and spare wheel.
parts to which it is fastened, can Specifications on page 12-2 for
make wheel nuts become loose 11. Place the spare tire on the
original equipment wheel nut
after time. The wheel could come wheel mounting surface.
torque specifications.
off and cause an accident. When 12. Put the nuts on by hand by
(Continued) turning them clockwise until the
wheel is held against the

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-62 Vehicle Care
14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in

{ Caution a crisscross sequence, as Warning (Continued)
shown.
Improperly tightened wheel nuts the vehicle was being driven, the
can lead to brake pulsation and tire might contact a person or
rotor damage. To avoid expensive { Caution another vehicle, causing injury
brake repairs, evenly tighten the Wheel covers will not fit on the and damage to itself. Be sure the
wheel nuts in the proper vehicle's compact spare. If you try underbody-mounted spare tire is
sequence and to the proper to put a wheel cover on the stored with the valve stem
torque specification. See compact spare, the cover or the pointing down.
Capacities and Specifications for spare could be damaged.
the wheel nut torque specification.
Storing the Spare Tire { Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or other
{ Warning equipment in the passenger
The underbody-mounted spare compartment of the vehicle could
tire needs to be stored with the cause injury. In a sudden stop or
valve stem pointing down. If the collision, loose equipment could
spare tire is stored with the valve strike someone. Store all these in
stem pointing upwards, the the proper place.
secondary latch will not work
properly and the spare tire could To store the spare tire:
loosen and suddenly fall from the 1. Lay the compact spare tire near
vehicle. If this happened when the rear of the vehicle with the
(Continued) valve stem down.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-63
2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire Storing the Flat Tire

heat shield on the compact
spare tire.
3. Slide the cable retainer through
the center of the wheel and start
to raise the compact spare tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully
seated across the underside of
the wheel.
4. When the compact spare tire is
almost in the stored position,
turn the tire so the valve is 6. Make sure the tire is stored
toward the rear of the vehicle. securely. Push, pull, and then try
This position helps when to turn the tire. If the tire moves, 1. Cable
checking the air pressure in the use the wrench to tighten the
cable. 2. Liftgate Hinges
compact spare tire.
3. Spare Tire Heat Shield
5. Raise the tire fully against the
underside of the vehicle. 4. Center of the Wheel
Continue turning the wrench until 5. Door Striker
you feel more than two clicks. 1. Remove the cable package from
This indicates that the compact the jack storage area.
spare tire is secure and the
cable is tight. The spare tire 2. Remove the small center cap by
hoist cannot be overtightened. tapping the back of the cap with
the extension of the shaft, if the
vehicle has aluminum wheels.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-64 Vehicle Care
3. Put the flat tire in the rear 7. Pull on the cable to make sure it Storing the Tools
storage area with the valve stem is secure.
pointing toward the rear of the
vehicle.
4. Pull the cable (1) through the
door striker (5), the center of the
wheel (4), and the plastic spare
tire heat shield (3), as shown.
1. Tool Bag
8. Make sure the metal tube is 2. Wing Bolt
centered at the striker. Push the
tube toward the front of the 3. Jack
vehicle. Put back all tools as they were
9. Close the liftgate and make sure stored in the jack storage
it is latched properly. compartment and put the
5. Hook the cable onto the outside compartment cover back on.
portion of the liftgate hinges (2). 1. Ensure that the bottom of the
6. Hook the other end of the cable jack is facing toward you.
onto the outside portion of the 2. Replace the tool bag (1).
liftgate hinge on the other side of
the vehicle.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-65
3. Turn the jack (3) on its side and Compact Spare Tire The vehicle will perform differently
place down on the holding with the spare tire installed and it is
bracket. recommended that the vehicle
4. Reinstall the wing bolt (2) by
{ Warning speed be limited to 80 km/h
turning clockwise. Driving with more than one (50 mph). To conserve the tread of
the spare tire, have the standard tire
5. To replace the cover, line up the compact spare tire at a time could
repaired or replaced as soon as
tab at the front of the cover with result in loss of braking and
convenient and return the spare tire
the notch in the cover opening. handling. This could lead to a to the storage area.
Push the cover in place and crash and you or others could be
make sure that the rear clips are injured. Use only one compact When using a compact spare tire,
in the slots and push the cover spare tire at a time. the ABS and Traction Control
closed. systems may engage until the spare
tire is recognized by the vehicle,
Store the center cap or the plastic If this vehicle has a compact spare especially on slippery roads. Adjust
bolt-on wheel covers until a full size tire, it was fully inflated when new; driving to reduce possible
tire is put back on the vehicle. When however, it can lose air over time. wheel slip.
you replace the compact spare with Check the inflation pressure
a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on regularly. It should be 420 kPa Performance of the All-Wheel
wheel covers or the center cap. (60 psi). Drive (AWD) system will be
Hand-tighten them over the wheel automatically reduced to protect the
Stop as soon as possible and check system when using the compact
nuts, using the wrench. that the spare tire is correctly spare. To restore the AWD and
inflated after being installed on the prevent excessive wear on the
vehicle. The compact spare tire is clutch in the AWD, replace the
designed for temporary use only. compact spare tire with a full-size
tire as soon as possible.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-66 Vehicle Care
{ Caution Jump Starting { Caution

For more information about the
When the compact spare is vehicle battery, see Battery on Ignoring these steps could result
installed, do not take the vehicle page 10-22. in costly damage to the vehicle
through an automatic car wash that would not be covered by the
with guide rails. The compact If the vehicle battery has run down, vehicle warranty. Trying to start
spare can get caught on the rails you may want to use another the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
vehicle and some jumper cables to
which can damage the tire, wheel, will not work, and it could damage
start your vehicle. Be sure to use
and other parts of the vehicle. the vehicle.
the following steps to do it safely.
Do not use the compact spare on

other vehicles.
{ Warning 1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
Do not mix the compact spare tire or Batteries can hurt you. They can negative ground system.
wheel with other wheels or tires. be dangerous because:
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire . They contain acid that can { Caution
and its wheel together. burn you.
If the other vehicle does not have
. They contain gas that can a 12-volt system with a negative
{ Caution explode or ignite. ground, both vehicles can be
Tire chains will not fit the compact . They contain enough damaged. Only use a vehicle that
spare. Using them can damage electricity to burn you. has a 12-volt system with a
the vehicle and the chains. Do not negative ground for jump starting.
If you do not follow these steps
use tire chains on the compact exactly, some or all of these
spare. things can hurt you.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-67
2. Get the vehicles close enough 4. Open the hoods and locate the
so the jumper cables can reach, { Caution positive (+) and negative (−)
but be sure the vehicles are not terminal locations on the other
touching each other. If they are, If any accessories are left on or vehicle. Your vehicle has a
it could cause a ground plugged in during the jump remote positive (+) and a remote
connection you do not want. You starting procedure, they could be negative (−) jump starting
would not be able to start your damaged. The repairs would not terminal. See Engine
vehicle, and the bad grounding be covered by the vehicle Compartment Overview on
could damage the electrical warranty. Whenever possible, turn page 10-5 for the terminal
systems. off or unplug all accessories on locations.
either vehicle when jump starting.
To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking { Warning
brake firmly on both vehicles 3. Turn off the ignition on both
involved in the jump start vehicles. Unplug unnecessary Using a match near a battery can
procedure. Put an automatic accessories plugged into the cause battery gas to explode.
transmission in P (Park) or a cigarette lighter or the accessory People have been hurt doing this,
manual transmission in Neutral power outlets. Turn off the radio and some have been blinded.
before setting the parking brake. and all lamps that are not Use a flashlight if you need more
If one of the vehicles is a needed. This will avoid sparks light.
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure and help save both batteries. Be sure the batteries have
the transfer case is not in And it could save the radio! enough water. You do not need to
Neutral.
add water to the ACDelco®
battery (or batteries) installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-68 Vehicle Care
5. Check that the jumper cables do

Warning (Continued) not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
add water to take care of that get a shock. The vehicles could
first. If you do not, explosive gas be damaged too.
could be present.
Before you connect the cables,
Battery fluid contains acid that here are some basic things you
can burn you. Do not get it on should know. Positive (+) will go
you. If you accidentally get it in to positive (+) or to a remote
your eyes or on your skin, flush positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
the place with water and get has one. Negative (−) will go to a
medical help immediately. heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to a remote negative (−) 6. Connect the red positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one. cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery.
{ Warning Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a Use a remote positive (+)
Fans or other moving engine short that would damage the terminal if the vehicle has one.
parts can injure you badly. Keep battery and maybe other parts
too. And do not connect the 7. Do not let the other end touch
your hands away from moving metal. Connect it to the
parts once the engine is running. negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead positive (+) terminal of the good
battery because this can cause battery. Use a remote
sparks. positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-69
8. Now connect the black 11. Try to start the vehicle that had
negative (−) cable to the the dead battery. If it will not
negative (−) terminal of the good start after a few tries, it
battery. Use a remote probably needs service.
negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one. { Caution
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step. The If the jumper cables are
other end of the negative (−) connected or removed in the
cable does not go to the dead wrong order, electrical shorting
battery. It goes to a heavy, may occur and damage the
unpainted metal engine part, vehicle. The repairs would not be
or to a remote negative (−) 9. Connect the other end of the covered by the vehicle warranty.
terminal on the vehicle with the negative (−) cable to the remote Always connect and remove the
dead battery. negative (−) terminal of the dead jumper cables in the correct order,
battery. making sure that the cables do
not touch each other or other
Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal for this metal.
purpose.
10. Now start the vehicle with the Jumper Cable Removal
good battery and run the Reverse the sequence exactly when
engine for a while. removing the jumper cables.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-70 Vehicle Care
Towing the Vehicle Consult your dealer or a Here are some important things to
professional towing service if the consider before recreational vehicle
disabled vehicle must be towed. towing:
{ Caution To tow the vehicle behind another . The towing capacity of the
Incorrectly towing a disabled vehicle for recreational purposes, towing vehicle. Be sure to read
vehicle may cause damage. The such as behind a motor home, see the tow vehicle manufacturer's
damage would not be covered by “Recreational Vehicle Towing” recommendations.
the vehicle warranty. Do not lash following. . How far the vehicle will be
or hook to the chassis towed. Some vehicles have
components — including the front Recreational Vehicle restrictions on how far and how
and rear subframes, suspension Towing long they can be towed.
control arms, and links — during Recreational vehicle towing means . The proper towing equipment.
towing and recovery of a disabled towing the vehicle behind another See your dealer or trailering
vehicle, or when securing the vehicle – such as behind a motor professional for additional advice
vehicle to a flatbed car carrier. home. The two most common types and equipment
Use the proper nylon strap of recreational vehicle towing are recommendations.
harnesses around the tires to known as dinghy towing and dolly . If the vehicle is ready to be
secure them to the flatbed car towing. Dinghy towing is towing the towed. Just as preparing the
carrier. vehicle with all four wheels on the vehicle for a long trip, make sure
ground. Dolly towing is towing the the vehicle is prepared to be
Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed vehicle with two wheels on the towed.
car carrier or a wheel lift tow truck. ground and two wheels up on a
If a wheel lift tow truck is used, the device known as a dolly.
drive wheels cannot contact the
road while the vehicle is being
towed. A wheel dolly must be used
to lift all drive wheels off the ground.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-71
Dinghy Towing For vehicles being dinghy towed, 6. To prevent the battery from
the vehicle should be run at the draining while the vehicle is
beginning of each day and at each being towed, remove the 15 amp
RV fuel stop for about five minutes. ECM fuse and the 15 amp
This will ensure proper lubrication of Onstar fuse. These are in the
transmission components. Reinstall battery compartment behind the
the fuse to start the vehicle. passenger seat on the floor.
To tow the vehicle from the front Also, remove the 50 amp BATT1
with all four wheels on the ground: fuse from the underhood fuse
block and store all fuses in a
1. Position the vehicle to be towed, safe location. See Engine
shift the transmission to Compartment Fuse Block on
P (Park), and turn the ignition to page 10-29.
LOCK/OFF.
7. Release the parking brake.
If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive, it 2. Secure the vehicle to the towing
can be dinghy towed from the front. vehicle.
{ Caution
These vehicles may also be towed 3. Set the parking brake.
by putting the front wheels on a If the vehicle is towed without
4. Turn the ignition to ACC/ performing each of the steps
dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this ACCESSORY.
section. listed under “Dinghy Towing,” the
5. Shift the transmission to automatic transmission could be
If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, it N (Neutral).
can be dinghy towed from the front. damaged. Be sure to follow all
These vehicles can also be towed steps of the dinghy towing
by placing them on a platform trailer procedure prior to and after
with all four wheels off of the towing the vehicle.
ground. These vehicles cannot be
towed using a dolly.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-72 Vehicle Care
a platform trailer with all four wheels

{ Caution Caution (Continued) off of the ground or dinghy towed
from the front.
If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceeded different tire sizes on the front of
while towing the vehicle, it could the vehicle can cause severe Dolly Towing
be damaged. Never exceed damage to the transmission. (Front-Wheel-Drive
105 km/h (65 mph) while towing Vehicles Only)
the vehicle.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles)
Once the destination is reached:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Reinstall the fuses.
3. Shift the transmission to
P (Park), turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF and remove the key
from the ignition.
4. Disconnect the vehicle from the
towing vehicle.
To tow a front-wheel-drive vehicle
{ Caution from the front with two wheels on
the ground:
Do not tow a vehicle with the front All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be
drive wheels on the ground if one towed with two wheels on the 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
of the front tires is a compact ground. To properly tow these 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
spare tire. Towing with two vehicles, they should be placed on
3. Set the parking brake.
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-73
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a Appearance Care

straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing. Exterior Care
5. Remove the key from the Locks
ignition. Locks are lubricated at the factory.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. Use a de-icing agent only when
absolutely necessary, and have the
7. Release the parking brake.
locks greased after using. See
Towing the Vehicle From Recommended Fluids and
the Rear Lubricants on page 11-11.
Washing the Vehicle
{ Caution To preserve the vehicle's finish,
Towing the vehicle from the rear wash it often and out of direct
could damage it. Also, repairs sunlight.
vehicle warranty. Never have the { Caution
vehicle towed from the rear.
Do not use petroleum-based,
acidic, or abrasive cleaning
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. agents as they can damage the
vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic
parts. If damage occurs, it would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Approved cleaning
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-74 Vehicle Care
The e symbol is on any Finish Care

Caution (Continued)
underhood compartment electrical Application of aftermarket clearcoat
products can be obtained from center that should not be power sealant/wax materials is not
your dealer. Follow all washed. This could cause damage recommended. If painted surfaces
manufacturer directions regarding that would not be covered by the are damaged, see your dealer to
vehicle warranty. have the damage assessed and
correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions, and If using an automatic car wash, repaired. Foreign materials such as
appropriate disposal of any follow the car wash instructions. The calcium chloride and other salts, ice
vehicle care product. windshield wiper and rear window melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
wiper, if equipped, must be off. sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
Remove any accessories that may industrial chimneys, etc., can
be damaged or interfere with the car damage the vehicle's finish if they
{ Caution wash equipment. remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
Avoid using high-pressure Rinse the vehicle well, before If necessary, use non-abrasive
washes closer than 30 cm (12 in) washing and after, to remove all cleaners that are marked safe for
cleaning agents completely. If they painted surfaces to remove foreign
to the surface of the vehicle. Use
are allowed to dry on the surface, matter.
of power washers exceeding
they could stain.
8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result Occasional hand waxing or mild
in damage or removal of paint Dry the finish with a soft, clean polishing should be done to remove
and decals. chamois or an all-cotton towel to residue from the paint finish. See
avoid surface scratches and water your dealer for approved cleaning
spotting. products.
Do not apply waxes or polishes to
uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,
decals, simulated wood, or flat paint
as damage can occur.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-75
The bright metal moldings on the Cleaning Exterior Lamps/

{ Caution vehicle are aluminum. To prevent Lenses and Emblems
damage always follow these
Machine compounding or cleaning instructions: Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
aggressive polishing on a soft cloth, and a car washing soap
. Be sure the molding is cool to
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish to clean exterior lamps, lenses and
may damage it. Use only the touch before applying any emblems. Follow instructions under
non-abrasive waxes and polishes cleaning solution. "Washing the Vehicle" previously in
that are made for a basecoat/ . Use a cleaning solution this section.
clearcoat paint finish on the approved for aluminum. Some Air Intakes
vehicle. cleaners are highly acidic or
contain alkaline substances and Clear debris from the air intakes,
can damage the moldings. between the hood and windshield
To keep the paint finish looking new, when washing the vehicle.
keep the vehicle garaged or . Always dilute a concentrated
covered whenever possible. cleaner according to the Windshield and Wiper Blades
manufacturer’s instructions.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Clean the outside of the windshield
. Do not use chrome cleaners.
Moldings with glass cleaner.
. Do not use cleaners that are not Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
{ Caution intended for automotive use. cloth or paper towel soaked with
. Use a nonabrasive wax on the windshield washer fluid or a mild
Failure to clean and protect the detergent. Wash the windshield
vehicle after washing to protect
bright metal moldings can result and extend the molding finish. thoroughly when cleaning the
in a hazy white finish or pitting. blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
This damage would not be a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
covered by the vehicle warranty. treatments may cause wiper
streaking.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-76 Vehicle Care
Replace the wiper blades if they are

worn or damaged. Damage can be { Caution Caution (Continued)
caused by extreme dusty
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, Using petroleum-based tire or sodium chloride. These
snow, and ice. dressing products on the vehicle chlorides are used on roads for
may damage the paint finish and/ conditions such as ice and dust.
Weatherstrips or tires. When applying a tire Always wash the chrome with
Apply Dielectric silicone grease on dressing, always wipe off any soap and water after exposure.
weatherstrips to make them last overspray from all painted
longer, seal better, and not stick or surfaces on the vehicle.
squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at
least once a year. Hot, dry climates
{ Caution
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
may require more frequent To avoid surface damage, do not
or Chrome
application. Black marks from use strong soaps, chemicals,
rubber material on painted surfaces Use a soft, clean cloth with mild
abrasive polishes, cleaners,
can be removed by rubbing with a soap and water to clean the wheels.
brushes, or cleaners that contain
clean cloth. See Recommended After rinsing thoroughly with clean
water, dry with a soft, clean towel. acid on aluminum or
Fluids and Lubricants on
page 11-11. A wax may then be applied. chrome-plated wheels. Use only
approved cleaners. Also, never
Tires drive a vehicle with aluminum or
{ Caution chrome-plated wheels through an
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
clean the tires. Chrome wheels and other chrome automatic car wash that uses
trim may be damaged if the silicone carbide tire cleaning
vehicle is not washed after driving brushes. Damage could occur
on roads that have been sprayed and the repairs would not be
with magnesium, calcium, covered by the vehicle warranty.
(Continued)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-77
Steering, Suspension, and Your dealer or an underbody car Chemical Paint Spotting
Chassis Components washing system can do this. If not
Airborne pollutants can fall upon
removed, rust and corrosion can
Visually inspect the front and rear and attack painted vehicle surfaces
develop.
suspension and steering system for causing blotchy, ring-shaped
damaged, loose, or missing parts or Sheet Metal Damage discolorations, and small, irregular
signs of wear. If equipped, inspect dark spots etched into the paint
If the vehicle is damaged and surface. See “Finish Care”
the hydraulic power steering for
requires sheet metal repair or previously in this section.
proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
replacement, make sure the body
cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
constant velocity joints, rubber
material to parts repaired or Interior Care
boots, and axle seals for leaks.
replaced to restore corrosion To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
Body Component Lubrication protection. regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Original manufacturer replacement Immediately remove any soils. Note
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, that newspapers or dark garments
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the that can transfer color to home
steel fuel door hinge unless the furnishings can also permanently
components are plastic. Applying vehicle warranty.
transfer color to the vehicle's
silicone grease on weatherstrips Finish Damage interior.
with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick Quickly repair minor chips and Use a soft bristle brush to remove
or squeak. scratches with touch-up materials dust from knobs and crevices on the
available from your dealer to avoid instrument cluster. Using a mild
Underbody Maintenance corrosion. Larger areas of finish soap solution, immediately remove
At least twice a year, Spring and damage can be corrected in your hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
Fall, use plain water to flush dirt and dealer's body and paint shop. repellent from all interior surfaces or
debris from the vehicle's underbody. permanent damage may result.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-78 Vehicle Care
Your dealer may have products for

. Never use a brush with stiff
cleaning the interior. Use cleaners bristles. { Caution
specifically designed for the . Never rub any surface
surfaces being cleaned to prevent To prevent scratching, never use
aggressively or with excessive
permanent damage. Apply all abrasive cleaners on automotive
pressure.
cleaners directly to the cleaning glass. Abrasive cleaners or
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
. Do not use laundry detergents or aggressive cleaning may damage
on any switches or controls. dishwashing soaps with the rear window defogger.
Cleaners should be removed degreasers. For liquid cleaners,
quickly. Never allow cleaners to use approximately 20 drops per
3.8 L (1 gal) of water. Cleaning the windshield with water
remain on the surface being during the first three to six months
cleaned for extended periods A concentrated soap solution will
leave a residue that creates of ownership will reduce tendency
of time. to fog.
streaks and attracts dirt. Do not
Cleaners may contain solvents that use solutions that contain strong
can become concentrated in the
Speaker Covers
or caustic soap.
interior. Before using cleaners, read Vacuum around a speaker cover
and adhere to all safety instructions
. Do not heavily saturate the gently, so that the speaker will not
on the label. While cleaning the upholstery when cleaning. be damaged. Clean spots with just
interior, maintain adequate . Do not use solvents or cleaners water and mild soap.
ventilation by opening the doors and containing solvents.
windows. Coated Moldings
Interior Glass Coated moldings should be cleaned.
To prevent damage, do not clean
the interior using the following To clean, use a terry cloth fabric . When lightly soiled, wipe with a
cleaners or techniques: dampened with water. Wipe droplets sponge or soft lint-free cloth
left behind with a clean dry cloth. dampened with water.
. Never use a razor or any other Commercial glass cleaners may be
sharp object to remove a soil used, if necessary, after cleaning . When heavily soiled, use warm
from any interior surface. the interior glass with plain water. soapy water.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-79
Fabric/Carpet/Suede 3. Start on the outside edge of the Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces
soil and gently rub toward the and Vehicle Information and
Start by vacuuming the surface
center. Fold the cleaning cloth to Radio Displays
using a soft brush attachment. If a
a clean area frequently to
rotating brush attachment is being For vehicles with high gloss
prevent forcing the soil in to the
used during vacuuming, only use it surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
fabric.
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces.
gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the Before wiping the surface with the
as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle
following techniques: longer any color transfer from brush to remove dirt that could
the soil to the cleaning cloth. scratch the surface. Then use the
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to
more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap clean. Never use window cleaners
solution followed only by club or solvents. Periodically hand wash
. For solid soils, remove as much the microfiber cloth separately,
soda or plain water.
as possible prior to vacuuming. using mild soap. Do not use bleach
If the soil is not completely or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
To clean:
removed, it may be necessary to and air dry before next use.
1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery
colorfast cloth with water or club cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small
soda. Microfiber cloth is hidden area for colorfastness before { Caution
recommended to prevent lint using a commercial upholstery
transfer to the fabric or carpet. Do not attach a device with a
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
formation occurs, clean the entire suction cup to the display. This
2. Remove excess moisture by may cause damage and would
gently wringing until water does fabric or carpet.
not be covered by the warranty.
not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-80 Vehicle Care
Instrument Panel, Leather, Cargo Cover and

Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces Caution (Continued) Convenience Net
and Low Gloss Paint Surfaces change the appearance and feel Wash with warm water and mild
Use a soft microfiber cloth of leather or soft trim and are not detergent. Do not use chlorine
dampened with water to remove recommended. bleach. Rinse with cold water, and
dust and loose dirt. For a more then dry completely.
thorough cleaning, use a soft
microfiber cloth dampened with a
Do not use cleaners that increase Care of Safety Belts
gloss, especially on the instrument
mild soap solution. Keep belts clean and dry.
panel. Reflected glare can decrease
visibility through the windshield
{ Caution under certain conditions. { Warning
Soaking or saturating leather, Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
especially perforated leather, as { Caution It may severely weaken them. In
well as other interior surfaces, Use of air fresheners may cause a crash, they might not be able to
may cause permanent damage. permanent damage to plastics provide adequate protection.
Wipe excess moisture from these and painted surfaces. If an air Clean safety belts only with mild
surfaces after cleaning and allow freshener comes in contact with soap and lukewarm water.
them to dry naturally. Never use any plastic or painted surface in
heat, steam, spot lifters, or spot the vehicle, blot immediately and
removers. Do not use cleaners clean with a soft cloth dampened
that contain silicone or wax-based with a mild soap solution.
products. Cleaners containing Damage caused by air fresheners
these solvents can permanently would not be covered by the
(Continued) vehicle warranty.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Vehicle Care 10-81
Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for Button Retainer

proper floor mat usage.
Some vehicles have floor mats with
{ Warning . The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
a button-type retainer.
If a floor mat is the wrong size or vehicle. If the floor mats need
is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended
interfere with the pedals. that GM certified floor mats be
Interference with the pedals can purchased. Non-GM floor mats
cause unintended acceleration may not fit properly and may
and/or increased stopping interfere with the accelerator or
distance which can cause a crash brake pedal. Always check that
and injury. Make sure the floor the floor mats do not interfere
mat does not interfere with the with the pedals.
pedals. . Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of Removing and Replacing the
the driver side floor mat. Floor Mat
. Use only a single floor mat on 1. Pull up on the rear of the mat to
the driver side. unlock and remove.
. Do not place one floor mat on 2. Reinstall the floor mat by lining
top of another. up the floor mat openings over
the carpet retainers and
snapping into position.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
10-82 Vehicle Care
3. Make sure the floor mat is Removing and Replacing the

properly secured and verify that Floor Mat
it does not interfere with the 1. Turn the knob until it is aligned
pedals. with the slot in the floor mat
Knob Retainer grommet.
Some vehicles have floor mats with 2. Pull up on the floor mat.
a knob retainer. 3. Center the slot in the floor mat
grommet with the knob on the
floor and set into position.
4. Turn the knob until it is
perpendicular to the slot in the
grommet to lock the mat in
place.
5. Make sure the floor mat is
properly secured and verify that
it does not interfere with the
pedals.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Your dealer recognizes the

importance of providing
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
competitively priced maintenance
and repair services. With trained
the required maintenance for the technicians, the dealer is the place
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help for routine maintenance such as oil
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair changes and tire rotations and
expenses resulting from neglect or additional maintenance items like
Maintenance Schedule inadequate maintenance. It may tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 also help to maintain the value of blades.
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services
Special Application
responsibility of the owner to have
all required maintenance performed.
{ Caution
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Your dealer has trained technicians Damage caused by improper
Additional Maintenance who can perform required maintenance can lead to costly
and Care maintenance using genuine repairs and may not be covered
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have by the vehicle warranty.
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 up-to-date tools and equipment for Maintenance intervals, checks,
fast and accurate diagnostics. Many inspections, recommended fluids,
Recommended Fluids, dealers have extended evening and and lubricants are important to
Lubricants, and Parts Saturday hours, courtesy keep the vehicle in good working
Recommended Fluids and transportation, and online condition.
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 scheduling to assist with service
Maintenance Replacement needs.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-13

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
11-2 Service and Maintenance
The Tire Rotation and Required Refer to the information in the Refer to the information in the
Services are the responsibility of the Maintenance Schedule Additional Maintenance Schedule Additional
vehicle owner. It is recommended to Required Services - Normal chart. Required Services - Severe chart.
have your dealer perform these The Additional Required Services -
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Severe are for vehicles that are: { Warning
keep the vehicle in good working . Mainly driven in heavy city traffic Performing maintenance work can
condition, improves fuel economy, in hot weather. be dangerous and can cause
and reduces vehicle emissions. . Mainly driven in hilly or serious injury. Perform
Because of the way people use mountainous terrain. maintenance work only if the
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. . Frequently towing a trailer. required information, proper tools,
There may need to be more and equipment are available.
frequent checks and services. The
. Used for high speed or If they are not, see your dealer to
Additional Required Services - competitive driving. have a trained technician do the
Normal are for vehicles that: . Used for taxi, police, or delivery work. See Doing Your Own
. Carry passengers and cargo service. Service Work on page 10-3.
within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-10.
. Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
. Use the recommended fuel. See
Recommended Fuel on
page 9-43.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Maintenance Engine Oil Change Tire Rotation and Required

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Services Every 12 000 km/
Schedule SOON message displays, have the 7,500 mi
Owner Checks and Services engine oil and filter changed within Rotate the tires, if recommended for
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven the vehicle, and perform the
At Each Fuel Stop under the best conditions, the following services. See Tire
. Check the engine oil level. See engine oil life system might not Rotation on page 10-48.
Engine Oil on page 10-7. indicate the need for vehicle service
for more than a year. The engine oil
. Check engine oil level and oil
Once a Month and filter must be changed at least life percentage. If needed,
once a year and the oil life system change engine oil and filter, and
. Check the tire inflation
must be reset. Your trained dealer reset oil life system. See Engine
pressures. See Tire Pressure on
technician can perform this work. Oil on page 10-7 and Engine Oil
page 10-42.
If the engine oil life system is reset Life System on page 10-9.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See accidentally, service the vehicle . Check engine coolant level. See
Tire Inspection on page 10-48. within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the Engine Coolant on page 10-12.
. Check the windshield washer last service. Reset the oil life . Check windshield washer fluid
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on system when the oil is changed.
level. See Washer Fluid on
page 10-19. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10-19.
page 10-9.
. Visually inspect windshield wiper
blades for wear, cracking,
or contamination. See Exterior
Care on page 10-73. Replace
worn or damaged wiper blades.
See Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 10-24.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. Check tire inflation pressures. . Check restraint system . Check ignition transmission lock.
See Tire Pressure on components. See Safety System See Ignition Transmission Lock
page 10-42. Check on page 3-21. Check on page 10-24.
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire . Visually inspect fuel system for . Check parking brake and
Inspection on page 10-48. damage or leaks. automatic transmission park
. Visually check for fluid leaks. . Visually inspect exhaust system mechanism. See Park Brake and
and nearby heat shields for P (Park) Mechanism Check on
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. page 10-24.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on loose or damaged parts.
page 10-11. . Lubricate body components. See
. Check accelerator pedal for
Exterior Care on page 10-73. damage, high effort, or binding.
. Inspect brake system. Replace if needed.
. Visually inspect steering,
. Check starter switch. See Starter
Switch Check on page 10-23.
. Visually inspect gas strut for
suspension, and chassis signs of wear, cracks, or other
components for damaged, loose, . Check automatic transmission damage. Check the hold open
or missing parts or signs of shift lock control function. See ability of the strut. See your
wear. See Exterior Care on Automatic Transmission Shift dealer if service is required.
page 10-73. Lock Control Function Check on
page 10-23.
. Inspect sunroof track and seal,
if equipped. See Sunroof on
page 2-20.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Additional Required Services

12000km /7,500m i
24000km /15,000m i
36000km /22,500m i
48000km /30,000m i
60000km /37,500m i
72000km /45,000m i
84000km /52,500m i
96000km /60,000m i
108000km /67,500m i
120000km /75,000m i
132000km /82,500m i
144000km /90,000m i
156000km /97,500m i
168000km /105,000m i
192000km /120,000m i
204000km /127,500m i
216000km /135,000m i
228000km /142,500m i
240000km /150,000m i
180000km /112,500mi
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with
AWD. (4)
@
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @
Replace brake fluid. (7) @
Footnotes — Maintenance (1) Or every two years, whichever vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
Schedule Additional Required comes first. More frequent traffic, areas with poor air quality,
Services - Normal replacement may be needed if the or areas with high dust levels.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Replacement may also be needed if (5) Or every five years, whichever

there is a reduction in air flow, comes first. See Cooling System on
excessive window fogging, or odors. page 10-12.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines (6) Or every 10 years, whichever
and hoses for proper hook-up, comes first. Inspect for fraying,
routing, and condition. excessive cracking, or damage;
(3) Or every four years, whichever replace, if needed.
comes first. (7) Or every 10 years, whichever
(4) Do not directly power wash the comes first.
transfer case output seals. High
pressure water can overcome the
seals and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

12000km/7,500m i
24000km/15,000m i
36000km/22,500m i
48000km/30,000m i
60000km/37,500m i
72000km/45,000m i
84000km/52,500m i
96000km/60,000m i
108000km/67,500m i
120000km/75,000m i
132000km/82,500m i
144000km/90,000m i
156000km/97,500m i
168000km/105,000m i
192000km/120,000m i
204000km/127,500m i
216000km/135,000m i
228000km/142,500m i
240000km/150,000m i
180000km /112,500m i
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@ @ @
Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with
AWD. (4)
@ @ @
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @
Replace brake fluid. (7) @
Footnotes — Maintenance vehicle is driven in areas with heavy (2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
Schedule Additional Required traffic, areas with poor air quality, and hoses for proper hook-up,
Services - Severe or areas with high dust levels. routing, and condition.
(1) Or every two years, whichever Replacement may also be needed if (3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first. More frequent there is a reduction in air flow, comes first.
replacement may be needed if the excessive window fogging, or odors.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
(4) Do not directly power wash the Special Application Additional

transfer case output seals. High
pressure water can overcome the Services Maintenance and Care
seals and contaminate the transfer . Severe Commercial Use Your vehicle is an important
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis investment and caring for it properly
decrease the life of the transfer
components every 5 000 km/ may help to avoid future costly
case and should be replaced.
3,000 mi. repairs. To maintain vehicle
(5) Or every five years, whichever . performance, additional
Have underbody flushing service
comes first. See Cooling System on maintenance services may be
performed once a year. See
page 10-12. required.
"Underbody Maintenance" in
(6) Or every 10 years, whichever Exterior Care on page 10-73. It is recommended that your dealer
comes first. Inspect for fraying, perform these services — their
excessive cracking, or damage; trained dealer technicians know
replace, if needed. your vehicle best. Your dealer can
(7) Or every 10 years, whichever also perform a thorough
comes first. assessment with a multi-point
inspection to recommend when your
vehicle may need attention.
The following list is intended to
explain the services and conditions
to look for that may indicate
services are required.
Battery
The battery supplies power to start
the engine and operate any
additional electrical accessories.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. To avoid break-down or failure to . Trained dealer technicians have Lamps
start the vehicle, maintain a access to tools and equipment
battery with full cranking power. to inspect the brakes and Properly working headlamps,
recommend quality parts taillamps, and brake lamps are
. Trained dealer technicians have important to see and be seen on
the diagnostic equipment to test engineered for the vehicle.
the road.
the battery and ensure that the Fluids
connections and cables are
. Signs that the headlamps need
corrosion-free. Proper fluid levels and approved attention include dimming, failure
fluids protect the vehicle’s systems to light, cracking, or damage.
Belts and components. See The brake lamps need to be
. Belts may need replacing if they Recommended Fluids and checked periodically to ensure
squeak or show signs of Lubricants on page 11-11 for GM that they light when braking.
cracking or splitting. approved fluids. . With a multi-point inspection,
. Trained dealer technicians have
. Engine oil and windshield your dealer can check the lamps
access to tools and equipment washer fluid levels should be and note any concerns.
to inspect the belts and checked at every fuel fill.
Shocks and Struts
recommend adjustment or . Instrument cluster lights may
replacement when necessary. come on to indicate that fluids Shocks and struts help aid in control
may be low and need to be for a smoother ride.
Brakes filled. . Signs of wear may include
Brakes stop the vehicle and are steering wheel vibration, bounce/
crucial to safe driving. Hoses
sway while braking, longer
. Signs of brake wear may include Hoses transport fluids and should stopping distance, or uneven
chirping, grinding, or squealing be regularly inspected to ensure tire wear.
noises, or difficulty stopping. that there are no cracks or leaks. . As part of the multi-point
With a multi-point inspection, your
inspection, trained dealer
dealer can inspect the hoses and
technicians can visually inspect
advise if replacement is needed.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
the shocks and struts for signs Vehicle Care Windshield

of leaking, blown seals, To help keep the vehicle looking like For safety, appearance, and the
or damage, and can advise new, vehicle care products are best viewing, keep the windshield
when service is needed. available from your dealer. For clean and clear.
Tires information on how to clean and . Signs of damage include
protect the vehicle’s interior and scratches, cracks, and chips.
Tires need to be properly inflated, exterior, see Interior Care on
rotated, and balanced. Maintaining page 10-77 and Exterior Care on . Trained dealer technicians can
the tires can save money and fuel, page 10-73. inspect the windshield and
and can reduce the risk of tire recommend proper replacement
failure. Wheel Alignment if needed.
. Signs that the tires need to be Wheel alignment is critical for Wiper Blades
replaced include three or more ensuring that the tires deliver
visible treadwear indicators; cord optimal wear and performance. Wiper blades need to be cleaned
or fabric showing through the and kept in good condition to
. Signs that the alignment may provide a clear view.
rubber; cracks or cuts in the need to be adjusted include
tread or sidewall; or a bulge or pulling, improper vehicle . Signs of wear include streaking,
split in the tire. handling, or unusual tire wear. skipping across the windshield,
. Trained dealer technicians can and worn or split rubber.
. Your dealer has the required
inspect and recommend the right equipment to ensure proper . Trained dealer technicians can
tires. Your dealer can also wheel alignment. check the wiper blades and
provide tire/wheel balancing replace them when needed.
services to ensure smooth
vehicle operation at all speeds.
Your dealer sells and services
name brand tires.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE
viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. See
Engine Oil on page 10-7.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10-12.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, in
Canada 19299819).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Hydraulic Power Steering System DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Carrier Assembly – Differential (Rear SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88900401, in
Drive Module) and Transfer Case Canada 89021678).
(Power Transfer Unit)
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Canada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C
Engine Oil Filter 89017525 PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter 20958479 CF179C
Spark Plugs 12622561 41-109
Wiper Blades
Front Driver – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 25941805 —
Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in) 25941804 —
Rear – 30.0 cm (11.6 in) 25920067 —

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12-2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-11 for more information.
Capacities
Application Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System 11.3 L 11.9 qt
Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank 83.3 L 22.0 gal
Transfer Case Fluid 1.0 L 1.0 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm
(0.037–0.043 in)

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation Radio Frequency with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11 reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of your dealership or the general
manager.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers to
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
participation in a no-charge or write to: the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited United States and Puerto Rico
c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Center
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN). 1-800-222-1020
designed so that the entire dispute 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
settlement process, from the time Telephone Devices (TTYs))
you file your complaint to the final Roadside Assistance:
decision, should be completed in 1-800-243-8872
about 70 days. We believe our From U.S. Virgin Islands:
impartial program offers advantages 1-800-496-9994
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Canada Assistance Center. Any TTY user in I (Service History): View

the U.S. can communicate with printable dealer-recorded service
General Motors of Canada Limited
Chevrolet by dialing: records and self-recorded service
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in records.
CA1-163-005
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive D (Preferred Dealer
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Information): Select a preferred
www.gm.ca Online Owner Center dealer and view dealer location,
1-800-263-3777 (English) Online Owner Experience maps, phone numbers, and hours.
1-800-263-7854 (French) (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com J (Warranty Tracking
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Information): Track the vehicle’s
The Chevrolet online owner
Telephone devices (TTYs)) warranty information.
experience is a one-stop resource
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
that allows interaction with J (Recall Information): View
Chevrolet and keeps important active recalls or search by Vehicle
Overseas vehicle-specific information in one Identification Number (VIN). See
place. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Please contact the local General
on page 12-1.
Motors Business Unit. Membership Benefits
E (Vehicle Information): H (Other Account Information):
Customer Assistance for View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Download owner manuals and view
radio, and OnStar account
Text Telephone (TTY) vehicle-specific how-to videos.
information.
Users G (Maintenance Information): F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
View maintenance schedules,
To assist customers who are deaf, with online help representatives.
required alerts, OnStar onboard
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
vehicle diagnostic information, and
and who use Text Telephones
schedule service appointments. your vehicle.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Chevrolet Owner Centre GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also has

(Canada) chevroletowner.ca a Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.ca
Reimbursement Program or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner for details. TTY users call
Centre: 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help
representatives. Roadside Assistance
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Program
. Access third party enthusiast For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
sites and social media networks. This program is available to 1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone
. Locate owner resources such as qualified applicants for cost (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
lease-end, financing, and reimbursement of eligible For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
warranty information. aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800.
. required for the vehicle, such as
Retrieve your favorite articles, Service is available 24 hours a day,
hand controls or a wheelchair/
quizzes, tips, and multimedia 365 days a year.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
galleries organized into the
Features and Auto Care For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance
Sections. offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance,
call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information
. Download the owner manual for
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text ready:
your vehicle, quickly and easily.
Telephone (TTY) users, call
. Find the 1-800-833-9935.
. Your name, home address, and
Chevrolet-recommended home telephone number.
maintenance services for your . Telephone number of your
vehicle. location.
. Location of the vehicle.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13

. Model, year, color, and license Chevrolet and General Motors of
. Flat Tire Change: Service to
plate number of the vehicle. Canada Limited reserve the right to change a flat tire with the spare
. Odometer reading, Vehicle limit services or payment to an tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
Identification Number (VIN), and owner or driver if they decide the must be in good condition and
delivery date of the vehicle. claims are made too often, or the properly inflated. It is the owner's
same type of claim is made many responsibility for the repair or
. Description of the problem. times. replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
Coverage Services Provided . Battery Jump Start: Service to
Services are provided up to 5 years/ . Emergency Fuel Delivery: jump start a dead battery.
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever Delivery of enough fuel for the
comes first. vehicle to get to the nearest Services Not Included in
In the U.S., anyone driving the service station. Roadside Assistance
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a . Lock-Out Service: Service to . Impound towing caused by
person driving the vehicle without unlock the vehicle if you are violation of any laws.
permission from the owner is not locked out. A remote unlock may
covered.
. Legal fines.
be available if you have OnStar.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of For security reasons, the driver
. Mounting, dismounting,
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. must present identification or changing of snow tires,
Chevrolet and General Motors of before this service is given. chains, or other traction devices.
Canada Limited reserve the right to . Emergency Tow from a Public
. Towing or services for vehicles
make any changes or discontinue Road or Highway: Tow to the driven on a non-public road or
the Roadside Assistance program at nearest Chevrolet dealer for highway.
any time without notification. warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Services Specific to Assistance advisor may give safety related. If it is, please call
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles permission to get local your dealership, let them know this,
emergency road service. You will and ask for instructions.
. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement receive payment, up to $100,
is approximately $5 Canadian. If your dealer requests you to bring
after sending the original receipt the vehicle for service, you are
Diesel fuel delivery may be to Roadside Assistance.
restricted. Propane and other urged to do so as early in the work
Mechanical failures may be day as possible to allow for
fuels are not provided through covered, however any cost for
this service. same-day repair.
parts and labor for repairs not
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle covered by the warranty are the
registration is required. owner responsibility. Courtesy Transportation
. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Program
Assistance: Must be over Scheduling Service To enhance your ownership
250 kilometers from where your Appointments experience, we and our participating
trip was started to qualify. dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
When the vehicle requires warranty Transportation, a customer support
General Motors of Canada
service, contact your dealer and program for vehicles with the
Limited requires
request an appointment. By Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
pre-authorization, original
scheduling a service appointment Coverage period in Canada),
detailed receipts, and a copy of
and advising the service consultant extended powertrain, and/or
the repair orders. Once
of your transportation needs, your hybrid-specific warranties in both
authorization has been received,
dealer can help minimize your the U.S. and Canada.
the Roadside Assistance advisor
inconvenience.
will help to make arrangements Several Courtesy Transportation
and explain how to receive If the vehicle cannot be scheduled options are available to assist in
payment. into the service department reducing inconvenience when
immediately, keep driving it until it warranty repairs are required.
. Alternative Service: If
can be scheduled for service,
assistance cannot be provided
unless, of course, the problem is
right away, the Roadside

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Courtesy Transportation is not a one-way or round-trip shuttle service Courtesy Rental Vehicle
part of the New Vehicle Limited within reasonable time and distance Your dealer may arrange to provide
Warranty. A separate booklet parameters of your dealer's area. you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
entitled “Limited Warranty and reimburse you for a rental vehicle
Owner Assistance Information” Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
furnished with each new vehicle for an overnight warranty repair.
provides detailed warranty coverage If the vehicle requires overnight Rental reimbursement will be limited
information. warranty repairs, and public and must be supported by original
transportation is used instead of receipts. This requires that you sign
Transportation Options your dealer's shuttle service, the and complete a rental agreement
Warranty service can generally be expense must be supported by and meet state/provincial, local, and
completed while you wait. However, original receipts and can only be up rental vehicle provider requirements.
if you are unable to wait, GM helps to the maximum amount allowed by Requirements vary and may include
to minimize inconvenience by GM for shuttle service. In addition, minimum age requirements,
providing several transportation for U.S. customers, should you insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
options. Depending on the arrange transportation through a You are responsible for fuel usage
circumstances, your dealer can offer friend or relative, limited charges and may also be
one of the following: reimbursement for reasonable fuel responsible for taxes, levies, usage
expenses may be available. Claim fees, excessive mileage, or rental
Shuttle Service amounts should reflect actual costs usage beyond the completion of the
Shuttle service is the preferred and be supported by original repair.
means of offering Courtesy receipts. See your dealer for
Transportation. Dealers may provide information regarding the allowance It may not be possible to provide a
shuttle service to get you to your amounts for reimbursement of fuel like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
destination with minimal interruption or other transportation costs.
of your daily schedule. This includes

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Additional Program value, and safety performance can these parts is not known. Such parts
Information be compromised in subsequent are not covered by the GM New
collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
All program options, such as shuttle related failures are not covered by
service, may not be available at Collision Parts that warranty.
every dealer. Please contact your
Genuine GM Collision parts are new Aftermarket collision parts are also
dealer for specific information about
parts made with the same materials available. These are made by
availability. All Courtesy
and construction methods as the companies other than GM and may
Transportation arrangements will be
parts with which the vehicle was not have been tested for the vehicle.
administered by appropriate dealer
originally built. Genuine GM As a result, these parts may fit
personnel.
Collision parts are the best choice to poorly, exhibit premature durability/
General Motors reserves the right to ensure that the vehicle's designed corrosion problems, and may not
unilaterally modify, change, appearance, durability, and safety perform properly in subsequent
or discontinue Courtesy are preserved. The use of Genuine collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
Transportation at any time and to GM parts can help maintain the GM covered by the GM New Vehicle
resolve all questions of claim New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
eligibility pursuant to the terms and failure related to such parts is not
Recycled original equipment parts
conditions described herein at its covered by that warranty.
may also be used for repair. These
sole discretion.
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in Repair Facility
Collision Damage Repair prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you
If the vehicle is involved in a parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that
collision and it is damaged, have the undamaged sections of the vehicle. meets your needs before you ever
damage repaired by a qualified A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer
technician using the proper part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center
equipment and quality replacement maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and
parts. Poorly performed collision designed appearance and safety state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
repairs diminish the vehicle resale performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
center that has GM-trained If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information:
technicians and comparable company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and
equipment. insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Insuring the Vehicle Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver license number.
Protect your investment in the GM Genuine Manufacturer replacement . Owner name, address, and
vehicle with comprehensive and parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
collision insurance coverage. There you may be charged at the end of
are significant differences in the the lease for poor quality repairs.
. Vehicle license plate number.
quality of coverage afforded by . Vehicle make, model, and
various insurance policy terms.
If a Crash Occurs model year.
Many insurance policies provide If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification
reduced protection to the GM emergency services for help. Do not
Number (VIN).
vehicle by limiting compensation for leave the scene of a crash until all
damage repairs through the use of matters have been taken care of. . Insurance company and policy
aftermarket collision parts. Some Move the vehicle only if its position number.
insurance companies will not puts you in danger, or you are . General description of the
specify aftermarket collision parts. instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle.
When purchasing insurance, we officer.
recommend that you ensure that the Choose a reputable repair facility
Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts.
vehicle will be repaired with GM to police and other parties involved
original equipment collision parts. See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
in the crash. section.
If such insurance coverage is not
available from your current For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see What
insurance carrier, consider switching Roadside Assistance Program on Will You See after an Airbag
to another insurance carrier. page 13-5. Inflates? on page 3-28.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Managing the Vehicle Damage If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions
Repair Process company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and
you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle.
In the event that the vehicle requires repair valuation based on that
damage repairs, GM recommends insurance company's collision policy Owner Information
that you take an active role in its repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written
repair. If you have a pre-determined contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended
repair facility of choice, take the In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational
vehicle there, or have it towed there. of the repair and parts choices as information about the vehicle. The
Specify to the facility that any long as the cost stays within Owner Manual includes the
required replacement collision parts reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for all
be original equipment parts, either
models.
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
recycled parts will not be covered by Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty
the GM vehicle warranty. Manual.
Service Manuals
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, RETAIL SELL PRICE:
but you must live with the repair. Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
Depending on your policy limits, and repair information on the shipping fees.
your insurance company may engines, transmission, axle,
suspension, brakes, electrical, Without Portfolio: Owner
initially value the repair using Manual only.
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with steering, body, etc.
the repair professional, and insist on RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Service Bulletins
Genuine GM parts. Remember, $25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
if the vehicle is leased, you may be Service Bulletins give additional shipping fees.
obligated to have the vehicle technical service information
repaired with Genuine GM parts, needed to knowledgeably service
even if your insurance coverage General Motors cars and trucks.
does not pay the full cost.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Current and Past Models Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot

Technical Service Bulletins and become involved in individual
Manuals are available for current
Defects problems between you, your
and past model GM vehicles. dealer, or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects
ORDER TOLL FREE: To contact NHTSA, you may call
1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday to the United States the Vehicle Safety Hotline
8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
For Credit Card Orders Only If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com. a crash or could cause injury or write to:
Or write to: death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA
Helm, Incorporated inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Attention: Customer Service Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590
47911 Halyard Drive (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
You can also obtain
Plymouth, MI 48170 General Motors.
other information about motor
Prices are subject to change without If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
notice and without incurring complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
obligation. Allow ample time for investigation, and if it finds that
delivery. a safety defect exists in a group
All listed prices are quoted in U.S. of vehicles, it may order a recall
funds. Make checks payable in U.S. and remedy campaign.
funds.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data

to the Canadian to General Motors Recording and
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Privacy
If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
believe that the vehicle has a safety this, notify General Motors. The vehicle has a number of
defect, notify Transport Canada computers that record information
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
immediately, and notify General about the vehicle’s performance and
Chevrolet Motor Division how it is driven. For example, the
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Chevrolet Customer Assistance vehicle uses computer modules to
Transport Canada at
Center monitor and control engine and
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
P.O. Box 33170 transmission performance, to
Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170 monitor the conditions for airbag
Road Safety Branch deployment and deploy them in a
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
80 rue Noel crash, and, if equipped, to provide
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1 antilock braking to help the driver
(French), or write:
control the vehicle. These modules
General Motors of Canada Limited may store data to help the dealer
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: technician service the vehicle.
CA1-163-005 Some modules may also store data
1908 Colonel Sam Drive about how the vehicle is operated,
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may
retain personal preferences, such as
radio presets, seat positions, and
temperature settings.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a GM will not access this data or
better understanding of the share it with others except: with the
This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and consent of the vehicle owner or,
event data recorder (EDR). The injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are if the vehicle is leased, with the
main purpose of an EDR is to recorded by your vehicle only if a consent of the lessee; in response
record, in certain crash or near non-trivial crash situation occurs; no to an official request by police or
crash-like situations, such as an air data are recorded by the EDR under similar government office; as part of
bag deployment or hitting a road normal driving conditions and no GM's defense of litigation through
obstacle, data that will assist in personal data (e.g., name, gender, the discovery process; or, as
understanding how a vehicle’s age, and crash location) are required by law. Data that GM
systems performed. The EDR is recorded. However, other parties, collects or receives may also be
designed to record data related to such as law enforcement, could used for GM research needs or may
vehicle dynamics and safety combine the EDR data with the type be made available to others for
systems for a short period of time, of personally identifying data research purposes, where a need is
typically 30 seconds or less. The routinely acquired during a crash shown and the data is not tied to a
EDR in this vehicle is designed to investigation. specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR,
. How various systems in your special equipment is required, and
vehicle were operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR is
. Whether or not the driver and needed. In addition to the vehicle
passenger safety belts were manufacturer, other parties, such as
buckled/fastened; law enforcement, that have the
.
special equipment, can read the
How far (if at all) the driver was information if they have access to
depressing the accelerator and/ the vehicle or the EDR.
or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was
traveling.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
OnStar® Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

If the vehicle is equipped with Identification (RFID) Statement
OnStar® and has an active RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
subscription, additional data may be vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
collected through the OnStar pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal
system. This includes information system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC)
about the vehicle’s operation; about connection with conveniences such rules and with Industry Canada
collisions involving the vehicle; the as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
use of the vehicle and its features; transmitters for remote door locking/
and, in certain situations, the Operation is subject to the following
unlocking and starting, and two conditions:
location and approximate GPS in-vehicle transmitters for garage
speed of the vehicle. Refer to the door openers. RFID technology in 1. The device may not cause
OnStar Terms and Conditions and GM vehicles does not use or record harmful interference.
Privacy Statement on the OnStar personal information or link with any
website. 2. The device must accept any
other GM system containing interference received, including
personal information. interference that may cause
Infotainment System undesired operation of the
If the vehicle is equipped with a device.
navigation system as part of the Changes or modifications to any of
infotainment system, use of the these systems by other than an
system may result in the storage of authorized service facility could void
destinations, addresses, telephone authorization to use this equipment.
numbers, and other trip information.
See the infotainment manual for
information on stored data and for
deletion instructions.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
2 NOTES

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Press = to:

. Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.
OnStar Overview .
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
OnStar Services . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Navigation voice commands.
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Requires the available Directions
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a and Connections service plan.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor Press Q to connect to a live
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Advisor to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic
OnStar Additional Services.
. Verify account information or
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 update contact information.
The OnStar system status light is .
next to the OnStar buttons. If the Get driving directions. Requires
status light is: the available Directions and
Connections service plan.
. Solid Green: System is ready. . Receive On-Demand
. Flashing Green: On a call. Diagnostics for a check of the
. Red: Indicates a problem. vehicle’s key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
Press Q or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
Advisor.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
14-2 OnStar
Press the OnStar Emergency OnStar Services Navigation

button > to get a priority
OnStar navigation requires the
connection to an Emergency Emergency Directions and Connections
Advisor available 24/7 to: service plan.
With Automatic Crash Response,
. Get help for an emergency. the built-in system can automatically Press Q to receive directions or
. Be a Good Samaritan or connect to help in most crashes, have them sent to the vehicle
respond to an AMBER Alert. even if help cannot be requested. navigation screen, if equipped.
. Get assistance in severe Press > to connect to an Destinations can also be forwarded
weather or other crisis and Emergency Advisor. GPS to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
evacuation routes. technology is used to identify the The OnStar mapping database is
vehicle location and can provide continuously updated. For coverage
critical information to emergency maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)
personnel. The Advisor is also or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
trained to offer critical assistance in Turn-by-Turn Navigation
emergency situations.
1. Press Q to connect to a live
Security Advisor.
OnStar provides services like Stolen 2. Request directions.
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition 3. Directions are downloaded to the
Block, and Roadside Assistance, vehicle.
if equipped. OnStar can unlock the
vehicle doors remotely, if equipped 4. Follow the voice-guided
with automatic door locks, and can commands.
help police locate the vehicle if it is
stolen.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds After the call ends, press the “Go”
During a Planned Route with the last direction given, then button on the navigation screen to
responds with “OnStar ready,” begin driving directions.
Cancel Route then a tone. If directions are downloaded to the
1. Press =. System responds: Get My Destination navigation system, the route can
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say only be canceled through the
“Cancel route.” System 1. Press =. System responds: navigation system.
responds: “Do you want to “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
Destinations can also be
cancel directions?” 2. Say “Get my destination.” downloaded on the go. For
2. Say “Yes.” System responds: System responds with address information about eNav, Destination
“OK, request completed, thank and the distance to the Download, and coverage maps see
you, goodbye.” destination, then responds with www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Route Preview
Other Navigation Services
1. Press =. System responds: Available from OnStar Connections
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
2. Say “Route preview.” System to send destinations from calls to be made and received from
responds with the next three MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
maneuvers. Navigation or screen-based controlled through the OnStar
navigation system. When ready, the RemoteLink® mobile app. For
Repeat coverage maps, see
directions will be downloaded to the
1. Press =. System responds: vehicle. www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Destination Download: Press Q,
then request the Advisor to
download directions to the
navigation system in the vehicle.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
14-4 OnStar
OnStar Mobile App Calling 911 Emergency Store a Name Tag for Speed
Download the OnStar RemoteLink Dialing
1. Press =. System responds:
mobile app to select Apple®, “OnStar Ready,” followed by 1. Press =. System responds:
Android™, and BlackBerry® devices a tone. “OnStar ready.”
to check vehicle fuel level, oil life,
or tire pressure; to start the vehicle 2. Say “Call.” System responds: 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
(if equipped) or unlock it; or to “Please say the name or number “Please say the number you
connect to an OnStar Advisor. For to call.” would like to store.”
OnStar RemoteLink information and 3. Say “911” without pausing. 3. Say the entire number without
compatibility, see www.onstar.com System responds: “911.” pausing. System responds:
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada). “Please say the name tag.”
4. Say “Call.” System responds:
Hands-Free Calling “OK, dialing 911.” 4. Pick a name tag. System
responds: “About to store <name
1. Press =. System responds: Retrieve My Number tag>. Does that sound OK?”
“OnStar ready.”
1. Press =. System responds: 5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
2. Say “Call.” System responds: “OnStar ready.” again. System responds: “OK,
“Please say the name or number storing <name tag>.”
to call.” 2. Say “My number.” System
responds: “Your OnStar Place a Call Using a Stored
3. Say the entire number without Hands-Free Calling number is,”
pausing, including a “1” and the Number
then says the number.
area code. System responds: 1. Press =. System responds:
“OK calling.” End a Call
“OnStar ready.”
Press =. System responds: “Call 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
ended.” responds: “OK, calling
<name tag>.”

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
OnStar 14-5
Verify Minutes and Expiration OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works
Press = and say “Minutes” then Information Automatic Crash Response,
“Verify” to check how many minutes Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
remain and their expiration date. Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
Diagnostics eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
perform a vehicle check every account information. If OnStar all OnStar services are available
month. It will check the engine, receives information that vehicle everywhere or on all vehicles. For
transmission, antilock brakes, and ownership has changed, OnStar more information, a full description
major vehicle systems. It also may send a voice message to the of OnStar services, system
checks the tire pressures, if the vehicle, requesting updated account limitations, and OnStar terms and
vehicle is equipped with the Tire information. conditions:
Pressure Monitoring System. If an
Reactivation for Subsequent . Call 888-4-ONSTAR
On-Demand Diagnostics check is
Owners (888-466-7827).
needed between e-mails, press Q,
. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
and an Advisor can run a check. Press Q and follow the prompts to
. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible after acquiring the vehicle. . Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
The Advisor will update vehicle
records and will explain the OnStar . Press Q to speak with an
service offers and options available. Advisor.
OnStar services require a vehicle
electrical system, wireless service,
and GPS satellite technologies to be
available and operating for features

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
14-6 OnStar
to function properly. These systems vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a system can provide in-vehicle
may not operate if the battery is crash, or wireless phone network access to all of the OnStar services,
discharged or disconnected. congestion or jamming. except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
OnStar service cannot work unless See Radio Frequency Statement on Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
your vehicle is in a place where page 13-15. OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca
OnStar has an agreement with a (Canada)
wireless service provider for service Services for People with
in that area, and the wireless Disabilities The website provides access to
service provider has coverage, Advisors provide services to help account information, allows
network capacity, reception, and subscribers with physical disabilities management of the OnStar
technology compatible with OnStar and medical conditions. subscription, and viewing of videos
service. Service involving location of each service. Get subscription
information about the vehicle cannot Press Q for help with: plan pricing and sign up for OnStar
work unless GPS signals are .
Vehicle Diagnostics. Click on the
Locating a gas station with an “My Account” tab on the home
available, unobstructed, and attendant to pump gas.
compatible with the OnStar page. The website navigation and
hardware. OnStar service may not
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., services provided may vary by
work if the OnStar equipment is not that meets accessibility needs. country.
properly installed or it has not been . Providing directions to the OnStar Personal Identification
properly maintained. If equipment or closest hospital or pharmacy in
software is added, connected,
Number (PIN)
urgent situations.
or modified, OnStar service may not A PIN is needed to access some of
work. Other problems beyond the TTY Users the OnStar services, like Remote
control of OnStar may prevent OnStar has the ability to Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
service such as hills, tall buildings, communicate to the deaf, Assistance. You will be prompted to
tunnels, weather, electrical system hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired change the PIN the first time when
design and architecture of the customers while in the vehicle. The speaking with an Advisor. To
available dealer-installed TTY

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
OnStar 14-7
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar After five days, OnStar can contact route or may ask for a call back
and provide the Advisor with the Roadside Assistance and a after the vehicle is driven into an
current number. locksmith to help gain access to the open area.
vehicle.
Warranty Cellular and GPS Antennas
OnStar equipment may be Global Positioning Avoid placing items over or near the
warranted as part of the New System (GPS) antenna to prevent blocking cellular
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The . Obstruction of the GPS can and GPS signal reception. Cellular
manufacturer of the vehicle occur in a large city with tall reception is required for OnStar to
furnishes detailed warranty buildings; in parking garages; send remote signals to the vehicle.
information. around airports; in tunnels,
underpasses, or parking
Unable to Connect to OnStar
Languages garages; or in an area with very Message
The vehicle can be programmed to dense trees. If GPS signals are If there is limited cellular coverage
respond in multiple languages. not available, the OnStar system or the cellular network has reached
Press Q and ask an Advisor. should still operate to call maximum capacity, this message
Advisors are available in English, OnStar. However, OnStar could may come on. Press Q to try the
Spanish and French. Available have difficulty identifying the call again or try again after driving a
languages may vary by country. exact location. few miles into another cellular area.
. In emergency situations, OnStar
Potential Issues can use the last stored GPS Vehicle and Power Issues
OnStar cannot perform Remote location to send to emergency OnStar services require a vehicle
Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle responders. electrical system, wireless service,
Assistance after the vehicle has and GPS satellite technologies to be
. A temporary loss of GPS can
been off continuously for five days. available and operating for features
cause loss of the ability to send
a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. to function properly. These systems
The Advisor may give a verbal may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
14-8 OnStar
Add-on Electrical Equipment OnStar - libcurl and unzip THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
acknowledgments “AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
The OnStar system is integrated
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
into the electrical architecture of the Certain OnStar components include IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
vehicle. Do not add any electrical libcurl and unzip software. Below LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
equipment. See Add-On Electrical are the notices and licenses OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
Equipment on page 9-54. Added associated with this software: FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
electrical equipment may interfere
libcurl: AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
with the operation of the OnStar
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
system and cause it to not operate. COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
NOTICE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
Privacy
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
The complete OnStar Privacy Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
Statement may be found at WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
www.onstar.com (U.S.), All rights reserved.
CONTRACT, TORT OR
or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Permission to use, copy, modify, OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
Privacy-sensitive users of wireless and distribute this software for any OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
communications are cautioned that purpose with or without fee is WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
the privacy of any information sent hereby granted, provided that the USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
via wireless cellular communications above copyright notice and this THE SOFTWARE.
cannot be assured. Third parties permission notice appear in all
may unlawfully intercept or access Except as contained in this notice,
copies.
transmissions and private the name of a copyright holder shall
communications without consent. not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use
or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
OnStar 14-9
unzip: Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, materials provided with the

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, distribution. The sole exception
Info-ZIP copyright and license. The Rich Wales, Mike White to this condition is redistribution
definitive version of this document This software is provided “as is,” of a standard UnZipSFX binary
should be available at ftp:// without warranty of any kind, (including SFXWiz) as part of a
ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/ express or implied. In no event shall self-extracting archive; that is
license.html indefinitely. Info-ZIP or its contributors be held permitted without inclusion of
liable for any direct, indirect, this license, as long as the
Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All normal SFX banner has not
rights reserved. incidental, special or consequential
damages arising out of the use of or been removed from the binary or
For the purposes of this copyright inability to use this software. disabled.
and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as 3. Altered versions–including, but
the following set of individuals: Permission is granted to anyone to
use this software for any purpose, not limited to, ports to new
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, including commercial applications, operating systems, existing ports
Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, and to alter it and redistribute it with new graphical interfaces,
Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, Ed freely, subject to the following and dynamic, shared, or static
Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris restrictions: library versions–must be plainly
Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, marked as such and must not be
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, 1. Redistributions of source code misrepresented as being the
Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, must retain the above copyright original source. Such altered
Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, notice, definition, disclaimer, and versions also must not be
Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, this list of conditions. misrepresented as being
Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, 2. Redistributions in binary form Info-ZIP releases–including, but
George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai (compiled executables) must not limited to, labeling of the
Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, reproduce the above copyright altered versions with the names
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, notice, definition, disclaimer, and “Info-ZIP” (or any variation
this list of conditions in thereof, including, but not limited
documentation and/or other to, different capitalizations),

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
14-10 OnStar
“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or

“MacZip” without the explicit
permission of Info-ZIP. Such
altered versions are further
prohibited from
misrepresentative use of the
Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail
addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
and “MacZip” for its own source
and binary releases.

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Appearance Care

What Will You See after an Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Accessories and
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
When Should an Airbag Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Assistance Program,
Add-On Electrical
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-24 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Airbags Audio Controller,
Additional Information
Adding Equipment to the Rear (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21, 7-23
Adjustments
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-15 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21,
. . . 7-23
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25,
. . . 7-30
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-11
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Audio System
Air Filter, Passenger
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-35
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Alarm Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Airbag System
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Automatic
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Alert Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
How Does an Airbag
Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . .9-36 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 9-26, 10-23 Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Passenger Sensing
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11, 7-12 Automatic Transmission
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Antenna Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
What Makes an Airbag
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 Shift Lock Control
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Antilock Brake Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Auxiliary
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
i-2 INDEX
B Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Cargo

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-27 Cautions, Danger, and
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Voltage and Charging
and Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21, 7-23
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-24
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Bluetooth C Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-16
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Check
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37
California Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Brake
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Ignition
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-19
Perchlorate Materials Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-24
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Child Restraints
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Infants and Young
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Camera Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Rear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37 Lower Anchors and
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-43
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Capacities and Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51,
. . . 3-53
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Carbon Monoxide Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
INDEX i-3
Cleaning Coolant Customer Information

Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Service Publications
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 Engine Temperature Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Customer Satisfaction
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Engine Temperature Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 D
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8, 8-9 Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Danger, Warnings, and
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Courtesy Transportation Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Cover Daytime Running Lamps/
Compartments Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Automatic Headlamp
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Connections Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-6
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Control Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Traction and Electronic Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Devices
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Text Telephone (TTY) Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Diagnostics
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
i-4 INDEX
Door E Engine (cont'd)

Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Electrical Equipment,
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Electrical System
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Engine Compartment
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4 Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Drive Systems Overheated Protection
Fuses and Circuit
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . .9-26, . . . . 10-23 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Driver Information Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Instrument Panel Fuse
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24, 5-29 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Driving Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Characteristics and Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-22
Emergency
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Engine
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-24 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14
Check and Service Engine
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Coolant Temperature F
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Features
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Coolant Temperature
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Filter,
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Dual Automatic Climate Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Cooling System Messages . . .5-34
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
INDEX i-5
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Fuel (cont'd) Gauges (cont'd)

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 Requirements, California . . . . .9-44 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Fluid System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Warning Lights and
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-10 Fuses Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Engine Compartment General Information
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Fuses and Circuit Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Fog Lamps Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Instrument Panel Fuse Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 GM Mobility Reimbursement
Forward Collision Alert Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 G
Front Seats Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 H
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3
Heated and Cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Gasoline Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Headlamps
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Gauges Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24 Engine Coolant Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Filling a Portable Fuel Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Daytime Running Lamps/
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Automatic Headlamp
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-44 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-23
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
i-6 INDEX
Heated Infants and Young Children, Lamps (cont'd)

Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Heated and Cooled Front Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-17
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Heater Instrument Panel Lane Departure
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18 Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1 Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-17 Lane Departure Warning
High Voltage Devices and Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 J LATCH System
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Replacing Parts after a
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7 Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-28 LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 K Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-36 Liftgate
How to Wear Safety Belts Keyless Entry Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-2 Lighting
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Delayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
I Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 L Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Ignition Transmission Lock Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-37 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Lamps Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Indicator Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
INDEX i-7
Lights Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Messages (cont'd)

Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Lower Anchors and Tethers Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Antilock Brake System for Children (LATCH Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-19 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Object Detection System . . . . .5-36
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Engine Coolant M Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-22 Maintenance Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Maintenance Schedule Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Recommended Fluids Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-21 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-14 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Mirrors
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Automatic Dimming
StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-21 Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Messages Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Locks Battery Voltage and Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-34 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-17
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
i-8 INDEX
Monitor System, Tire Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-36 P

Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25, 7-30 OnStar®
Park
Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
OnStar® Additional
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
N Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Navigation OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Parking
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Brake and P (Park)
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-24
OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-21
OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
O Operation, Infotainment
Parking Assist
Object Detection System Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5, 7-8
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 Passenger Airbag Status
Ordering
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Service Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11
Off-Road Passenger Compartment Air
Outlets
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Oil Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-29
Overheated Engine
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Perchlorate Materials
Protection Requirements, California . . . . . 10-2
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Personalization
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Overview, Infotainment
Phone
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-5
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-37

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
INDEX i-9
Power Radios (cont'd) 7-15, 7-18 Reimbursement Program,

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20 GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15,
. . . 7-18 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Rear Audio Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-19 Controller (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Rear Climate Control Replacement Parts
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8, 8-9 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Pregnancy, Using Safety System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-35
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Rear Seat Entertainment System Replacing LATCH System
Privacy Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-35 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Radio Frequency Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Replacing Safety Belt
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-37 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-22
Program Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-4 Reporting Safety Defects
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
Proposition 65 Warning, Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Recommended Restraints
R Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43 Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
Radio Frequency Recommended Fluids and Retained Accessory
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Records Ride Control Systems
Radios Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recreational Vehicle Roads
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
i-10 INDEX
Roadside Assistance Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15, 7-18 Service (cont'd)

Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7 Maintenance, General
Roof Seats Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Publications Ordering
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7
Running the Vehicle While Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
S Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Shift Lock Control Function
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Securing Child Check, Automatic
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51, 3-53 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Security Shifting
How to Wear Safety Belts Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Side Blind Zone
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-22 Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Signals, Turn and
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-20 Service Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Safety Defects Reporting Accessories and Spare Tire
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3 Specifications and
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-13 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 StabiliTrak
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
INDEX i-11
Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 System Tires (cont'd)

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Forward Collision Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15,
... 7-1 Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-44
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 T Terminology and
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Taillamps Uniform Tire Quality
Storage Areas Turn Signal and Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Stoplamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Wheel Alignment and Tire
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Cargo Management System . . . 4-3 Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-13 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-54
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 When It Is Time for New
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Tires Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Towing
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-47
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-70
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-45 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48 Traction Control/Electronic
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
i-12 INDEX
Trailer V W
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Vehicle Warning
Transmission
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-41
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Warning Lights, Gauges,
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Identification and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Transportation Program,
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Turn and Lane-Change
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
U Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Wheels
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-34 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Alignment and Tire
Uniform Tire Quality Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-49 Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-21 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52 Vehicle Care When It Is Time for New
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-42
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Voltage Devices and Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Windshield
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
INDEX i-13
Winter
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-24
Wipers
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Wiring, High Voltage
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

6014422) - 2014 - crc - 3/26/13
i-14 INDEX
2 NOTES

Traverse

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Traverse

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.

/Canada/Mexico- Black plate (1,1)

2014 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2014 Chevrolet Traverse Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Danger, Warnings, and Symbols

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle Symbol Chart B : Engine Coolant Temperature g : Outside Power Foldaway

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

In Brief Passenger Sensing Lane Departure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

20. Rear Window Wiper/Washer on Initial Drive

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Power Liftgate Windows

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Safety Belts Passenger Sensing The passenger airbag status

Refer to the following sections for

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

3. Return the switch to the center Folding Mirrors Interior Mirror

For vehicles with power folding Manual Rearview Mirror

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Steering Wheel Interior Lighting The dome lamp override button is

To adjust the steering wheel:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Reading Lamps AUTO: Turns the headlamps on Windshield Wiper/Washer

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Windshield Washer Climate Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle Features © or ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

page of favorites can contain any Radio with Touchscreen

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

c /x : Press to reject an Cruise Control SET–: Press briefly to set the

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Some vehicles do not have the Lane Departure

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Rear Vision Power Outlets Universal Remote System

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Performance and Tire Pressure Monitor

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, use

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors